munotes®

Political Science II Notes | B.A. LL.B. (Five Year Course) Semester 3 | Mumbai University | munotes

Official Notes munotes.in

Political Science II

B.A. LL.B. (FIVE YEAR COURSE) · SEMESTER 3

Strictly as per the revised CBCS syllabus of the University of Mumbai

For students of the University of Mumbai and all its affiliated law colleges

Open the book ↓

munotes.in Second Year

Political Science II

Copyright © 2026 munotes.in. All rights reserved.

Written and first published by munotes.in, 2026.

This book is free for individual students to read at munotes.in. No part of it may be reproduced, distributed, stored, translated or used for institutional or classroom purposes in any form without a prior written licence from munotes.in.

Licensing and permissions: contact@munotes.in

The text of statutes and of judgments reproduced in this book is in the public domain under section 52(1)(q) of the Copyright Act 1957. The commentary, arrangement, examples and questions are the original work of munotes.in.

munotes.in is an independent study resource for MU students. It is not affiliated with, endorsed by, or officially connected to the University of Mumbai. Course names and university references describe the students and syllabus the material relates to.

munotes.in

Contents

Module I Power, Authority and Legitimacy

  1. What Power Is, and Why Political Science Begins With It 1
  2. The Definitions of Power, and the Three Faces of It 6
  3. Power, Force, Coercion and Influence: The Family of Words That Get Confused 11
  4. How Political Power Is Actually Exercised 15
  5. The Role of the Government in Decision Making 19
  6. External Influences on the Exercise of Political Power 23
  7. Interest Groups and Pressure Groups 27
  8. Lobbying as a Technique 32
  9. Lobbying in India and in the United States 37
  10. The Elite Theory of Power 43
  11. The Marxist Theory of Power 49
  12. The Elite Theory and the Marxist Theory Compared 55
  13. What Authority Is 60
  14. The Features of Authority 65
  15. De Jure and De Facto Authority 69
  16. Max Weber's Classification of Authority 74
  17. Traditional Authority 78
  18. Charismatic Authority 83
  19. Legal Rational Authority 88
  20. The Sources of Authority: How Power Is Legalised 93
  21. Power and Authority Compared 98
  22. Legitimacy: The Concept 102
  23. The Relevance of Legitimacy in the Exercise of Political Power 107

Module II Political Obligation - State Authority and Citizen

  1. What Political Obligation Is 112
  2. The Command and Obedience Relationship 117
  3. Why People Obey Laws: The Grounds of Political Obligation 122
  4. D. D. Raphael on Political Obligation 127
  5. The Theories of Political Obligation: A Map 132
  6. The Divine Right Theory of Kings 136
  7. The Social Contract and Consent Theory 141
  8. Hobbes: The Contract Into Absolute Sovereignty 146
  9. Locke: The Contract as a Trust 152
  10. Rousseau: The General Will 157
  11. Consent Theory and Its Critics 162
  12. The Theory of Force 167
  13. The Theory of Prescriptive Possession 172
  14. Karl Marx on Political Obligation 177
  15. What an Unjust Law Is 183
  16. The Right to Resistance and Dissent 189
  17. T. H. Green on Resistance 195
  18. Harold Laski on Resistance 200
  19. M. K. Gandhi on Resistance 206
  20. Martin Luther King Jr on Resistance 211
  21. Nelson Mandela on Resistance 217
  22. Satyagraha: The Gandhian Technique of Resistance 223
  23. Punishment: Why the State Does It at All 229
  24. Kant's Retributivism 234
  25. Jeremy Bentham's Utilitarian Theory of Punishment 240
  26. The Justification of Punishment 246
  27. The Deterrent and Preventive Approaches 252
  28. Gandhi and the Reformative Approach to Punishment 258
  29. Implicit Bias in the Justice Delivery System 265
  30. Social Injustice and Social Inequality in Punishment 270
  31. Ethnic Profiling in the European Union and the United States 275
  32. Black Lives Matter: A Case Study 281

Module III Political Ideologies

  1. What a Political Ideology Is 287
  2. Liberalism: Meaning and Basic Principles 292
  3. Classical and Modern Liberalism 297
  4. The Shift From Negative Liberty to Positive Liberty 302
  5. Liberalism: The Arguments For and Against 308
  6. J. S. Mill on Liberty: The Harm Principle 314
  7. Mill's Influence on the Indian Constitution 320
  8. Utilitarianism: Meaning and Basic Principles 325
  9. Bentham's Utilitarianism and the Felicific Calculus 330
  10. J. S. Mill's Modification of Benthamite Utilitarianism 336
  11. Utilitarianism: The Arguments For and Against 342
  12. Sarvodaya, Compared With Utilitarianism 348
  13. Socialism: Meaning and Basic Principles 354
  14. The Kinds of Socialism 359
  15. Socialism: The Arguments For and Against 364
  16. Socialism's Influence on the Indian Constitution 369
  17. Communism: The Basic Principles 375
  18. An Evaluation of Communism 381
  19. Socialism and Communism Compared 386
  20. Gandhism and Communism Compared 391

Module IV Indian Democracy at Work

  1. What a Political Party Is 397
  2. Political Parties and Interest Groups Distinguished 402
  3. The Significance of Political Parties in India 407
  4. The Features of Political Parties in India 412
  5. Coalition Politics in India 417
  6. The Future of the Multi-Party System in India 422
  7. Democracy and the Consent of the Governed 427
  8. The Conditions Essential for the Success of Democracy 432
  9. The Ethical Decay of Democracy 437
  10. The Old Challenges to Indian Democracy 442
  11. The New Challenges to Indian Democracy 448
  12. Gandhian Gram Swaraj 454
  13. Dr Ambedkar's Views on Decentralisation 459
  14. Article 40, and the Road to the 73rd and 74th Amendments 464
  15. The 73rd Amendment: Panchayats 470
  16. The 74th Amendment: Municipalities 477
  17. The Gram Sabha and Participatory Democracy 484
  18. Gender in Local Government: The Promise and the Limits 491
  19. Social Inclusion in Local Government: The Promise and the Limits 499
munotes.in

Module I

Power, Authority and Legitimacy

munotes.in

Chapter One

What Power Is, and Why Political Science Begins With It

Syllabus topic 1.1, "Power as a concept in Political Science"; 1.1.1, "Meaning and definitions of Power"

In one line

Power is the ability to make somebody do what you want, even when they would rather not.

In the wording a student can write in an exam: power is the capacity of a person or a group to affect the behaviour of another person or group in a way the second would not have chosen, whether by force, by the threat of force, by reward, by persuasion or by control of the situation in which the second has to act.

Why political science begins here

Every other idea in this subject is built out of this one. Authority is power that people accept as rightful. Legitimacy is the belief that makes them accept it. Political obligation is the duty that belief is supposed to produce. Resistance is what happens when the belief fails. An ideology is an argument about who should have power and for what. Democracy is one answer to the question of who should hold it. Take power out and the syllabus has nothing left standing.

It also explains why a law student is taught this at all. Law is the most organised form of power a society possesses. A statute is a command that changes what millions of people may lawfully do. A decree is an order backed by the machinery of the state. A lawyer who does not understand power understands only the words on the face of the instrument, and not what the instrument is.

The words you need before we start

These six words are used on every page that follows, and they are not interchangeable. Fix them now.

The state. A community of people occupying a definite territory, having a government that is obeyed by the bulk of that community, and independent of the control of any other state. Four elements, and all four are required: population, territory, government and sovereignty. India is a state. The Republic of India came into existence on 26 January 1950; the territory, the people and something recognisable as government existed long before.

Government. The machinery through which the state acts: the legislature that makes law, the executive that carries it out, and the judiciary that applies it to disputes. The state is permanent and abstract; a government is temporary and concrete. Governments in India change every few years and the state does not change with them. Confusing the two is the commonest first-year error in this subject.

Sovereignty. The supreme law-making power within a territory, subject to no higher legal authority. Internal sovereignty is supremacy over everybody inside; external sovereignty is independence of everybody outside.

Political system. Everything that takes part in the making of binding decisions for a society, which is wider than the government: parties, interest groups, the press, the courts, the electorate, and the rules by which they all operate.

munotes.in1

What Power Is, and Why Political Science Begins With It

Authority. Power that those subject to it accept as rightful. This gets its own chapter, and the difference between power and authority is examined directly.

Legitimacy. The quality that makes people believe an authority is entitled to be obeyed.

What power actually is

The meaning of power, once the ordinary uses of the word are cleared away, is narrower and stranger than a beginner expects. Four things are true of it, and each one contradicts something the word suggests in daily speech.

It is a relationship, not a possession

The ordinary way of speaking hides this. We say a person "has power", as though power were a thing kept in a cupboard. It is not. Power exists only between people. A Collector has power over the residents of the district and none at all over a Collector in another state. A teacher has power in the classroom and none in the market. The correct question is never "does he have power?" but "power over whom, in what, and how much?".

Four things follow, and each one is worth marks in an answer.

  1. Power is relational. It requires at least two parties, one who exercises and one over whom it is exercised.
  2. Power is situational. It changes with the setting. A man who commands a battalion may be ignored at home.
  3. Power is a matter of degree. It is not held or not held; it is held over some matters and not others, and more over some people than others.
  4. Power is dynamic. It shifts. Yesterday's ruling party is today's opposition.

It works even when nobody does anything

This is the point students miss, and examiners like it. Power is a capacity, not an event. A police officer standing on a street corner is exercising power over every driver who slows down on seeing them, and the officer has done nothing at all. The Income Tax Department exercises power over crores of people who file returns and are never audited. If power had to be used to exist, the most powerful person in a society would be the one who gave the most orders, which is plainly false: the powerful rarely need to.

Its forms, from the crudest to the subtlest

Force. Physically making someone do something, or preventing them. A prisoner carried into a cell is not obeying; they are being moved.

Coercion. The threat of harm. "Pay the tax or you will be prosecuted." The person still chooses, but the alternatives have been arranged so that only one is bearable.

Inducement. The offer of reward. A subsidy, a licence, a contract.

munotes.in2

What Power Is, and Why Political Science Begins With It

Persuasion. Getting somebody to want what you want, by argument or appeal.

Manipulation. Getting somebody to want what you want without their knowing that you did it, and often without their knowing there was anything to decide.

Control of the agenda. Deciding what will be discussed at all, which is the subject of the next chapter.

A worked example

Ramesh runs a small printing press in a municipal ward. The municipality is about to widen the road and the widening will take four feet of his frontage.

Force is the bulldozer arriving with a police escort. It ends the matter, and it is the form of power the municipality least wants to use, because it is expensive, slow and unpopular.

Coercion is the notice under the municipal Act telling him that if he does not remove the structure within fifteen days it will be removed at his cost. Ramesh still decides. He decides under a threat.

Inducement is the offer of an alternative plot at a concessional rate. His behaviour is being changed by an offer rather than a threat.

Persuasion is the ward officer explaining that the widening will bring customers past his shop. If it works, Ramesh removes the structure himself and thinks it was his idea.

Manipulation is the officer telling him, untruthfully, that every other shopkeeper has already agreed. He acts freely on a false picture of the world.

Control of the agenda is the most powerful move of all, and it is invisible. The municipality decided, two years earlier and in a meeting Ramesh never heard of, that this road would be widened and the parallel road would not. By the time Ramesh is consulted, the only question left is how, not whether. Nobody coerced him. The decision that mattered was taken where he was not present.

Notice which form did the most work and attracted the least attention. That is the whole reason political scientists insist that power is more than force.

Distinctions that carry marks

PowerForceInfluenceAuthority
What it isCapacity to affect another's behaviourPhysical application of harm or restraintAbility to affect another's behaviour without any sanctionPower accepted as rightful
Does the other party choose?Usually yes, under pressureNo, the body is simply movedYes, freelyYes, and willingly
Rests onAny basis at allPhysical superiorityReputation, expertise, affection, argumentBelief in the right to command
ExampleA tax noticeAn arrestAn editorial that changes a minister's mindA judge's order
If it failsThe holder may escalateNothing is left to escalate toNothing follows; there was no sanctionThe system is in a legitimacy crisis
munotes.in3

What Power Is, and Why Political Science Begins With It

What power is NOT

Power is not the same as force. Force is one way of exercising power, and the least efficient. A state that has to use force on its citizens every day is a weak state, not a strong one. The strong state is the one whose citizens comply without anyone being touched.

Power is not the same as authority. A dacoit who takes your money at gunpoint has power over you. A tax officer who takes it under a statute has authority. Both take the money; only one of them can expect you to think they were entitled to. This is the distinction the whole of Module I is built on.

Power is not always bad. A hospital superintendent who orders an operating theatre cleared has power, and the exercise of it saves a life. Political science studies power as a fact, not as an accusation.

Power is not the same as its holder's intentions. A rule made for one purpose may reshape behaviour in another. The effect of power is measured in what changes, not in what was meant.

Quick revision

  1. Power is the capacity to affect another's behaviour in a way that other would not have chosen. Weber's own definition, in the next chapter, is the one to quote.
  2. It is a relationship, not a possession: relational, situational, a matter of degree, and dynamic.
  3. It is a capacity, so it operates without being used. The most powerful rarely give orders.
  4. Six forms, crudest to subtlest: force, coercion, inducement, persuasion, manipulation, control of the agenda.
  5. State has four elements: population, territory, government, sovereignty. Government is the machinery; the state is permanent, a government is not.
  6. Power against authority: the dacoit and the tax officer both take the money. Only one is entitled to.

Test yourself

1. Define power and give its four characteristics. Power is the capacity of a person or group to affect the behaviour of another in a way the second would not have chosen, whatever the basis of that capacity. It is relational, since it exists only between parties; situational, since it varies with the setting; a matter of degree, since it is held over some matters and not others; and dynamic, since it shifts over time.

2. "The most powerful people give the fewest orders." Explain. Power is a capacity, not an event. It works through anticipated reactions: people adjust their behaviour to what they expect the powerful to want, so the order never has to be given. A ruler who must issue and enforce commands constantly is meeting resistance, which is evidence of weakness. Anticipated compliance is the ordinary condition of stable power.

3. Distinguish power from force with an example. Force is the physical application of harm or restraint, and it removes choice altogether. Power is wider: it includes the threat of force, reward, persuasion, manipulation and control of the agenda, all of which leave the subject choosing under pressure. A prisoner carried bodily into a cell is subject to force; a shopkeeper who removes an encroachment on receiving a notice is subject to power.

munotes.in4

What Power Is, and Why Political Science Begins With It

4. Why must a law student study power? Law is the most organised form of power a society possesses. A statute changes what millions may lawfully do and a decree is an order backed by the state's machinery. A lawyer who reads only the words of an instrument, and does not ask who is being made to do what and by what means, has understood the text and not the thing.

5. Distinguish the state from the government. The state is a community occupying a definite territory, with a government obeyed by the bulk of it and independent of external control; its four elements are population, territory, government and sovereignty. The government is only the machinery through which the state acts. The state is permanent and abstract, a government is temporary and concrete, and a change of government leaves the state untouched.

Contents This chapter on its own page

munotes.in5

Chapter Two

The Definitions of Power, and the Three Faces of It

Syllabus topic 1.1.1, "Meaning and definitions of Power"

In one line

There is no single agreed definition of power, and the disagreements between the definitions are not verbal: each one puts the searchlight on a different part of political life, and a student who knows three definitions can answer a question three ways.

In the wording a student can write in an exam: political scientists have defined power variously as the probability of carrying out one's own will against resistance (Weber), as the production of intended effects (Russell), as participation in the making of decisions (Lasswell and Kaplan), and as the ability to make another do something they would not otherwise do (Dahl). Bachrach and Baratz added that power also operates by keeping issues off the agenda altogether, which they called the second face of power.

Why the definitions differ

An answer that simply lists definitions gets few marks. What gets marks is knowing why the list is a list. Each definition is built around the case its author found most important.

Weber was writing a general sociology and wanted a definition wide enough to cover a landlord, a bishop and an army. Russell was writing after the First World War and was interested in the deliberate exercise of will. Lasswell and Kaplan, and later Dahl, were American political scientists who wanted a definition they could measure: something you could go and observe in a city council. Bachrach and Baratz were answering Dahl, and their objection was that a definition you can measure will only find the power that shows.

The definitions, one at a time

Max Weber

Weber's is the definition to quote if you quote only one, because everything else in this module descends from it. In section 16 of the first part of Wirtschaft und Gesellschaft he writes that Macht means every chance, within a social relationship, of carrying through one's own will even against resistance, no matter what that chance rests on. The words are his; the English is our rendering.

Three things in that sentence do the work.

"Every chance." Weber says jede Chance, a probability, not an act. Power is the likelihood of prevailing, which is why it exists without being used.

"Even against resistance." The test case of power is opposition. Where there is no resistance there is nothing to measure, which is why this definition is easy to state and hard to apply.

"No matter what that chance rests on." Weber immediately adds that the concept of power is, in sociological terms, amorphous: any quality of a person and any configuration of circumstances may put someone in a position to prevail. Money, office, beauty, knowledge, a gun, a caste, a majority in a legislature. This is not vagueness; it is the point. Power has no single source.

munotes.in6

The Definitions of Power, and the Three Faces of It

In the same passage Weber defines two narrower terms that examiners like, because students confuse all three. Herrschaft, which we render as domination or authority, is the chance of finding obedience for a command of a given content among specifiable persons. Disziplin, discipline, is the chance of finding prompt, automatic and unthinking obedience among a specifiable number of people, by force of habit. Power is the widest, authority is narrower, discipline is narrowest.

Bertrand Russell

Russell defined power as the production of intended effects. It is the shortest definition in the field and its virtue is that it links power to purpose: an earthquake produces enormous effects and has no power, because it intends nothing.

Its weakness is the mirror image. A great deal of power produces effects nobody intended. A change in the rate of customs duty may destroy an industry the minister never thought about. On Russell's definition that is not an exercise of power at all, which most political scientists find too narrow.

Harold Lasswell and Abraham Kaplan

They defined power as participation in the making of decisions, adding that the exercise of power involves severe sanctions for non-compliance. This is the definition that made power researchable: to find out who has power in a town, find out who takes part in decisions.

Its weakness is what Bachrach and Baratz built a career on. It can only find power in the decisions that were actually taken.

Robert Dahl

Dahl's formulation is the most quoted in the English-speaking world: A has power over B to the extent that A can get B to do something that B would not otherwise do. It is precise, it is comparative, and it can be tested. You watch a decision, you see who wanted what, you see who prevailed.

Its weakness is that it assumes the conflict is visible and that the issue got as far as being decided.

R. H. Tawney

Tawney defined power as the capacity of an individual or group to modify the conduct of other individuals or groups in the manner which he desires, and added that it may be limited by the resistance he encounters. His contribution to an answer is the emphasis on power as a capacity that is always relative to a countervailing capacity.

The three faces of power

This is the framework that makes a good answer, and MU's own reading list points at the middle one.

The first face: who wins the argument

The first face is Dahl's. Power is the ability to prevail in a decision when there is an open conflict of preferences. To study it, take a decision that was made, find the participants, find what each wanted, and see whose preference carried.

munotes.in7

The Definitions of Power, and the Three Faces of It

Its blind spot. It sees only decisions that were made.

The second face: who decides what gets discussed

Peter Bachrach and Morton Baratz argued in 1962 that power has a second face: the ability to keep an issue from ever reaching the agenda. They called this non-decision making. A grievance that is never articulated, or is articulated and never put on the list, has been defeated as thoroughly as one that is put to the vote and lost, and more cheaply, because the losers may never know a contest occurred.

The apparatus that does this is the mobilisation of bias: the settled procedures, rules, rituals and expectations of an institution, which make some kinds of demand easy to raise and others almost impossible. A rule that a matter can be tabled only by a member, in a body that has no member from the affected group, is a mobilisation of bias.

Its blind spot. It still assumes there is a grievance somewhere, felt by somebody.

The third face: who shapes what people want

Steven Lukes argued in 1974 that the most effective and insidious use of power is to prevent the grievance from arising at all, by shaping perceptions and preferences so that people accept their situation as natural, unchangeable or divinely ordained. On this view there may be power at work even where there is no conflict and no complaint, and the absence of complaint proves nothing.

Its blind spot. If power can operate with no observable conflict, it is very hard to prove that it did, and critics say the third face makes power unfalsifiable.

A worked example

A textile mill on the edge of a city discharges effluent into a creek. Three hundred families live along it.

First face. The municipal corporation debates a resolution requiring a treatment plant. The mill's supporters vote it down eighteen to twelve. The mill has exercised power in the first face: an open conflict, a visible defeat.

Second face. The following year the residents' association drafts a fresh resolution. The standing committee rules that effluent is a state pollution board subject and outside the corporation's competence, so the resolution is never tabled. No vote is taken and no defeat is recorded. The mill's power has been exercised more efficiently than before, and the minutes of the corporation show nothing at all.

Third face. Ten years pass. The families along the creek have always lived beside a dirty creek, as their parents did. Nobody drafts a resolution because nobody regards the state of the creek as a thing that could be otherwise. There is no conflict, no non-decision and no record. If you asked the residents whether anybody had power over them they would say no.

munotes.in8

The Definitions of Power, and the Three Faces of It

An examiner asking "discuss the definitions of power" is asking whether you can see all three of those and say which definition catches which.

Distinctions that carry marks

First faceSecond faceThird face
Associated withDahlBachrach and BaratzLukes
Power isPrevailing in a decisionKeeping issues off the agendaShaping what people want
Conflict isOpen and observableSuppressed but realLatent, and may be invisible
Method of studyWatch decisionsWatch what never gets decidedAsk what interests are being frustrated
Main criticismSees only visible conflictStill needs a felt grievanceHard or impossible to prove

What these definitions are NOT

They are not rival descriptions of the same fact. They are searchlights pointed at different parts of the field. An answer that says "Dahl was wrong and Lukes was right" has misunderstood the argument. Dahl's definition is correct about the thing it measures.

"Definitions of power" is not an invitation to list names. Every definition in an answer should be followed by what it lets you see and what it hides.

Weber's definition is not a definition of authority. Weber gives three definitions in one passage and they are not the same. Using Macht where you mean Herrschaft is the error the next chapters exist to prevent.

Quick revision

  1. Weber: power is every chance of carrying through one's own will within a social relationship even against resistance, whatever that chance rests on. In the same passage: Herrschaft is the chance of obedience to a command, Disziplin is the chance of automatic obedience.
  2. Russell: the production of intended effects. Lasswell and Kaplan: participation in the making of decisions. Dahl: A gets B to do what B would not otherwise do. Tawney: capacity to modify others' conduct in the manner desired.
  3. First face, Dahl: winning open conflicts.
  4. Second face, Bachrach and Baratz 1962: non-decision making, and the mobilisation of bias.
  5. Third face, Lukes 1974: shaping preferences so that no grievance arises.
  6. Each definition's weakness is the next definition's reason for existing. That sentence is what turns a list into an answer.

Test yourself

1. State Weber's definition of power and explain its three key elements. Power means every chance, within a social relationship, of carrying through one's own will even against resistance, whatever that chance may rest on. "Every chance" makes power a probability rather than an act, so it exists without being exercised. "Even against resistance" makes opposition the test case. "Whatever it rests on" makes the concept deliberately amorphous: Weber says any human quality and any configuration of circumstances may confer it, so power has no single source.

munotes.in9

The Definitions of Power, and the Three Faces of It

2. What did Bachrach and Baratz add to Dahl's account? They argued that power has a second face. Besides prevailing in decisions that are actually taken, power operates by preventing issues from reaching the agenda at all, which they called non-decision making. The instrument is the mobilisation of bias, the settled rules and procedures of an institution that make some demands easy to raise and others practically impossible. A grievance suppressed before it is tabled has been defeated more cheaply than one that is voted down.

3. Why is Russell's definition thought too narrow? Russell defines power as the production of intended effects, which usefully separates power from a natural force such as an earthquake. But much power produces effects nobody intended: a change in a duty may ruin an industry the minister never considered. On Russell's definition that is not an exercise of power at all, and most political scientists think a definition should capture it.

4. Give a worked illustration of the three faces of power. A mill pollutes a creek. In the first face, a resolution requiring treatment is tabled and voted down: open conflict, visible defeat. In the second face, the next resolution is ruled out of order as beyond the body's competence and is never tabled: no vote, no record, the same result more cheaply. In the third face, years later nobody drafts a resolution because a dirty creek has come to seem the natural state of things: no conflict, no grievance, and nothing at all in the minutes.

5. What is the main criticism of the third face of power? That it cannot be proved. If power can operate where there is no observable conflict and no complaint, then any state of contentment can be attributed to power, and the claim cannot be tested against evidence. Defenders answer that the difficulty of proof is not a reason to deny that the thing exists, and that latent conflict can be argued for by showing what people would want under conditions of relative autonomy.

Contents This chapter on its own page

munotes.in10

Chapter Three

Power, Force, Coercion and Influence: The Family of Words That Get Confused

Syllabus topic 1.1.1, "Meaning and definitions of Power"

In one line

Power, force, coercion, influence, authority, manipulation and control are seven different things, and the examiner's favourite question is whether you can tell them apart.

In the wording a student can write in an exam: power is the general capacity to affect the behaviour of others; force is the physical application of harm or restraint; coercion is the threat of it; influence is the ability to affect behaviour without any sanction at all; authority is power accepted as rightful; manipulation is influence exercised without the subject's knowledge; and control is power so complete that the subject's compliance is habitual.

Why the words have to be kept apart

Ordinary speech treats them as synonyms. A newspaper will say a minister is "powerful", "influential" and "an authority on the subject" in one paragraph and mean roughly the same thing three times. Political science cannot afford that, for a reason that becomes obvious in Module II.

The whole question of political obligation is: why should anybody obey? If power and authority were the same word, the question would answer itself, because obedience would be nothing but the effect of superior strength, and there would be no such thing as an unjust law to disobey. Every argument in this book about resistance, dissent and satyagraha depends on the distinction between the officer who is entitled to give you an order and the man who is merely able to enforce one.

The seven, one at a time

Power

The genus. Everything else on this list is a species of it, an ingredient of it, or its limiting case. Power is the capacity to affect another's behaviour in a way that other would not have chosen, whatever the capacity rests on.

Force

The physical application of harm or restraint to a person or a thing. Its distinguishing feature is that the subject does not choose. When four constables carry a protester off a road, the protester is not obeying, complying or submitting; the protester is being moved. That is why force is the crudest form of power and, oddly, the weakest evidence of it.

Force is also self-limiting. It has to be applied to each person separately, it costs money and manpower, and it produces resentment that raises the cost of the next application. A government that must use force routinely is not demonstrating strength; it is demonstrating that everything cheaper has failed.

Coercion

The threat of force or of some other serious harm. The subject still chooses, but the alternatives have been arranged so that only one is bearable. "Vacate the premises or be evicted" is coercion. "Pay the penalty or be prosecuted" is coercion.

The distinction from force matters in law as well as in political theory. A confession obtained by beating is obtained by force; a confession obtained by telling a suspect his brother will be arrested is obtained by coercion. Indian criminal law treats both as vitiating consent, but they are not the same fact and are not proved by the same evidence.

munotes.in11

Power, Force, Coercion and Influence: The Family of Words That Get Confused

Inducement

The offer of a benefit. It is the mirror image of coercion, and the two are often confused because both change behaviour by rearranging the alternatives. The test is the baseline: coercion threatens to make you worse off than you would have been; inducement offers to make you better off. A subsidy for installing effluent treatment is inducement. A penalty for not installing it is coercion. The two may produce identical behaviour and are morally very different, which is why governments prefer the first when they can afford it.

Influence

The ability to affect another's behaviour without any sanction at all, positive or negative. A retired judge whose opinion changes a minister's mind has influence. An editorial that changes a policy has influence. A teacher whose student takes up a subject has influence.

Two features distinguish it. First, there is nothing to fall back on: if the influence fails, nothing follows, because there was never a threat or an offer. Second, influence usually operates through the subject's own reasoning: the person is persuaded, and then does the thing because they now want to.

Influence and power overlap and are not the same. Every exercise of influence is an exercise of power in the wide Weberian sense, because the subject's behaviour was affected. Not every exercise of power is influence, because most power carries a sanction.

Manipulation

Influence exercised without the subject knowing that it is being exercised, or on a false picture of the facts. A minister who leaks a selective statistic to a newspaper so that a policy looks inevitable is manipulating. The subject acts freely, and would have acted differently had they known.

Manipulation is the hardest of these to detect and the easiest to deny, which is why it is central to the second and third faces of power.

Authority

Power that those subject to it accept as rightful. The authority relationship has a feature none of the others has: the subject obeys because of who gave the order, and not because of what the order says or what will happen if it is disobeyed. A litigant who obeys a decree they think mistaken is obeying an authority.

Control

Power so complete and so settled that compliance no longer requires anything at all: no force, no threat, no argument. Weber's Disziplin, the chance of prompt and automatic obedience by force of habit, is the sociologist's name for it. A well-run army in peacetime is the standard example.

munotes.in12

Power, Force, Coercion and Influence: The Family of Words That Get Confused

The distinctions table

Rests onDoes the subject choose?Does the subject know?If it fails
ForcePhysical superiorityNoYesNothing is left; force is the last resort
CoercionA credible threatYes, under duressYesThe threat must be carried out or abandoned
InducementA resource to offerYesYesThe offer is raised or withdrawn
InfluenceReputation, argument, affectionYes, freelyYesNothing follows; there was no sanction
ManipulationControl of informationYes, but on false premisesNoIt is exposed, and the influence is destroyed
AuthorityBelief that the holder is entitledYes, willinglyYesThe system faces a legitimacy crisis
ControlSettled habitCompliance is not deliberatedBarelyIt reverts to authority or coercion

A worked example

An Assistant Commissioner of Police must clear a road blocked by a protest of two hundred people.

She begins with authority: she reads out the order under which the assembly has been prohibited and asks the crowd to disperse. Fifty leave. They obey because a police officer, acting under an order, told them to, and they think she is entitled to.

She uses influence on the organisers: she points out that the person whose grievance they are pressing has an appointment with the Collector that afternoon, and that the road blockade will make that meeting harder. Another eighty leave. Nothing was threatened; they were persuaded.

She uses coercion on the remainder: she announces that anybody still on the road in ten minutes will be arrested and charged. Sixty leave. They still chose; they chose under a threat.

The last ten sit down and lock arms. She uses force: they are lifted into a van. Nobody is obeying anything now; they are being carried.

Read the sequence backwards and you have the whole of Module I. The cheapest, fastest and most complete compliance came from authority, and it worked on the largest group. Force worked on the smallest group and cost the most. And if you asked which of the four was the greatest exercise of power, the answer is the first, which looked like nothing at all.

What these are NOT

Force is not the paradigm of power. Students reach for the gun because it is vivid. It is the least common and least effective form.

Influence is not weak power. It is a different relation, not a smaller quantity of the same one. A newspaper columnist may change more behaviour than an inspector.

Authority is not merely legal authority. A parent, a guru and a senior counsel all exercise authority, and none of them holds an office under a statute. Legal authority is one species.

munotes.in13

Power, Force, Coercion and Influence: The Family of Words That Get Confused

Manipulation is not the same as persuasion. Persuasion gives the subject reasons they can examine; manipulation withholds or falsifies them. The moral difference between the two is the whole basis of the law on misrepresentation.

Quick revision

  1. Power is the genus; the rest are species, ingredients or limiting cases.
  2. Force: the subject does not choose. Crudest, costliest, self-limiting.
  3. Coercion: a threat. The subject chooses under duress.
  4. Inducement: an offer. The test against coercion is the baseline, worse off or better off.
  5. Influence: no sanction at all. If it fails, nothing follows.
  6. Manipulation: influence the subject does not know about, or acts on falsely.
  7. Authority: power accepted as rightful; the subject obeys because of who ordered.
  8. Control: obedience become habit; Weber's Disziplin.

Test yourself

1. Distinguish force from coercion. Force is the physical application of harm or restraint, and it removes choice: a protester carried into a van is not obeying but being moved. Coercion is the threat of such harm, and it leaves the subject choosing, though under duress, because the alternatives have been arranged so that only one is bearable. Force ends the matter; coercion depends on the threat remaining credible.

2. Distinguish coercion from inducement. Both change behaviour by rearranging the subject's alternatives, and both may produce identical conduct. The test is the baseline. Coercion threatens to make the subject worse off than they would otherwise have been; inducement offers to make them better off. A penalty for untreated effluent is coercion; a subsidy for a treatment plant is inducement.

3. Is influence a kind of power? Give reasons. In the wide Weberian sense it is, because the subject's behaviour is affected within a social relationship. But it differs from most power in two ways: it carries no sanction, so nothing follows if it fails, and it works through the subject's own reasoning, so the subject ends up wanting the outcome. It is a different relation rather than a smaller quantity of the same one.

4. Why is the distinction between power and authority the foundation of Module II? Because political obligation asks why anybody should obey. If power and authority were the same, obedience would be nothing but the effect of superior strength and the question would not arise, nor would there be any such thing as an unjust law. The distinction between the officer entitled to give an order and the man merely able to enforce one is what makes obligation, resistance and civil disobedience intelligible.

5. Distinguish manipulation from persuasion. Both change behaviour without any sanction, and in both the subject acts freely. Persuasion supplies reasons the subject can examine and accept or reject. Manipulation withholds material facts, supplies false ones, or conceals that any influence is being exercised, so that the subject's free choice is made on a picture of the world that the manipulator has arranged. The difference is the basis on which the law distinguishes fair dealing from misrepresentation.

Contents This chapter on its own page

munotes.in14

Chapter Four

How Political Power Is Actually Exercised

Syllabus topic 1.1.2, "Exercise of political power and role of the Government in decision making"

In one line

Political power is exercised through institutions: it is distributed among them by a constitution, it moves between them in practice, and it is limited by other institutions rather than by good intentions.

In the wording a student can write in an exam: the exercise of political power in a modern state is the process by which binding decisions are made and enforced for the whole society, through the legislature, the executive and the judiciary, distributed between levels of government by a constitution, conditioned by parties, bureaucracies, courts and public opinion, and limited by the requirement that every exercise of power be traceable to a legal authority.

What makes power political

Not every exercise of power is political. A parent, an employer and a moneylender all exercise power. Political power has three features that mark it off.

It is exercised for the whole society. A political decision binds everyone within the territory, including those who opposed it and those who never heard of it. A company's decision binds its shareholders; a legislature's binds the shareholders, the customers, the competitors and the passers-by.

It is backed by the state's monopoly of legitimate force. Weber's definition of the state is the human community that successfully claims the monopoly of the legitimate use of physical force within a given territory. Every other body that uses force does so either unlawfully or on the state's permission.

It claims to be authoritative. A political decision is not put forward as one opinion among many. It is put forward as binding.

Where the power sits

The three organs

The legislature makes law. In India that is Parliament for the Union and the Legislature of each State, and law made by them is enforceable by every court and every officer in the territory to which it extends.

The executive carries law into effect. Formally this is the President or the Governor; in reality it is the Council of Ministers headed by the Prime Minister or the Chief Minister, advised and implemented by the permanent civil services.

The judiciary applies law to disputes and, in India, decides whether the other two have kept within their powers.

Separation of powers is the doctrine that these three should be kept in different hands, so that no one body both makes the rule and judges the breach. India does not follow it rigidly: ministers sit in the legislature, and the executive makes delegated legislation by the crore. What India does have is checks and balances: each organ can stop the others at defined points.

The vertical division

Power is divided not only between organs but between levels: the Union, the States and, since 1993, a constitutionally guaranteed tier of local government. The subjects on which each may legislate are listed, and disputes about the boundary are decided by the courts.

munotes.in15

How Political Power Is Actually Exercised

The point a law student should notice. A federal division is itself a limit on power. It means that no single body in the country can lawfully do everything, and that a person aggrieved can ask a court to say that the body which acted was not the body entitled to act.

The bodies that are none of the three

Modern states run on institutions that fit no classical box: election commissions, central banks, auditors, human rights commissions, information commissions and regulators. They exercise real power and are deliberately insulated from the government of the day. Whether that insulation is democratic is one of the standing arguments of Module IV.

How power moves between them

A constitution allocates power on paper. Practice redistributes it, and four of the movements are worth knowing by name.

From the legislature to the executive. Modern legislation is framed in skeleton and filled in by rules, regulations, orders and notifications made by departments. This is delegated legislation, and by volume it is now most of the law in force.

From elected bodies to permanent officials. Ministers change; secretaries and directors do not. The permanent service holds the files, the expertise and the drafting pen. This is the phenomenon Weber predicted when he said that the modern state runs on bureaucracy and that the trained official becomes very hard to displace.

From the state to the courts. Where a legislature is deadlocked or unwilling, litigants turn to constitutional courts, and courts that accept the invitation end up making policy.

From the state to bodies outside it. Regulators, international obligations, credit rating agencies, large firms and the market itself constrain what a government may practically do.

The limits on the exercise of power

This is where political science and law meet, and it is the part a law student should be able to write best.

Constitutional limits. Every organ has only the power the Constitution gives it, and an act beyond that power is void. The Fundamental Rights operate as a boundary on what may be enacted at all.

Judicial review. A court may examine an executive action or a statute and set it aside for want of power. In India this is the single most important practical limit.

The basic structure. Even the power to amend the Constitution is limited: the Supreme Court has held that an amendment may not damage the Constitution's basic structure. This is the outer wall of the whole system and is taught properly in Module III.

Federal limits. A Union law on a State subject, or the reverse, is open to challenge.

munotes.in16

How Political Power Is Actually Exercised

Time limits. Every legislature and every government holds office for a fixed term and must go back to the electorate.

Political limits. Opposition parties, a free press, organised opinion, and the plain fact that a government which loses the confidence of the lower house falls.

A worked example

A State government decides that all commercial vehicles more than fifteen years old must be taken off the road.

The decision is taken in a meeting of the Council of Ministers on a note prepared by the Transport Department. Nobody outside government is present.

The power to act is looked for in the parent statute. If the statute permits the State to prescribe conditions of fitness, the decision can be implemented by a notification. If it does not, an amendment must go to the legislature, which is slower and public.

The instrument is drafted by officials, vetted by the Law Department, and issued as a notification. It becomes binding on lakhs of people who never saw it debated.

The resistance begins. A transporters' association meets the Minister. A newspaper runs a piece on drivers who will lose their livelihood. A political party in opposition takes it up. This is the exercise of power on the government, which is the subject of the next chapters.

A challenge is filed in the High Court, saying the notification is beyond the parent Act and violates the right to carry on a trade. The court now decides whether the government had the power at all.

The election two years later is fought partly on it. If the government loses, the notification may be withdrawn by the next one.

Six different exercises of power, in six different places, on one decision. An answer that describes only the first has described almost nothing.

Distinctions that carry marks

Separation of powersChecks and balances
The ideaEach organ keeps to its own functionEach organ can restrain the others
AimPrevent concentration by divisionPrevent abuse by mutual control
Strict exampleThe United States, where the executive sits outside the legislature
Indian positionNot strict: ministers sit in the legislature, and the executive legislates by delegationStrongly present: judicial review, legislative control of finance, executive appointments subject to law

What this is NOT

The exercise of political power is not the same as the government's activity. Parties, courts, the press, interest groups and voters all exercise political power, and none of them is the government.

It is not exhausted by law making. Most exercises of power in a modern state are administrative: a licence granted, a file cleared, a tender awarded, a prosecution launched or not launched.

A written constitution does not by itself limit power. Limits work only where an institution exists that is willing and able to enforce them, which is why the independence of courts and election commissions is a political question and not a technical one.

munotes.in17

How Political Power Is Actually Exercised

Quick revision

  1. Power is political when it is exercised for the whole society, backed by the state's monopoly of legitimate force, and claimed as binding.
  2. Three organs: legislature makes, executive enforces, judiciary applies and reviews.
  3. India has checks and balances rather than strict separation of powers.
  4. Power is also divided vertically: Union, State and, since 1993, local government.
  5. Four movements in practice: to the executive by delegated legislation, to permanent officials, to the courts, and to bodies outside the state.
  6. Limits: constitutional, judicial review, the basic structure, federal, temporal and political.

Test yourself

1. What makes an exercise of power political rather than merely private? Three things. It is exercised for the whole society, so that it binds everyone in the territory including those who opposed it. It is backed by the state's monopoly of the legitimate use of physical force within that territory. And it is claimed as authoritative rather than offered as one view among many. An employer's power over an employee has none of the three.

2. Does India follow the separation of powers? Explain. Not strictly. Ministers are members of the legislature and are answerable to it, and the executive makes an enormous volume of delegated legislation, so the functions are not kept in separate hands. What India has instead is a system of checks and balances: the courts may review both legislative and executive action, the legislature controls finance and may remove the government, and the executive's appointments and powers are subject to law.

3. Explain delegated legislation as a movement of power. Modern statutes are enacted in skeleton form and completed by rules, regulations, notifications and orders made by departments under an enabling section. The legislature therefore settles the principle and the executive settles the content, which by volume is now most of the law in force. The power to make binding rules has in practice moved from the elected chamber to the permanent administration.

4. Name and explain three limits on the exercise of political power in India. Constitutional limits: an organ has only the power the Constitution confers, and an act beyond it is void. Judicial review: a court may examine a statute or an executive act and set it aside for want of power, which is the most important practical limit. Temporal limits: every legislature and government holds office for a fixed term and must return to the electorate, so that no exercise of power is permanent.

5. Why is a written constitution not by itself a limit on power? Because a limit works only if some institution is willing and able to enforce it. A guarantee that no court will apply, or that an executive can ignore without consequence, is a sentence and not a limit. This is why the independence of the judiciary, the election commission and the audit institutions is treated as a political question about the reality of limits, and not as a matter of administrative arrangement.

Contents This chapter on its own page

munotes.in18

Chapter Five

The Role of the Government in Decision Making

Syllabus topic 1.1.2, "Exercise of political power and role of the Government in decision making"

In one line

A government decision is not a moment when somebody chooses; it is a process with stages, and the models of decision making are competing accounts of what actually happens in that process.

In the wording a student can write in an exam: the government's role in decision making is to convert demands arising in society into binding public decisions, through a policy cycle of agenda setting, formulation, adoption, implementation and evaluation; and how far that process is genuinely rational is contested between the rational, incremental, bureaucratic, garbage-can and mixed-scanning models.

The policy cycle

The stages are worth learning in order, because a question about the government's role can be answered by walking down them.

1. Agenda setting. Out of the thousands of problems in a society, a few become things the government is going to do something about. This is the stage the second face of power operates on, and it is decided as much by what is kept off the list as by what goes on it.

2. Formulation. Options are worked out, usually by officials, sometimes by an expert committee, a commission or a law commission, and increasingly by consultants.

3. Adoption. The choice is made and given legal form: a statute, an ordinance, a notification, a scheme, a budget line.

4. Implementation. The decision is carried out by an administrative machine that has its own interests, capacities and shortages. Most policy failures are failures here.

5. Evaluation. What happened is measured against what was intended, by the audit institution, by parliamentary committees, by courts, by the press and by researchers.

6. Feedback. Evaluation changes the agenda, and the cycle starts again.

The models, and what each one claims

The rational model

Also called the synoptic or comprehensive model. The decision maker defines the goal, lists all the alternatives, works out the consequences of each, and picks the one that best achieves the goal at least cost.

Its virtue. It is the standard against which everything else is measured, and it is the model a court applies when it asks whether a decision was reasonable and whether relevant considerations were taken into account.

Its problem. No government can do this. Nobody knows all the alternatives, the consequences cannot be fully calculated, goals conflict with each other, and time and money run out. Herbert Simon called the result bounded rationality: decision makers work within limits of information, capacity and time, and therefore do not maximise but satisfice, taking the first option that is good enough rather than searching for the best.

The incremental model

Charles Lindblom's answer, and its nickname is the whole argument: the science of muddling through. Governments do not start from first principles. They start from what is already being done and change it a little. Last year's budget plus five per cent. The existing scheme with an extra category added.

munotes.in19

The Role of the Government in Decision Making

Why it happens. It is cheap, it is politically safe, mistakes are small and reversible, and it does not require agreement on ultimate goals, only on the next step.

Its criticisms. It is conservative, it entrenches whoever benefits from the status quo, and it cannot produce the large change a real crisis needs. A country that had reformed its economy incrementally would not have had 1991.

The bureaucratic and organisational model

Graham Allison's contribution. On this account a government decision is not the choice of a single mind at all. It is the output of organisations following their standing procedures, and the resultant of bargaining between departments each of which has its own view, its own budget and its own turf. Ask what a government decided and you often find that no one person decided it.

Its Indian application is obvious. A decision that needs Finance, Home, Law and a State government to agree will look nothing like what any of them would have done alone.

The garbage-can model

Cohen, March and Olsen described organisations in which problems, solutions, participants and choice opportunities are thrown together and connected more or less by chance: a solution that has been sitting in a drawer meets a problem it was not designed for, and gets adopted because both happened to be present when a decision had to be made. Governments produce more decisions of this kind than they admit.

Mixed scanning

Amitai Etzioni's compromise, and the one to quote when a question asks you to choose. Big decisions are taken with a broad, rational scan of the whole field, and the many small decisions that follow are taken incrementally within the frame the big one set. This describes real government better than either pure model.

Who actually decides in India

The Council of Ministers is where a major decision is formally taken, on a note prepared by a department, and its decisions are collective.

The department frames the note, and framing is power: the options that reach the meeting are the options the department wrote down.

The Cabinet Secretariat and the Finance Ministry are the two gatekeepers almost nothing gets past.

Expert bodies produce the material that shapes the option set: commissions, law commissions, and the policy think tank that replaced the Planning Commission.

Parliament adopts what needs a statute, scrutinises through committees, and controls money.

The courts review, and in India also sometimes direct.

The States implement most of what touches an ordinary person's life, because health, police, land, agriculture and local government are State subjects.

munotes.in20

The Role of the Government in Decision Making

A worked example

A State decides to give a monthly cash transfer to women heads of poor households.

Agenda setting. The demand exists for years and goes nowhere. It reaches the agenda when an election is a year away and a neighbouring State's scheme is reported to have worked. Notice that the merits did not change; the political opportunity did.

Formulation. The Women and Child Development Department prepares a note with three options: a universal transfer, a transfer to households below the poverty line, and a transfer with an income cut-off and an exclusion list. Finance costs each. The department's preference is visible in the order the options are listed.

Adoption. The Council of Ministers approves the third option. This is the moment the model matters: it looks like a rational choice among three, but the three were chosen by officials, and a fourth option, spending the same money on childcare, was never written down.

Implementation. The transfer requires bank accounts, an eligibility list, a grievance mechanism and a helpline. The list is built from an old database, so a large number of eligible women are missing and a smaller number of ineligible ones are included. This is where the scheme is actually decided, by clerks applying a proforma.

Evaluation. The audit institution reports on exclusion errors. A newspaper finds women who were left out. A petition is filed. A committee recommends changes.

Feedback. Next year's version raises the cut-off and adds an appeal. That is incrementalism, and it will now continue for a decade.

Distinctions that carry marks

Rational modelIncremental model
Starting pointThe goal, defined afreshWhat is already being done
Range of optionsAll of themThose marginally different from the present
Test appliedWhich best achieves the goalWhich can be agreed on now
AssumesFull information and settled goalsNeither
StrengthA standard of good decision makingDescribes what governments really do
WeaknessImpossible in practiceConservative, and helpless in a crisis
Associated withThe classical account; Simon's critiqueLindblom, "the science of muddling through"

What this is NOT

Decision making is not the same as policy. A policy is a settled line of action; a decision is one act within it. Governments take thousands of decisions inside a single policy.

A decision is not made where it is announced. It is usually made in the drafting of the note that limited the options.

Not deciding is a decision. A government that lets a file sit has decided, and the decision binds exactly as much as an order would.

Implementation is not a technical afterthought. Most schemes that fail are well designed and badly delivered, which is why evaluation studies concentrate on delivery.

munotes.in21

The Role of the Government in Decision Making

Quick revision

  1. The policy cycle: agenda setting, formulation, adoption, implementation, evaluation, feedback.
  2. Rational model: define the goal, list all options, compute consequences, maximise. Impossible; Simon's bounded rationality and satisficing.
  3. Incremental model, Lindblom: start from the present and change it a little. "Muddling through." Safe and conservative.
  4. Bureaucratic and organisational model, Allison: the output of standard procedures and inter-departmental bargaining, not the choice of one mind.
  5. Garbage-can model: problems and ready-made solutions meet by chance.
  6. Mixed scanning, Etzioni: broad scanning for the big decision, incrementalism for the rest. The best single answer.
  7. In India: the department frames, the Council of Ministers adopts, Finance and the Cabinet Secretariat gatekeep, Parliament legislates and scrutinises, the courts review, and the States implement.

Test yourself

1. Set out the stages of the policy cycle. Agenda setting, in which a problem becomes one the government will act on; formulation, in which options are worked out, usually by officials or an expert body; adoption, in which the choice is made and given legal form; implementation, in which the administration carries it out; evaluation, in which outcomes are measured against intentions; and feedback, in which the evaluation reshapes the agenda and the cycle begins again.

2. What is bounded rationality, and whose idea is it? Herbert Simon's. Decision makers cannot achieve the comprehensive rationality the classical model demands, because information is incomplete, consequences cannot be fully computed, goals conflict, and time and money are limited. They therefore work within those bounds and satisfice, adopting the first alternative that is good enough rather than searching for the best available one.

3. Explain the incremental model and state two criticisms of it. Lindblom's model holds that governments begin from what is already being done and change it marginally, because that is cheap, politically safe, and needs agreement only on the next step rather than on ultimate goals. It is criticised as conservative, since it entrenches whoever benefits from the present arrangement, and as inadequate to a crisis, since a situation that requires large and rapid change cannot be met by successive small ones.

4. How does Allison's bureaucratic model change the question "what did the government decide?" It denies that there was a single deciding mind. On this account a government decision is the output of organisations executing their standard operating procedures, and the resultant of bargaining among departments with different interests, budgets and jurisdictions. The right question becomes which organisations were involved, what their routines produced, and how the bargain between them was struck.

5. What is mixed scanning, and why is it the most realistic model? Etzioni's proposal that decision making operates at two levels: fundamental decisions are taken after a broad but not exhaustive scan of the whole field, and the many small decisions that follow are taken incrementally within the frame those fundamental ones set. It is realistic because it accounts for both the rare large reform and the ordinary daily adjustment, which neither the rational nor the incremental model can do alone.

Contents This chapter on its own page

munotes.in22

Chapter Six

External Influences on the Exercise of Political Power

Syllabus topic 1.1.3, "External influences on Exercise of Political Power (Role of Interests groups, Lobbying as a technique, Examples from India and the USA)"

In one line

A government never decides in a vacuum: outside the formal machinery of the state, organised groups, the press, business, courts, foreign governments and public opinion all press on the decision, and the pressing is itself an exercise of power.

In the wording a student can write in an exam: external influences on the exercise of political power are the forces outside the constitutional organs of government which shape what those organs decide, principally interest and pressure groups, the media, business and finance, trade unions, religious and caste organisations, civil society and social movements, foreign states and international organisations, and public opinion itself.

Why the topic exists

The last two chapters described power flowing down: the state deciding, the administration implementing. That picture is only half true, and a student who leaves it there cannot explain why governments so often do things their own analysis says are unwise, or fail to do things everybody agrees are necessary.

Power also flows upward and sideways, from society into the state. The decision the Council of Ministers takes has already been shaped, before it reaches the meeting, by who was consulted, whose data was used, which newspaper ran which story, which association met which minister, and what the government believes the electorate will tolerate. That shaping is the subject of this chapter.

A word to fix: "external" here means outside the formal organs of government, not outside the country. A domestic trade association is an external influence; so is a foreign government. Students routinely read "external" as "foreign" and answer the wrong question.

The influences, by kind

Interest groups and pressure groups

Organised bodies that seek to influence public policy without seeking office themselves. They are the most important of the external influences and get the next chapter.

The media

Newspapers, television and now digital platforms shape the exercise of power in three distinct ways, and an answer that separates them reads better than one that says "the media is powerful".

Agenda setting. The press cannot tell people what to think, but it is very effective at telling them what to think about. A story run for a week makes a subject unavoidable for a government.

Framing. How an issue is described settles what counts as a solution. The same fact is a law and order problem, an economic problem or a human rights problem depending on the frame, and each frame has a different set of remedies attached.

Scrutiny. Investigation exposes what the government would not have disclosed, which is why press freedom is treated as a structural feature of a democracy rather than a private right of journalists.

Business and finance

Business influences policy through three channels that should be distinguished. Representation, through chambers of commerce and industry associations. Structural power, which requires no lobbying at all: a government that needs investment, employment and tax revenue adjusts its policy in anticipation of what capital will accept. And finance, through political contributions, which is where the influence becomes a legal question.

munotes.in23

External Influences on the Exercise of Political Power

Trade unions and professional bodies

Unions influence labour and welfare policy; bar associations, medical councils and similar bodies exercise a distinct kind of influence, because the state has often delegated regulation of the profession to them, so they are simultaneously an outside group and a part of the machinery.

Religious, caste and community organisations

In India these are among the most effective external influences, because they can deliver both opinion and votes, and because personal law, education, temple administration, reservations and public order all touch them directly.

Civil society and social movements

Non-governmental organisations, campaigns and movements. The Indian pattern is distinctive: several major statutes of the last twenty-five years began as movements outside the state, and the right to information is the clearest example, having been demanded by a rural movement in Rajasthan long before it became a central Act.

Foreign states and international organisations

Treaties, trade agreements, conditions attached to loans, and plain diplomatic pressure. A state that ratifies a convention has limited its own future choices, which is an external influence its own citizens did not vote for.

Public opinion

The most diffuse and the most powerful. A government's estimate of what the electorate will accept operates on every decision, and it operates in advance, which makes it a textbook instance of the second face of power.

How the influence is exercised

The channels are worth listing separately from the actors, because the same actor uses several.

  1. Representation and consultation. Meetings, memoranda, submissions to committees and pre-legislative consultation.
  2. Expertise. Supplying the data and the draft. Whoever writes the first draft has more power than whoever approves the last.
  3. Publicity. Campaigns, advertising and now social media.
  4. Electoral pressure. The promise or threat of votes.
  5. Money. Contributions to parties, which is why the law on political funding is a Module IV question.
  6. Direct action. Strikes, bandhs, road blockades, hunger strikes, and the rasta roko, which is Marathi and Hindi for a road blockade.
  7. Litigation. In India, public interest litigation has made the courts a standing channel for groups that lose in the legislature.

A worked example

A State proposes to convert two hundred hectares of farmland into an industrial park.

The farmers' association organises a rasta roko and a march to the district headquarters: direct action and publicity.

The industry chamber meets the Chief Minister with a paper on the jobs the park will create: representation and expertise.

munotes.in24

External Influences on the Exercise of Political Power

A national newspaper runs a series on the families who will lose land, and a business daily runs one on the investment that will go to another State if the park is delayed. The two frames make different remedies obvious: compensation in the first, speed in the second.

A caste association whose members are most of the affected farmers signals that it will campaign against the government in the next election: electoral pressure.

An NGO files a public interest petition on the environmental clearance: litigation.

The investor says nothing publicly at all, and simply lets it be known that its board will decide next quarter between this State and another. That is structural power, and it is the most effective move on the board.

The outcome. The government raises compensation, shrinks the park by forty hectares and expedites the clearance. Every one of those three concessions is traceable to a different external influence, and none of them was decided by the legislature.

Distinctions that carry marks

Interest groupPolitical partySocial movement
AimInfluence policyCapture governmental officeChange society or policy
Contests elections?NoYesNo
MembershipNarrow and defined by interestBroad and openLoose and fluid
OrganisationFormalFormal and permanentOften informal, may be temporary
AccountabilityTo its members onlyTo the electorateTo no one formally

What this is NOT

External influence is not the same as corruption. Representation, consultation and campaigning are lawful, necessary and, in a democracy, desirable. What separates influence from corruption is whether the transaction is a reason or a payment, and whether it is disclosed.

"External" does not mean foreign.

Influence is not always visible. The most effective external influence, structural power, involves nobody meeting anybody.

A government that yields to pressure is not automatically weak. Responsiveness to organised opinion is one of the things a democracy is for. The question is always which interests can organise and which cannot, which is the standing criticism of pluralism.

Quick revision

  1. External here means outside the formal organs of government, not foreign.
  2. The influences: interest and pressure groups, the media, business and finance, trade unions and professional bodies, religious and caste organisations, civil society and movements, foreign states and international bodies, and public opinion.
  3. The media works by agenda setting, framing and scrutiny.
  4. Business works by representation, structural power and finance. Structural power requires no lobbying at all.
  5. Seven channels: representation, expertise, publicity, electoral pressure, money, direct action, litigation.
  6. The standing criticism: influence is available to those who can organise, and the poorest are the hardest to organise.

Test yourself

1. What does "external" mean in this topic, and what is the common error? It means outside the formal constitutional organs of government, the legislature, the executive and the judiciary. The common error is to read it as "foreign" and to answer with treaties and international organisations alone. Those are one item on a list that is mostly domestic: interest groups, media, business, unions, community organisations, movements and public opinion.

munotes.in25

External Influences on the Exercise of Political Power

2. Explain the three ways the media influences the exercise of power. By agenda setting, since sustained coverage decides which problems a government cannot ignore, whatever it thinks of their merits. By framing, since the description of an issue settles what will count as a solution to it. And by scrutiny, since investigation discloses what government would have preferred to keep undisclosed, which is why press freedom is treated as structural to democracy rather than as a private privilege.

3. What is the structural power of business, and why is it the most effective form? It is the influence business exercises without any approach to government at all. Because a government depends on investment, employment and tax revenue, it anticipates what capital will accept and adjusts its policy in advance. It is the most effective form because it costs nothing, leaves no record, and operates on decisions before they are taken, which makes it an instance of the second face of power.

4. Distinguish an interest group from a political party. An interest group seeks to influence policy but does not seek office; a party seeks to capture governmental office and therefore contests elections. A group's membership is narrow and defined by the interest it represents, while a party's is broad and open. A group is accountable only to its members, a party to the whole electorate. The line blurs when a group converts itself into a party, which has happened in India.

5. Is influence the same as corruption? Give reasons. No. Representation, consultation, expert submission and public campaigning are lawful and, in a democracy, necessary, because a government that hears nobody decides badly. The distinction lies in what is offered and whether it is disclosed: a reason, an argument or evidence is influence, while a payment or a personal benefit for an official act is corruption. Undisclosed influence occupies the ground between the two, which is why disclosure is what lobbying regulation everywhere tries to compel.

Contents This chapter on its own page

munotes.in26

Chapter Seven

Interest Groups and Pressure Groups

Syllabus topic 1.1.3, "External influences on Exercise of Political Power (Role of Interests groups, ...)"

In one line

An interest group is an organised body of people who share a concern and try to get the government to act on it, without ever trying to run the government themselves.

In the wording a student can write in an exam: an interest group, also called a pressure group, is an organised association of persons who hold a common interest or opinion and who seek to influence the formation and administration of public policy in its favour, without seeking to capture governmental office or to accept the responsibility of governing.

The two names, and whether there is a difference

The syllabus says "interest groups"; most Indian textbooks say "pressure groups"; the terms are used interchangeably and a student may use either. Where writers do distinguish them, the distinction is this. Interest group describes what the body is, a group united by an interest. Pressure group describes what it does, apply pressure. Every pressure group is an interest group; an interest group that has never tried to influence anybody is not yet a pressure group. If a question uses one term, use that one.

What makes a body an interest group

Four features, and all four are needed. A body with three of them is something else.

  1. A shared interest or concern. It may be material, like the price of sugarcane, or it may be a cause with no material stake at all, like the abolition of the death penalty.
  2. Organisation. Some structure, however loose: a name, officers, a way of deciding what to demand.
  3. An attempt to influence public policy. A group that only serves its own members, and never asks government for anything, is an association, not an interest group.
  4. It does not seek office. This is the decisive one. The moment a group contests elections in order to govern, it has become a party.

The kinds of interest group

Every classification in the textbooks is one of these three cuts, and the safest answer uses all three.

By what they represent: sectional and promotional

Sectional groups, also called protective or interest groups in the narrow sense, represent a section of society and pursue its material interests. A trade union, an industry chamber, a farmers' association, a bar association. Membership is limited to the section, benefits go to the section, and the group's authority rests on how much of the section it can speak for.

Promotional groups, also called cause or attitude groups, promote a cause that need not benefit the members at all. An environmental campaign, a civil liberties organisation, a group working against child marriage. Membership is open to anybody who agrees, and the group's authority rests on the strength of its argument and its public support.

munotes.in27

Interest Groups and Pressure Groups

The test that separates them is not what the group asks for; it is who benefits if it succeeds. If success benefits the members as members, it is sectional. If success benefits people who are not members, it is promotional.

By organisation: Almond and Powell's four types

Gabriel Almond and G. Bingham Powell's classification is standard in Indian syllabuses and is worth knowing by name, because it fits Indian conditions better than the two-way cut.

Anomic groups. Spontaneous, unorganised and usually short-lived eruptions: a riot, a spontaneous demonstration, a crowd that gathers after an incident and disperses in a week. They have no continuing structure and no office bearers, and they influence policy by disorder rather than by argument.

Non-associational groups. Groups that exist by identity rather than by organisation: caste, kinship, region, language, religion. Nobody joins them and nobody leaves. They act intermittently, often through informal leaders, and in India they are among the most consequential influences on policy.

Institutional groups. Groups that are formally part of the state or of another organisation and use that position to press their own interest: the armed forces, the civil services, the police associations, and the employees' bodies within a public undertaking. They are powerful because they are inside the machine and because government cannot function without their cooperation.

Associational groups. Formally organised bodies with a specific purpose, a membership roll, a constitution and professional staff. Trade unions, industry chambers, professional associations. This is the type most people mean by "interest group", and in a developed system it does most of the work.

By duration and level

Some groups are permanent and some are formed for a single issue and dissolve when it is settled. Some operate at the level of a village or a ward, some in a State capital, some in Delhi, some internationally.

What interest groups actually do

They articulate interests. Almond's term. Somebody has to turn a scattered discontent into a stated demand, and groups are the machinery for doing it. Without them a government hears noise.

They supply information. A department drafting a rule on drug pricing does not know the industry as well as the industry does. That is the honest core of lobbying, and it is why governments consult groups even when they distrust them.

They represent between elections. A voter votes once in five years on everything at once. A group presses on one thing continuously.

They train and recruit. Group leaders become political leaders, which is one route into Indian politics.

They implement. Governments increasingly deliver services through organisations that began as interest groups.

Interest groups in India

The Indian pattern is different enough from the Western textbook picture that a good answer says so.

munotes.in28

Interest Groups and Pressure Groups

Non-associational groups are unusually strong. Caste associations, community organisations and language groups influence recruitment, reservation, education, personal law and public order, and they can deliver both opinion and votes. No Western classification has anything quite like the caste association.

Many associational groups are attached to parties. The large trade union federations and several student and farmer organisations are affiliated to political parties, which makes them powerful and simultaneously limits their independence, because they cannot press a demand that embarrasses their party. This is the single most distinctive feature of Indian interest group politics.

Business is organised and effective, through chambers of commerce and industry associations that are consulted formally on legislation.

Direct action is a normal method, not an exceptional one. The bandh, the road blockade, the rail roko and the mass rally are ordinary instruments, and the courts have had to draw lines around them.

Litigation is a standing channel. Public interest litigation has given Indian groups a route into policy that groups in most systems do not have.

And the weakest interests are the least organised. Agricultural labourers, domestic workers, migrant workers and the urban poor are numerous and hard to organise, which is the standing criticism of pluralist theory: the system responds to organised interests, and organisation is not equally available.

A worked example

A State proposes to raise the age of sale of tobacco products from eighteen to twenty-one.

The tobacco traders' federation is a sectional associational group. It writes to the Minister, commissions a study on the effect on small retailers, and points out how many voters run paan shops.

A public health foundation is a promotional associational group. Its members gain nothing personally. It publishes data on age of initiation and gets its case into the newspapers.

The State's own excise officers' association is an institutional group. It quietly points out that enforcement will need staff the department does not have, and that objection may kill the proposal more effectively than the traders' campaign.

A students' organisation affiliated to a party demonstrates in favour. Its position is genuine, and it is also convenient for its party.

A crowd that gathers outside a shop after a child is hospitalised is an anomic group. It has no structure, it is gone in a fortnight, and while it lasts it makes the front page.

Five groups, four of Almond's types, and each one exercises a different kind of pressure on the same file.

Distinctions that carry marks

Sectional groupPromotional group
RepresentsA section of societyA cause
Who benefits from successThe members, as membersPeople who need not be members
MembershipLimited to the sectionOpen to anybody who agrees
Authority rests onHow much of the section it speaks forThe strength of its argument and its public support
ExampleA trade union, an industry chamberAn environmental campaign, a civil liberties body
munotes.in29

Interest Groups and Pressure Groups

Almond and Powell's typeOrganised?Continuing?Indian example of the type
AnomicNoNoA spontaneous demonstration after an incident
Non-associationalNoYes, by identityA caste or community association
InstitutionalYes, inside the stateYesA service association within the administration
AssociationalYesYesA trade union or an industry chamber

What interest groups are NOT

They are not political parties. A party seeks office and accepts responsibility for governing the whole; a group presses one interest and is accountable only to its members. The line is crossed when a group contests elections to govern, and Indian politics has several examples of groups that did exactly that.

They are not necessarily undemocratic. The pluralist argument is that competition between many groups is itself a form of democracy, because it keeps government continuously in touch with organised opinion. The criticism is not that groups exist but that the competition is unequal.

They are not the same as social movements. A movement is looser, larger, often without formal membership, and aims at changing society rather than at winning a specific policy. Movements often produce groups; the two are not the same thing.

They are not always outside the state. Institutional groups are inside it, which is what makes them formidable.

Quick revision

  1. Definition: an organised body sharing an interest, seeking to influence public policy, and NOT seeking office. Four features, and the fourth is decisive.
  2. Interest group describes what it is; pressure group describes what it does. Interchangeable in an answer.
  3. Sectional against promotional: the test is who benefits if the group succeeds.
  4. Almond and Powell: anomic, non-associational, institutional, associational.
  5. Functions: interest articulation, information, continuous representation, recruitment, implementation.
  6. In India: non-associational groups are unusually strong; many associational groups are party-affiliated; direct action and litigation are normal channels; the poorest interests are the least organised.

Test yourself

1. Define an interest group and give its essential features. An organised association of persons holding a common interest or opinion who seek to influence the formation and administration of public policy in its favour without seeking to capture office. Its features are a shared interest, some organisation, an attempt to influence policy, and the absence of any attempt to govern. The last is decisive: a body that contests elections in order to hold office has become a political party.

2. Distinguish sectional from promotional groups. A sectional group represents a section of society and pursues its material interests, so its membership is limited to that section and success benefits the members as members. A promotional group promotes a cause from which the members may gain nothing, so its membership is open to anybody who agrees and success benefits people outside it. The test is not what is demanded but who gains if the demand succeeds.

munotes.in30

Interest Groups and Pressure Groups

3. Set out Almond and Powell's classification with an Indian example of each. Anomic groups are spontaneous and unorganised, such as a crowd that gathers after an incident and disperses within a fortnight. Non-associational groups exist by identity rather than by enrolment, such as caste and community associations. Institutional groups are formally part of the state and press their own interest from inside it, such as a service association within the administration. Associational groups are formally organised for a stated purpose, such as a trade union or an industry chamber.

4. What is distinctive about interest groups in India? Non-associational groups founded on caste, community, language and region are unusually influential, and no Western classification has an exact counterpart to the caste association. Many associational groups, particularly trade unions and student bodies, are affiliated to political parties, which makes them strong and simultaneously prevents them from pressing demands that embarrass their party. Direct action and public interest litigation are ordinary channels rather than exceptional ones.

5. "Interest groups make democracy more democratic." Discuss. The pluralist case is that they do: they turn scattered discontent into stated demands, they represent people continuously between elections when a vote settles everything at once, and competition among many groups keeps government in touch with organised opinion. The objection is that the competition is unequal. Organisation costs money, time and literacy, so business, professions and organised labour are heard while agricultural labourers, domestic workers and the urban poor are not, and a system responsive to organised interests is responsive to the already advantaged.

Contents This chapter on its own page

munotes.in31

Chapter Eight

Lobbying as a Technique

Syllabus topic 1.1.3, "External influences on Exercise of Political Power (... Lobbying as a technique ...)"

In one line

Lobbying is the technique of persuading people who hold public power to use it your way, by going to them directly and giving them reasons, information and, where it is lawful, support.

In the wording a student can write in an exam: lobbying is the practice of communicating directly with legislators, ministers or officials, on behalf of an identified interest, with the object of influencing the framing, passage, administration or repeal of a law, rule, policy or decision.

Where the word comes from, and why it matters

The word comes from the lobby, the ante-room of a legislature where members can be met on their way to the chamber. The etymology carries the essential idea: lobbying happens outside the formal proceeding, in the space around the decision rather than at the moment of it. A speech in a debate is not lobbying. A memorandum handed to a member before the debate is.

This is why lobbying is difficult to regulate and easy to misunderstand. It is not a stage in the constitutional process, so no constitution provides for it; and it is not an offence, so no penal code prohibits it. It occupies the ground between the two, which is exactly where regulation everywhere tries to reach.

Lobbying is a technique, not a kind of body

An interest group is a body. Lobbying is a method, and it is used by bodies of many kinds, which is worth saying explicitly because students often treat the two words as synonyms.

Who lobbies: interest groups and industry associations; individual companies; professional lobbying firms retained for a fee; law firms and public affairs consultancies; non-governmental organisations and campaigns; trade unions; State governments lobbying the Union; foreign governments; and public sector undertakings lobbying the ministries that own them.

The methods

Direct lobbying

Contact with the decision maker.

Meetings and representations. The core of the activity. A delegation meets a minister, a secretary or a member.

Written submissions. Memoranda, position papers and responses to consultation.

Supplying draft language. The most effective and least visible technique of all. A group that supplies the actual words of a clause, a rule or an exception has done more than a hundred meetings could, because everything afterwards is an argument about amending its text rather than about whether to adopt its idea.

Evidence to committees. In India, appearing before a Parliamentary Standing Committee, a Select Committee or a commission.

Technical assistance. Providing data, models and impact assessments that a department does not have the capacity to produce.

Indirect or grassroots lobbying

Contact with the public, in order to reach the decision maker through them.

Public campaigns and advertising, media briefing, opinion pieces, and now coordinated activity on social platforms.

munotes.in32

Lobbying as a Technique

Mobilising members to write to their representatives.

Sponsoring research at universities and think tanks, which produces a body of apparently independent material that supports the position.

Coalition building, which makes a narrow interest look like a broad one. An industry that wants a duty reduced does better when consumer bodies say the same thing.

The techniques that shade into something else

Political contributions, which are lawful in most systems subject to disclosure and limits.

Employment, whether of retired officials by the industry they regulated, or of serving officials afterwards. This is the revolving door, and it is the single most criticised feature of professional lobbying, because it can make a present decision an investment in a future job.

Hospitality, travel and gifts, which most systems now cap or prohibit.

Payment for an official act, which is not lobbying at all. It is bribery, and the line is drawn there in every legal system.

What separates lobbying from corruption

This is the analytical heart of the topic and the question most likely to be set.

The thing supplied. Lobbying supplies reasons, arguments, information and political support. Corruption supplies a personal benefit to the decision maker.

The quality of the decision. After lobbying, the decision remains the decision maker's own, taken on considerations they are entitled to weigh. After a bribe, the decision has been bought, and the official's own judgment has been displaced.

Disclosure. Lobbying can survive being disclosed. Corruption cannot, which is why disclosure regimes are the standard regulatory response: they do not prohibit influence, they compel it into the open, on the theory that influence which cannot bear publication will not be attempted.

The public interest test. A lobbyist argues that what benefits their client also benefits the public. That argument may be weak, but it is the kind of argument a decision maker may lawfully act on. A bribe makes no such argument.

The case for lobbying, and the case against

An answer that only condemns lobbying is a weak answer, because it cannot explain why every democracy permits it.

For. Government cannot know everything, and those affected by a rule know most about it; lobbying is how that knowledge reaches the file. It is an exercise of the right to petition government and, in India, of the freedoms of speech and of association. It supplies representation between elections. And regulated lobbying is better than unregulated influence, because the alternative to a lobbyist with a registration number is the same person without one.

Against. Access is bought, and money buys more of it, so the loudest voice is not the largest interest but the richest. It is opaque, and the public rarely learns which arguments reached which official. The revolving door corrodes the independence of regulators. It privileges concentrated interests over diffuse ones: a duty that costs every household ten rupees and earns one industry a hundred crore will be lobbied for hard by the industry and by nobody at all against. And it shifts effective decision making out of the legislature, which is public and recorded, into meetings that are neither.

munotes.in33

Lobbying as a Technique

A worked example

A pharmaceutical association wants a proposed price control on a class of medicines dropped.

Direct. It seeks a meeting with the Department, and takes a costing study showing that the proposed ceiling is below the cost of production for smaller manufacturers.

Draft language. It suggests a proviso exempting formulations below a stated turnover. If that proviso enters the draft, the argument for the rest of the year is about the size of the exemption, not about whether there should be one.

Committee. It gives evidence before the Standing Committee examining the parent Bill, and the evidence is published.

Grassroots. It funds a patient organisation's campaign warning that price control will cause shortages, and it commissions a study at a management institute on the effect of price control on innovation.

Coalition. It persuades a small manufacturers' body to make the same demand, so the case now looks like protection of small enterprise rather than protection of margins.

The line. If a director offers the joint secretary a consultancy for his son, the activity has stopped being lobbying and has become an offence, and every one of the five techniques above was lawful up to that point.

Distinctions that carry marks

LobbyingBribery
What is suppliedReasons, information, political supportA personal benefit to the decision maker
Whose judgment decidesThe decision maker'sThe payer's; the official's judgment is displaced
Can it survive disclosure?YesNo
Legal statusLawful, and regulated in many systemsAn offence everywhere
Regulatory responseRegistration and disclosureProsecution
Direct lobbyingIndirect or grassroots lobbying
TargetThe decision makerThe public, and through them the decision maker
MethodsMeetings, memoranda, draft language, committee evidenceCampaigns, advertising, member mobilisation, sponsored research
VisibilityLow; often nothing is publishedHigh, and designed to be
CostModestLarge

What lobbying is NOT

Lobbying is not inherently corrupt. It is the ordinary way organised interests communicate with government, and a system that banned it would not abolish influence but would drive it underground.

Lobbying is not a synonym for pressure group activity. A group may lobby, litigate, demonstrate, publish or strike. Lobbying is one instrument in the kit.

Lobbying is not confined to legislatures. Most of it is now aimed at the executive, because most binding rules are made there.

munotes.in34

Lobbying as a Technique

Regulating lobbying is not the same as limiting it. Disclosure regimes do not cap how much lobbying may be done. They compel it to be recorded, on the theory that publicity is a better discipline than prohibition.

Quick revision

  1. Definition: direct communication with holders of public power, on behalf of an identified interest, to influence a law, rule, policy or decision.
  2. The word comes from the lobby of a legislature: the activity happens around the decision, not in the formal proceeding.
  3. It is a technique, not a kind of body. Groups, firms, consultancies, NGOs, unions, State governments and foreign governments all use it.
  4. Direct: meetings, memoranda, supplying draft language, committee evidence, technical assistance. Indirect: campaigns, advertising, member mobilisation, sponsored research, coalition building.
  5. Lobbying against bribery: what is supplied, whose judgment decides, and whether it can survive disclosure.
  6. The revolving door is the most criticised practice, because it can turn a present decision into a future job.
  7. The regulatory answer everywhere is disclosure, not prohibition.

Test yourself

1. Define lobbying and explain what the word's origin tells you about the activity. Lobbying is direct communication with legislators, ministers or officials, on behalf of an identified interest, intended to influence the framing, passage, administration or repeal of a law, rule, policy or decision. The word comes from the lobby of a legislature, the ante-room where members were met on their way to the chamber, and that origin captures the essential feature: lobbying occurs outside the formal proceeding, in the space around the decision rather than at the moment of it.

2. Distinguish lobbying from bribery. Lobbying supplies reasons, information and political support, and the decision remains the decision maker's own, taken on considerations they may lawfully weigh; bribery supplies a personal benefit and displaces the official's judgment with the payer's. Lobbying can survive disclosure and bribery cannot, which is why the standard regulatory response to lobbying is registration and publication, and the response to bribery is prosecution.

3. What is the revolving door, and why is it criticised? The movement of people between regulatory office and the industries they regulate, whether by an industry hiring retired officials for their contacts and knowledge, or by officials taking employment afterwards with those they dealt with. It is criticised because it can convert a present official decision into an investment in a future job, so the official's independence is compromised without any payment being made or any rule being broken at the time.

4. State the case for permitting lobbying. Government cannot know everything and those affected by a rule usually know most about it, so lobbying is how that knowledge reaches the file. It is an exercise of the right to petition and of the freedoms of speech and association. It supplies continuous representation between elections, when a vote settles everything at once. And regulated lobbying is preferable to unregulated influence, since prohibiting it would not abolish influence but would remove any record of it.

munotes.in35

Lobbying as a Technique

5. Why is "supplying draft language" the most effective technique? Because it settles the terms on which everything afterwards is argued. Once a group's clause, proviso or exception is in the draft, the discussion is about whether to amend its words rather than about whether to adopt its idea, and the burden has shifted onto whoever wants it removed. It is also the least visible technique, since the published draft carries no indication of who wrote which part of it.

Contents This chapter on its own page

munotes.in36

Chapter Nine

Lobbying in India and in the United States

Syllabus topic 1.1.3, "External influences on Exercise of Political Power (... Examples from India and the USA)"

In one line

The United States regulates lobbying by making lobbyists register and file public reports four times a year; India regulates it not at all, and reaches only the far end of the spectrum, where influence has become an offence.

In the wording a student can write in an exam: in the United States lobbying is a lawful, registered and disclosed profession, governed principally by the Lobbying Disclosure Act of 1995 as strengthened in 2007 and, for agents of foreign principals, by the Foreign Agents Registration Act of 1938; in India there is no statute that registers lobbyists or requires any disclosure of lobbying, so the same activity is carried on informally and is reached by the law only when it crosses into bribery or breach of parliamentary privilege.

The United States

Why the American system looks the way it does

Two features of the American constitution shape everything else. The First Amendment protects the right of the people to petition the government for a redress of grievances, so lobbying cannot simply be prohibited. And the American legislature is genuinely independent of the executive: a member of Congress votes as they choose, and there is no whip that can compel a vote in the Indian sense. That makes each individual legislator worth persuading, which is why professional lobbying grew there first and grew largest.

The Lobbying Disclosure Act of 1995

The Act does not limit lobbying. It compels it into the open, by four mechanisms.

A definition. Section 1602 defines a lobbyist as an individual employed or retained by a client for financial or other compensation, for services that include more than one lobbying contact, excluding an individual whose lobbying activities are less than twenty per cent of the time they spend on services for that client over a three-month period. Two things follow. The occasional approach is not caught, and a professional whose lobbying is a small part of a wider practice is not caught either, which is the gap most criticised.

Registration. Section 1603 requires registration, subject to money thresholds in subsection (a)(3): a lobbying firm whose total income from a particular client does not and is not expected to exceed two thousand five hundred dollars, and an organisation whose total lobbying expenses do not and are not expected to exceed ten thousand dollars, in the quarterly period, are exempt. Small activity is left alone; sustained activity must be registered.

Reports. Section 1604 requires registered lobbyists to file reports quarterly, naming the client, the issues, the chambers and agencies contacted, and the money.

Publication and enforcement. Section 1605 puts the filings on the public record and provides the machinery for enforcing them.

munotes.in37

Lobbying in India and in the United States

The 2007 tightening

The Honest Leadership and Open Government Act of 2007 amended the scheme after a series of scandals. It is the reason reporting became quarterly rather than half-yearly, and it added restrictions around gifts, travel and the movement of former members and staff into lobbying.

The separate regime for foreign interests

An agent acting for a foreign government, party or principal registers under a different statute altogether, the Foreign Agents Registration Act of 1938, and files under the supervision of the Attorney General. The point for an Indian student is that a foreign company or government seeking to influence American policy is on a public register, which is why Indian newspapers have from time to time been able to report exactly how much a foreign firm spent lobbying on an Indian policy question, and on what. That reporting is possible because the American filings are public; the Indian side of the same transaction is not recorded anywhere.

What the American system achieves, and what it does not

It achieves disclosure. Anybody can find out who is registered, for whom, on what.

It does not achieve equality. Disclosure tells you that one side spent a hundred times what the other did; it does not change the fact.

It has known gaps. The twenty per cent rule and the thresholds let a good deal of activity go unregistered, and "strategic advice" that stops short of contact is outside the definition altogether.

India

There is no lobbying law

India has no statute that registers lobbyists, defines lobbying, or requires anybody to disclose that they lobbied. A full-text search of India Code, which carries central and State legislation, returns no enactment on the subject; the word appears only in unrelated contexts such as hotel lobbies. Private members' proposals to create a disclosure regime have been introduced from time to time and none has become law.

What India has instead

The criminal law of bribery. The Prevention of Corruption Act 1988 punishes a public servant who takes an undue advantage and, since the 2018 amendment, also punishes the giver. That reaches the far end of the spectrum and nothing before it: a meeting, a memorandum or a drafted clause is not an offence, and neither is it recorded.

Parliamentary privilege and discipline. Each House may discipline its own members, and in an extreme case expel them. This is where the leading Indian authority sits.

Facts. Raja Ram Pal v. Hon'ble Speaker, Lok Sabha, (2007) 3 SCC 184, arose from a broadcast on 12 December 2005 by the television channel Aaj Tak. In an operation it called Operation Duryodhana, the channel recorded persons said to be members of Parliament accepting money for tabling questions and raising issues in the House. The episode was reported as "cash for questions". Both Houses appointed inquiry committees, and on their reports ten members of the Lok Sabha and one member of the Rajya Sabha were expelled by resolutions of their respective Houses. The expelled members petitioned the Supreme Court under article 32, arguing that no House had any power to expel a member at all, that expulsion deprived their constituencies of representation, and that the inquiry had been unfair.

munotes.in38

Lobbying in India and in the United States

Held. A Constitution Bench of five judges dismissed every petition. It held that each House possesses the power to expel a member under article 105(3), that this power conflicts with no other constitutional provision, and that it does not injure the constituency, since an expelled member may stand again and the constituency may return him. It held that proceedings of a House are open to judicial review where they are vitiated by illegality or unconstitutionality, though not for mere irregularity of procedure, which article 122 protects. On the facts it found relevant material in the video recordings, no violation of articles 14, 20 or 21, and a fair opportunity given to each member, and it declined to review the quantum of punishment, which it said must be left to the House.

Why it matters here. It fixes the outer edge of the influence spectrum in Indian law and shows what India has in place of a disclosure statute. Paying a member to ask a question is not lobbying; it is corruption, and it was dealt with. But it was dealt with by the House's own disciplinary power, after a television channel exposed it, with no register, no filing and no requirement that anything be published in advance. Everything short of a payment leaves no trace at all.

Codes of conduct. Both Houses have ethics machinery and codes of conduct for members, and members must declare their interests. These bind the member, not the person who approaches them.

Disclosure by companies. Companies must disclose political contributions in their accounts, which catches money to parties and not money spent on influencing a rule.

How lobbying is actually done in India

It happens, on a large scale, and under other names: industry associations, public affairs consultancies, law firms with a policy practice, retired officials retained as advisers, and personal access. Because none of it is registered, an ordinary citizen cannot find out who met a minister about a rule that affects them, which is the practical difference from the American position.

Three episodes are usually cited in discussion of the subject, and they should be described for what they are. The publication in 2010 of intercepted telephone conversations of a corporate public relations professional showed how access was arranged and how far it extended, and it produced a national debate about lobbying but no statute. The cash for questions expulsions in 2005, above, showed the disciplinary route. And the public filings made in the United States by foreign companies about their lobbying on Indian policy questions showed that the same activity is documented in one country and invisible in the other.

munotes.in39

Lobbying in India and in the United States

A worked example

A foreign technology company wants an Indian data localisation rule relaxed, and the same company wants an American export restriction eased.

On the American side, its conduct is on a public record. It retains a firm, and the firm registers under the Lobbying Disclosure Act because its income from the client will exceed the threshold in section 1603(a)(3). Every quarter it files under section 1604, naming the client, the issues, the chambers and agencies contacted and the money spent. If it acts for a foreign government rather than a company, it registers under the Foreign Agents Registration Act instead. A student in Mumbai, with a browser, can read all of it.

On the Indian side, it approaches an industry association, which makes a submission to the ministry; it retains a public affairs consultancy, which arranges meetings; and it commissions a study at a policy institute. Every one of these is lawful and none of it is registered, filed or published. If the rule is relaxed, nobody outside the ministry can say who asked for it, how often, or what was argued.

The measurable difference. Two identical campaigns, one of which leaves a public paper trail and one of which leaves none. Notice that the American filings do not stop the company from being heard, and do not equalise its voice against a citizens' group's. What they produce is a record, and it is the record, not any restriction, that is the whole content of American regulation.

Distinctions that carry marks

United StatesIndia
Is lobbying defined by law?Yes, 2 U.S.C. s.1602No
RegistrationCompulsory above the thresholds in s.1603None
ReportingQuarterly, s.1604None
Public access to filingsYes, s.1605Nothing to access
Foreign interestsSeparate registration under FARA 1938No separate regime
What the law reachesThe activity itself, by disclosureOnly bribery, and breach of privilege
Leading authority a student should citeThe statute itselfRaja Ram Pal, (2007) 3 SCC 184
Practical resultInfluence is recorded and unequalInfluence is unequal and unrecorded

What this is NOT

"India has no lobbying" is false. India has no lobbying law. The activity is at least as extensive as anywhere else; it is simply not on a register.

American regulation does not make lobbying fair. Disclosure changes what is known, not who is heard.

munotes.in40

Lobbying in India and in the United States

Registration is not licensing. The American statute does not decide who may lobby or how much. It requires that those who do say so.

The absence of an Indian statute is not an absence of any law. Bribery is an offence, parliamentary privilege is enforceable, and codes of conduct bind members. What is missing is regulation of the lawful part of the activity, which is most of it.

Quick revision

  1. United States: Lobbying Disclosure Act of 1995, 2 U.S.C. ss.1601 to 1614. s.1602 defines a lobbyist, more than one contact and the twenty per cent exclusion; s.1603 registration with thresholds of $2,500 income per client or $10,000 of expenses in a quarter; s.1604 quarterly reports; s.1605 disclosure and enforcement.
  2. Strengthened by the Honest Leadership and Open Government Act of 2007, which brought quarterly reporting and gift, travel and revolving-door restrictions.
  3. Agents of foreign principals register separately under the Foreign Agents Registration Act of 1938, 22 U.S.C. s.611 and following.
  4. India: no statute at all. India Code carries no enactment on lobbying.
  5. India reaches only the far end: the Prevention of Corruption Act 1988, parliamentary privilege and expulsion, and codes of conduct.
  6. Raja Ram Pal v. Hon'ble Speaker, Lok Sabha, (2007) 3 SCC 184: cash for questions, eleven members expelled, power to expel upheld under article 105(3), judicial review available for illegality but not for irregularity of procedure under article 122.
  7. The one-line comparison: in America influence is recorded and unequal; in India it is unequal and unrecorded.

Test yourself

1. How does the Lobbying Disclosure Act of 1995 regulate lobbying? Not by prohibition but by disclosure. Section 1602 defines a lobbyist as one retained for compensation whose services include more than one lobbying contact, excluding anyone whose lobbying is less than twenty per cent of the time spent for that client in three months. Section 1603 requires registration above money thresholds of $2,500 of income per client or $10,000 of expenses in the quarter. Section 1604 requires quarterly reports naming clients, issues, contacts and amounts, and section 1605 makes them public and enforceable.

2. What is FARA, and why does it matter to an Indian student? The Foreign Agents Registration Act of 1938, 22 U.S.C. section 611 and following, which requires agents acting for foreign governments, parties and principals to register and file separately, under the supervision of the Attorney General. It matters because it is why the sums a foreign company spends lobbying on an Indian policy question can be read off an American public record, while the Indian half of the same activity appears nowhere at all.

3. What law governs lobbying in India? None. There is no Indian statute that defines lobbying, registers lobbyists or requires disclosure of it, and a full-text search of India Code returns no enactment on the subject. Indian law reaches only the extremes: the Prevention of Corruption Act 1988 where influence becomes a payment for an official act, and the disciplinary and privilege jurisdiction of each House of Parliament where a member is involved. Everything lawful in between is unrecorded.

munotes.in41

Lobbying in India and in the United States

4. State the facts and the holding in Raja Ram Pal. In December 2005 a television channel broadcast recordings of persons said to be members of Parliament accepting money for tabling questions. After inquiries, ten Lok Sabha members and one Rajya Sabha member were expelled by resolutions of their Houses, and they petitioned under article 32. A Constitution Bench dismissed the petitions, holding that each House has the power to expel under article 105(3), that the power does not violate any constitutional provision or the constituency's rights since the member may stand again, and that proceedings of a House may be judicially reviewed for illegality or unconstitutionality but not for mere irregularity of procedure, which article 122 protects.

5. Compare the Indian and American positions and say which you would adopt, with reasons. The American system defines lobbying, registers those who do it above modest thresholds, and publishes quarterly what was spent on whom and about what; the Indian system does none of this and reaches only bribery and breach of privilege. The American approach does not equalise access, and it has real gaps in the twenty per cent rule and in advice that stops short of contact. It nonetheless produces a record, and a record is what makes the second face of power visible: a citizen in India cannot presently discover who was consulted about a rule that governs them, which is an argument for a disclosure statute rather than for a prohibition.

Contents This chapter on its own page

munotes.in42

Chapter Ten

The Elite Theory of Power

Syllabus topic 1.1.4, "Theories of Power- Elite theory and Marxist theory of Power (Specified)"

In one line

Elite theory says that in every society, however it describes itself, a small organised minority rules and the large disorganised majority is ruled, and that this is not an accident of any particular system but a permanent feature of organised human life.

In the wording a student can write in an exam: the elite theory of power holds that political power in every society is concentrated in the hands of a small minority, the elite, who owe their position to superior organisation, capacity or resources; that the majority, however numerous, cannot rule because it cannot organise; and that democracy therefore does not abolish minority rule but changes the way the ruling minority is recruited.

The claim, and what it is aimed at

Elite theory was built as an answer to two other accounts of power that were dominant at the end of the nineteenth century.

Against democratic theory, it says that popular rule is impossible, not merely difficult. A mass cannot deliberate, cannot decide and cannot act, so it must delegate; and delegation creates leaders; and leaders acquire interests of their own.

Against Marxism, it says that the division between rulers and ruled is more fundamental than the division between classes. Abolish private property and you do not abolish the elite; you change its composition. This is the sharpest disagreement in the whole of topic 1.1.4 and is the point on which the next chapter turns.

Gaetano Mosca and the ruling class

Mosca's Elementi di scienza politica (Turin, 1896) is the founding statement. His proposition is that in all societies two classes of people appear: a class that rules and a class that is ruled. The first is always the less numerous, performs all political functions, monopolises power and enjoys its advantages. The second is directed and controlled by the first.

Three parts of Mosca's account are worth carrying into an answer.

The minority rules because it is organised. Mosca's explanation is not that the rulers are better people. It is that a hundred people who act together will always defeat a thousand who act separately, and that the hundred can act together because they are few.

The political formula. Every ruling class justifies itself by a formula that the ruled accept: divine right, the will of the people, the mandate of history, scientific expertise. The formula is not a lie exactly; it is the story a society tells itself about why these people are in charge, and it is what turns power into authority. A student who has read the legitimacy chapters will recognise the idea.

Circulation, not abolition. Ruling classes change, decay and are replaced. There is never a moment when nobody rules.

munotes.in43

The Elite Theory of Power

Michels cites Mosca on a small point that shows how the theory works: the drive to keep a position in the family is so strong that where members of a dominant class could have no sons of their own, as with the prelates of the Roman Church, nepotism arose spontaneously to serve the same purpose.

Vilfredo Pareto and the circulation of elites

Pareto approached the same fact through psychology rather than organisation. Societies contain people of superior capacity in every field, and those with capacity in the arts of government form the governing elite.

His contribution to an answer is the theory of the circulation of elites. Elites are not permanent. They decay, because the qualities that win power are not the qualities that keep it, and because an elite that closes its ranks stops recruiting the ablest from below. When it decays, a counter-elite forms and replaces it, and the cycle begins again. Pareto's famous names for the two temperaments, the cunning foxes who rule by manipulation and the forceful lions who rule by strength, describe the alternation: a governing class of foxes eventually loses the will to use force and is displaced by lions, who in time become foxes.

The political conclusion is bleak and is the one examiners want stated: history is a graveyard of aristocracies. Revolutions do not end elite rule. They replace one elite with another.

Robert Michels and the iron law of oligarchy

Michels is the member of the trio whose evidence is best, because he did not argue from history in general. He studied the organisation most committed to internal democracy in the Europe of his day, the German Social Democratic Party and the trade unions attached to it, and asked whether an organisation that believed in democracy could practise it.

His answer is the sentence MU's own paper has asked about. Michels writes, in Political Parties (1915), that it is organisation which gives birth to the dominion of the elected over the electors, of the mandataries over the mandators, of the delegates over the delegators, and concludes: "Who says organization, says oligarchy." He adds immediately that every party organisation represents an oligarchical power grounded upon a democratic basis, that everywhere there are electors and elected, and that the power of the elected leaders over the electing masses is almost unlimited.

Why organisation produces oligarchy

Michels's causes fall into three groups, and an answer that gives all three is complete.

Technical and administrative causes. A large body cannot decide anything by meeting. It must delegate, and delegation means a permanent staff, which means specialisation, which means that after a few years only the officials know how the organisation works.

Psychological causes in the leaders. Office confers status, income and a way of life. Leaders come to identify the organisation's interest with their own continuance, and, in a phrase Michels quotes from French working-class circles, homme elu, homme foutu: the man elected is the man finished. Even the purest idealist who holds power for a few years, he writes, cannot escape the corruption that the exercise of power brings with it.

munotes.in44

The Elite Theory of Power

Psychological causes in the masses. Most members are not interested in administration, are grateful to those who do it, and feel a genuine need for guidance and even for veneration of their leaders. Apathy is not imposed on them; it is a fact about how people spend their attention.

The conclusion Michels draws

If the most democratic organisation in the most democratic movement in Europe was in practice run by its officials, then oligarchy is not a defect of a particular party but a law of organisation as such, and any organisation, of any ideology, will produce it. From this he draws the conclusion that a socialist student should find hardest: the socialists might conquer, but not socialism, which would perish at the moment of its adherents' triumph, because a victorious movement is an organisation and an organisation is an oligarchy.

C. Wright Mills and the power elite

Mills wrote about the United States in the middle of the twentieth century and gave the theory its modern form. His argument is that power in a large industrial society is concentrated at the top of three institutional hierarchies, the political directorate, the corporate chiefs and the military commanders, and that the men who occupy those positions are interchangeable, share a social background, education and outlook, and take the decisions that matter among themselves.

Mills is useful in an answer because his elite is institutional rather than personal: it is not that certain people are superior, but that certain positions carry power, and whoever occupies them will exercise it. He also insists the power elite is not a conspiracy; it does not need to meet in secret, because a common background and common interests produce coordinated behaviour without coordination.

The Indian application

The theory is easy to illustrate in India and a good answer does so rather than staying with European examples.

The composition of legislatures, the senior civil services, the higher judiciary and the boards of large companies has been studied repeatedly, and every study finds concentration by education, by language, by urban origin and by social group. Political families supply a substantial share of candidates in most parties. Party organisations, in the strongest possible confirmation of Michels, are run by small groups at the top, and elections to internal party posts are rare.

munotes.in45

The Elite Theory of Power

Where India departs from the classical theory is worth saying too, because it makes the answer balanced. Since the 1990s, elite composition has changed substantially: groups previously excluded from power have captured State governments, reservation has altered the recruitment of the administrative services, and local government has brought several million people from those groups into elected office. That is not the abolition of the elite, which the theory would say is impossible, but it is exactly what Pareto called circulation, and it happened without a revolution.

A worked example

A State decides how to spend two thousand crore rupees allotted for urban infrastructure.

What a pluralist expects to see. Residents' associations, transport unions, contractors, environmental groups and ward councillors each press their case, and the allocation reflects the balance of their strength.

What an elite theorist predicts. The choice between a metro line, a flyover network and a piped water programme was effectively settled before any of those groups was consulted, in meetings between a handful of people: two ministers, three secretaries, the head of the development authority and the consultants who prepared the feasibility report. Mosca's explanation is that those eight can act together and the several lakh residents cannot. Michels adds that the residents' associations, which exist to represent them, are themselves run by a few office bearers who have held their posts for years and who deal with the same eight people.

What would falsify the prediction. If the allocation were changed materially by a public consultation, if the associations' office bearers turned over regularly, or if the eight came from visibly different backgrounds and disagreed along those lines. Those are testable, which is the merit of the theory.

Where the theory is silent. It cannot say whether the metro was the right choice. Elite theory explains who decided and why it was few; it has nothing at all to say about whether the decision was good, and an answer that treats it as a criticism of the outcome has misunderstood it.

Criticism of elite theory

It proves too much. If every arrangement is oligarchy, the word stops distinguishing anything. There is a real difference between a party whose leaders can be voted out and one whose leaders cannot, and elite theory has trouble expressing it.

Michels's evidence is narrow. One party, in one country, before the First World War, in conditions of persecution that themselves encouraged centralised control.

Elites compete. The pluralist reply is that there is no single elite but many, in business, labour, agriculture, the professions and the regions, and that they check each other, which is a different system from rule by one group.

It ignores the effect of accountability. Even if a minority always decides, it matters greatly whether that minority must face an electorate, a free press and a court.

munotes.in46

The Elite Theory of Power

It is politically dangerous. If popular rule is impossible, the argument for resisting authoritarian rule is weakened, and elite theory has historically been used for exactly that purpose.

Distinctions that carry marks

MoscaParetoMichelsMills
Central termThe ruling classThe governing eliteOligarchyThe power elite
Why the few ruleThey are organisedThey have superior capacityOrganisation compels itThey occupy the commanding positions
Key deviceThe political formulaCirculation of elites; foxes and lionsThe iron law of oligarchyThree interlocking hierarchies
EvidenceComparative historyComparative history and psychologyA study of one socialist partyA study of one country
On revolutionReplaces one ruling class with anotherHistory is a graveyard of aristocraciesThe socialists may win but socialism cannotNot the main question

What elite theory is NOT

It is not a conspiracy theory. Mills is explicit that the power elite need not meet or plot; shared position and background produce shared behaviour.

It is not the same as the Marxist theory of power. Both say a minority rules. They disagree about why, about whether it can ever end, and about what the minority is: for Marx it is the class that owns the means of production, for the elite theorists it is whoever is organised, and that difference is the subject of the comparison chapter.

It is not an argument against democracy in every sense. Several elite theorists accepted that competition between elites for popular votes is a real and valuable thing, and Joseph Schumpeter built a whole theory of democracy on it, defining democracy as an institutional arrangement in which individuals acquire the power to decide by means of a competitive struggle for the people's vote.

"Iron law" is Michels's phrase, not a description of a proven regularity. He called it a law; whether it is one is the argument.

Quick revision

  1. Core claim: in every society an organised minority rules and a disorganised majority is ruled.
  2. Mosca, Elementi di scienza politica (1896): two classes always appear; the minority rules because it is organised; every ruling class has a political formula that justifies it.
  3. Pareto: the circulation of elites; foxes and lions; history is a graveyard of aristocracies.
  4. Michels, Political Parties (1915): "Who says organization, says oligarchy." Causes are technical, psychological in the leaders, and psychological in the masses. Studied the German Social Democratic Party, the hardest case for his thesis.
  5. Mills: the power elite of political, corporate and military hierarchies; institutional, not conspiratorial.
  6. Criticism: proves too much; narrow evidence; elites compete; accountability matters; and it can be used to argue against democracy itself.
munotes.in47

The Elite Theory of Power

Test yourself

1. "Who says organization, says oligarchy." Who said it, and why? Robert Michels, in Political Parties (1915). He argued that organisation itself gives birth to the dominion of the elected over the electors and of the delegates over the delegators. A large body cannot decide by meeting, so it delegates; delegation creates a permanent and specialised staff; the staff alone comes to understand the organisation; leaders acquire an interest in their own continuance; and the members, being uninterested in administration and grateful to those who do it, accept the arrangement. He drew this from the German Social Democratic Party, the organisation of his day most committed to internal democracy, which is what made the conclusion an iron law rather than a complaint about one party.

2. State Mosca's theory of the ruling class. That in every society two classes appear, one that rules and one that is ruled. The ruling class is always the less numerous, performs all political functions, monopolises power and enjoys its advantages, while the second is directed by the first. The minority prevails not because it is better but because it is organised, and a small number acting together defeats a large number acting separately. Every ruling class also maintains a political formula, a justification the ruled accept, which converts power into authority.

3. Explain the circulation of elites. Pareto's proposition that elites are not permanent. An elite decays because the qualities that win power are not those that retain it, and because an elite that closes its ranks stops recruiting ability from below. A counter-elite then forms and displaces it. He described the alternation through two temperaments, the cunning foxes who rule by manipulation and the forceful lions who rule by strength, each in time giving way to the other. The conclusion is that revolutions replace one elite with another rather than ending elite rule.

4. What is the power elite, and how does Mills's version differ from Michels's? Mills's power elite is the small group at the top of three interlocking hierarchies in a modern industrial society, the political directorate, the corporate chiefs and the military commanders, whose members share background and outlook and decide the important questions among themselves. It differs from Michels in its source: Michels derives oligarchy from the internal logic of any organisation, so it appears even in a small union branch, while Mills derives it from the concentration of decisions in a few institutional positions in a particular kind of society at a particular stage.

5. Give three criticisms of elite theory. First, it proves too much: if every arrangement is oligarchy, the term cannot distinguish a party whose leaders can be voted out from one whose leaders cannot, though the difference is real. Second, the pluralist reply is that there is no single elite but many competing ones in business, labour, the professions and the regions, which check each other. Third, it undervalues accountability: even if a minority always decides, it matters greatly whether that minority must face an electorate, a free press and a court.

Contents This chapter on its own page

munotes.in48

Chapter Eleven

The Marxist Theory of Power

Syllabus topic 1.1.4, "Theories of Power- Elite theory and Marxist theory of Power (Specified)"

In one line

The Marxist theory of power says that political power is not a thing in itself but a reflection of economic power: whoever owns the means by which a society produces its living will control its state, its law and even its ideas.

In the wording a student can write in an exam: the Marxist theory holds that every society beyond the most primitive is divided into classes defined by their relation to the means of production; that the class which owns those means is the ruling class; that the state is not a neutral arbiter but an instrument by which that class maintains its dominance; and that political power will therefore change hands only when the ownership of the means of production changes hands.

The vocabulary, defined before it is used

Means of production. Everything used to produce goods other than labour itself: land, factories, machinery, raw materials, capital.

Mode of production. The means of production together with the social relations of ownership that go with them. Marx's historical sequence runs primitive communism, slavery, feudalism, capitalism, socialism, communism.

Class. A group defined by its relation to the means of production, not by income or status. Under capitalism the two principal classes are the bourgeoisie, who own the means of production, and the proletariat, who own nothing but their labour power and must sell it.

Base and superstructure. The economic structure of a society is the base; law, politics, religion, morality and art are the superstructure that rises on it and, in the main, reflects it.

Class struggle. The conflict between classes over the surplus, which for Marx and Engels is the motor of historical change.

The four propositions

1. Economic power is the source of political power

This is the foundation and everything else follows from it. Political power is not held because someone won an election or wears a crown; it is held because someone owns. Whoever controls the means of production controls the livelihoods of everyone else, and control of livelihood is control of behaviour. Elections, constitutions and offices distribute the appearance of power; ownership distributes the substance.

2. The state is an instrument of class rule

This is the sentence to quote. In the Manifesto of the Communist Party Marx and Engels write that the bourgeoisie has conquered for itself exclusive political sway in the modern representative State, and that "the executive of the modern State is but a committee for managing the common affairs of the whole bourgeoisie."

Read the sentence carefully, because two things in it are usually missed.

"A committee for managing the common affairs." Not a puppet taking orders from individual capitalists. It manages the common affairs, which means it may act against a particular capitalist, or a particular industry, to preserve the system as a whole. A Marxist can therefore explain factory legislation, a minimum wage or a bank rescue without embarrassment: each protects capitalism from capitalists.

munotes.in49

The Marxist Theory of Power

"Of the whole bourgeoisie." The state has a degree of independence from any individual owner, and later Marxists made a great deal of that independence, calling it the relative autonomy of the state.

Later in the same text they state the general proposition: "Political power, properly so called, is merely the organised power of one class for oppressing another."

3. Law and ideas serve the same interest

The superstructure follows the base. Law defines and protects property, enforces contracts made between very unequal parties, and calls the arrangement freedom. The Manifesto puts the point about ideas in one line: "The ruling ideas of each age have ever been the ideas of its ruling class." What a society regards as obvious, natural, fair and unthinkable is, on this account, shaped by the interest of those who rule it.

This is the proposition a law student should sit with longest, because it is a claim about the subject they are studying. It is not the claim that judges are dishonest. It is the claim that a body of law which treats parties as formally equal will systematically favour the party who is substantively stronger, and that this happens through the ordinary and honest application of the rules.

4. The state will eventually disappear

If the state exists to hold one class down, then when classes end the state has nothing left to do. Engels puts this precisely in Socialism: Utopian and Scientific: once there is no social class to be held in subjection, nothing remains to be repressed and a special repressive force is no longer necessary; state interference becomes superfluous in one domain after another and then "dies out of itself"; the government of persons is replaced by the administration of things. And he insists on the word: "The State is not 'abolished'. It dies out."

That distinction is worth marks, because it separates Marxism from anarchism. The anarchist wants the state abolished now; Engels says it cannot be abolished and will become unnecessary.

Between capitalism and that condition, the Manifesto contemplates a transitional stage in which the proletariat makes itself the ruling class and uses state power to sweep away the old conditions of production. This is the dictatorship of the proletariat, and it is taught properly at topic 3.4.

The modern developments a good answer mentions

Gramsci and hegemony. Antonio Gramsci asked why the workers of Western Europe did not revolt when the theory said they should, and answered that the ruling class holds power not only through coercion by the state but through hegemony: leadership of the whole culture, through schools, churches, newspapers and common sense, so that its view of the world is accepted by those it rules as simply the way things are. This is the Marxist version of the third face of power.

munotes.in50

The Marxist Theory of Power

Instrumentalism and structuralism. Ralph Miliband argued that the state serves capital because the people who staff it are drawn from the same class; Nicos Poulantzas argued that it serves capital because of its structural position in a capitalist economy, whoever staffs it. The second is the stronger claim, since it survives the appointment of a socialist government.

The Indian debate. Indian Marxists have had to explain a state that is neither straightforwardly bourgeois nor feudal, and the standard account describes a ruling coalition of the industrial bourgeoisie, the rich farmers and the bureaucratic elite. Whether that is Marxism or elite theory in Marxist vocabulary is a fair question to raise in an answer.

A worked example

A State proposes a law raising the minimum wage for construction workers.

A pluralist sees competing groups: builders against unions, with government holding the ring, and the outcome reflecting their relative strength.

An elite theorist sees a decision taken by a small number of ministers, officials and industry leaders who know each other, whatever the unions say publicly.

A Marxist asks a different question altogether: who owns the sites, who owns the workers' time, and what happens to the surplus? On this reading the law will pass in a form the industry can live with, because the state manages the common affairs of the owners rather than the interests of any one builder. It may genuinely improve wages, because a workforce that cannot eat cannot build, and because a concession now prevents a confrontation later. And it will not touch the relation that produced the low wage, which is that the worker owns nothing and must sell their labour on whatever terms are offered. A Marxist would add that the law will be enforced weakly, not because inspectors are corrupt but because the machinery of enforcement is thin in exactly the places where the owners' interest lies in its being thin.

Notice that the Marxist prediction is testable, which is the merit of the theory. It predicts the shape of the concession as well as the fact of it.

Criticism of the Marxist theory of power

Economic determinism. The theory has trouble with power that is plainly not economic in origin: caste in India, religion, language, nationalism, gender. Engels himself said in later letters that the economic factor is determining only in the last instance, which is an admission that it is not determining in the first.

munotes.in51

The Marxist Theory of Power

The state has been more independent than the theory allows. Modern states regulate, tax and expropriate owners, and welfare states have redistributed on a scale the theory did not anticipate.

Where it was tried, the state did not die out. In the states that called themselves socialist, the abolition of private ownership produced not the withering away of power but its concentration, which is precisely what Michels predicted and what Pareto called circulation.

Class is not the only cleavage, and may not be the deepest. Indian voting behaviour has for decades been organised around caste and community at least as much as around class.

It underestimates democratic institutions. Universal suffrage, an independent judiciary and a free press have delivered real gains to the propertyless without the ownership of production changing hands.

Distinctions that carry marks

Pluralist viewElite theoryMarxist theory
Who holds powerMany competing groupsAn organised minorityThe class that owns the means of production
WhyThey organise and bargainOrganisation and capacityOwnership
The state isA neutral arena and refereeThe prize the elite occupiesAn instrument of class rule
Can it be changed?It changes constantlyOnly the personnel changeYes, by changing ownership
End pointContinuous bargainingCirculation of elitesClassless society; the state dies out

What this theory is NOT

It is not the claim that politicians take money from industrialists. That is corruption, and it is a much smaller claim. The Marxist claim is structural: the state serves the owning class through its ordinary, honest, lawful operation.

It is not the claim that the state never acts against business. The Manifesto's own words are "the common affairs of the whole bourgeoisie", which allows the state to act against a particular owner to preserve the system.

It is not the same as the elite theory. Both say a minority rules; they disagree on what defines the minority and on whether minority rule can end. The next chapter is entirely about that disagreement.

"Withering away" is not abolition. Engels insists on the difference, and the difference is what separates Marxism from anarchism.

Quick revision

  1. Base and superstructure: economic structure is the base; law, politics, religion and ideas are the superstructure raised on it.
  2. Class is defined by relation to the means of production: bourgeoisie own, proletariat sell labour power.
  3. The quotation: "The executive of the modern State is but a committee for managing the common affairs of the whole bourgeoisie." Note common and whole.
  4. The general proposition: "Political power, properly so called, is merely the organised power of one class for oppressing another."
  5. On ideas: "The ruling ideas of each age have ever been the ideas of its ruling class."
  6. Engels on the state: it "dies out of itself"; the government of persons is replaced by the administration of things; "The State is not 'abolished'. It dies out."
  7. Developments: Gramsci's hegemony; Miliband's instrumentalism against Poulantzas's structuralism.
  8. Criticism: economic determinism; the state's real independence; where tried, power concentrated instead of withering; caste and religion; the gains democracy has actually delivered.
munotes.in52

The Marxist Theory of Power

Test yourself

1. State the Marxist theory of power in four propositions. First, economic power is the source of political power: whoever owns the means of production controls the livelihood, and therefore the behaviour, of everyone else. Second, the state is not a neutral arbiter but an instrument by which the owning class maintains its dominance. Third, law, morality and the prevailing ideas form a superstructure that reflects and protects that base. Fourth, since the state exists to hold one class down, the end of classes leaves it nothing to do and it dies out.

2. Explain the Manifesto's description of the modern state, paying attention to its exact words. Marx and Engels write that the executive of the modern State is but a committee for managing the common affairs of the whole bourgeoisie. The word "committee" denies that the state is a puppet of individual capitalists; the words "common affairs" and "whole" allow it to act against a particular owner or industry in order to preserve the system as a whole. That is why a Marxist can explain factory legislation or a bank rescue without difficulty: each protects capitalism from capitalists.

3. What did Engels mean by saying the state "dies out"? That the state cannot be abolished by decree, as the anarchists wished, but becomes unnecessary. Once there is no class to be held in subjection, nothing remains to be repressed and a special repressive force is superfluous; state interference falls away in one domain after another, and the government of persons is replaced by the administration of things. He insisted on the distinction: the state is not abolished, it dies out.

4. What is hegemony, and what problem was it introduced to solve? Gramsci's term for the ruling class's leadership of the whole culture, exercised through schools, churches, newspapers and common sense, so that its view of the world is accepted by the ruled as simply the way things are. He introduced it to explain why the workers of Western Europe did not revolt when the theory predicted they would: power there rested less on the state's coercion than on consent that had been manufactured, which makes hegemony the Marxist counterpart of the third face of power.

munotes.in53

The Marxist Theory of Power

5. Give three criticisms of the Marxist theory of power. That it is economically deterministic and cannot account for power founded on caste, religion, language or gender, a difficulty Engels half conceded by saying the economic factor determines only in the last instance. That modern states have shown far more independence of owners than the theory allows, taxing, regulating and redistributing at a scale it did not anticipate. And that where the ownership of production was in fact transferred to the state, power did not wither away but concentrated, which is what the elite theorists predicted.

Contents This chapter on its own page

munotes.in54

Chapter Twelve

The Elite Theory and the Marxist Theory Compared

Syllabus topic 1.1.4, "Theories of Power- Elite theory and Marxist theory of Power (Specified)"

In one line

Both theories say that a small minority rules; they disagree about what makes the minority a minority, about whether minority rule can ever be ended, and about what the state is.

In the wording a student can write in an exam: the elite theory and the Marxist theory agree that political power is always concentrated in few hands and that the appearance of popular rule conceals it, but they differ fundamentally in that the elite theorists locate the source of concentration in organisation and capacity, which are permanent features of social life, while Marxists locate it in the ownership of the means of production, which is historically specific and can be changed, so that for the first minority rule is inevitable and for the second it is transitory.

What they agree about

An answer that starts with the disagreements is weaker than one that establishes the common ground first, because the disagreements are only interesting once the agreement is clear.

Power is concentrated. Both reject the pluralist picture of many groups bargaining on a level field.

Democratic forms conceal it. Both hold that elections, constitutions and formal equality do not describe where power actually lies. Michels calls a party an oligarchical power grounded on a democratic basis; Marx calls the modern representative state the instrument through which the bourgeoisie holds exclusive political sway.

The rulers justify themselves with an idea. Mosca's political formula and the Marxist claim that the ruling ideas of an age are the ideas of its ruling class are recognisably the same observation, arrived at independently.

Power is not primarily about who wins a vote. Both look past the visible decision to the structure that produced it.

The three real disagreements

1. What defines the ruling minority

Marxists: ownership of the means of production. The ruling class is the class that owns, and it rules because it owns. Change the ownership and you change the ruling class.

Elite theorists: organisation, capacity and position. Mosca's minority rules because it is organised; Pareto's because it has the psychological qualities that suit government; Michels's because organisation itself produces leaders; Mills's because certain institutional positions carry power whoever occupies them.

Why the difference bites. On the Marxist account, a state-owned economy abolishes the ruling class. On the elite account, it merely moves the elite from the boardroom to the ministry, because the new managers are as few, as organised and as indispensable as the old owners were.

2. Whether minority rule can end

Marxists: yes. Class rule is a stage of history and will end when the material conditions that produce classes end. The state then dies out.

Elite theorists: no, and this is their central claim. Pareto: history is a graveyard of aristocracies, and one elite always replaces another. Michels: any organisation whatever will produce an oligarchy, so an organised movement against oligarchy will itself be an oligarchy.

munotes.in55

The Elite Theory and the Marxist Theory Compared

Michels states the conclusion in the sharpest possible form, and it is aimed directly at Marxism: the socialists might conquer, but not socialism, which would perish at the moment of its adherents' triumph. That single sentence is the elite theory's whole objection to Marxism, and an answer that quotes it has done the comparison.

3. What the state is

Marxists: an instrument. It exists to hold one class down, and its personnel, its law and its ideology follow from that function.

Elite theorists: a prize and an apparatus. Whoever occupies the state's commanding positions exercises its power, and the state does not have a class function separate from the interests of those who staff it. For Mills the state is one of three hierarchies, and not always the most important.

The historical test each has had

The Marxist prediction was that transferring ownership of the means of production to society would abolish class rule and let the state die out.

The elite prediction was that it would not, because organisation and administration would still be in a few hands, and those hands would acquire interests of their own.

The twentieth century ran the experiment. In the states that abolished private ownership of production, the state did not wither; it grew, and power concentrated further, in a party apparatus that no election could displace. On this the elite theorists were, on the record, right, and an honest answer says so.

But the elite theory has also been tested, and the result is less comfortable for it than its supporters admit. Michels's thesis was that internal democracy inside a mass organisation is impossible. Where organisations have adopted term limits, contested internal elections, external audit, transparency rules and judicially enforceable member rights, the leadership's power has been reduced, not abolished but reduced. That is not the abolition of oligarchy, but it is evidence that "iron" was too strong a word.

The Indian test

India is a good case for the comparison because both theories can be applied to it and neither fits comfortably.

For the Marxist reading. Ownership of land and industry is highly concentrated, corporate influence on economic policy is substantial, and the law of property, contract and labour operates within limits owners can live with.

For the elite reading. The composition of legislatures, senior services and higher courts is drawn narrowly, political families are prominent in most parties, and party organisations are run by small groups whose internal elections are rare, which is Michels confirmed almost exactly.

munotes.in56

The Elite Theory and the Marxist Theory Compared

Against both. Neither theory predicts caste. India's most consequential political cleavage for several decades has not been ownership, which is Marx's variable, nor organisational capacity, which is Michels's, but a status hierarchy neither of them modelled. And the entry of previously excluded groups into State governments and into local office since the 1990s is a large change that Marxism cannot explain, because ownership did not change, and that elite theory can only call circulation, which is true but tells us nothing about why the circulation took the direction it did.

That paragraph is the mark of a good answer: it does not choose between the two theories, it shows what each cannot see.

A worked example

A large private hospital chain is exempted from a rule capping the price of certain procedures.

The elite theorist's account. The exemption was settled among a small number of people who know each other: the health secretary, two ministers, the chain's managing director and the chairman of the association that speaks for private hospitals. They went to the same institutions and move between the same posts. Nobody was bribed and nothing was concealed. The few decided because the few can act and the many cannot, and if this government fell tomorrow the successor's health secretary would be drawn from the same pool.

The Marxist's account. Ask instead who owns the hospitals, who owns the labour of those who work in them, and where the surplus goes. The exemption is what a state that manages the common affairs of the owning class does: it protects the conditions in which private capital will continue to invest in health care, and it will do so whichever individuals hold office. The Marxist adds a prediction the elite theorist cannot make, that the exemption will be shaped so as to preserve the industry rather than any one firm, and that a firm which threatened the arrangement would be sacrificed.

What separates the two accounts. Replace all eight people with eight others of entirely different social background. The elite theorist says the exemption may well go the other way, because it depended on who those particular people were. The Marxist says it will not, because the structural position of private capital has not changed. That is a real, testable difference, and it is the whole of the disagreement.

The distinctions table

Elite theoryMarxist theory
Who rulesAn organised minority: the ruling class, the governing elite, the power eliteThe class that owns the means of production
Source of powerOrganisation, capacity, institutional positionOwnership of the means of production
Basis of the theorySociology and psychology of organisationPolitical economy and history
Is minority rule inevitable?Yes. It is a law of organisationNo. It is a stage of history
The state isThe prize, and an apparatus of administrationAn instrument of class rule
Effect of revolutionCirculation: one elite replaces anotherTransition to a classless society
What ends itNothing ends itThe abolition of private ownership of production
Key namesMosca, Pareto, Michels, MillsMarx, Engels, Lenin, Gramsci
Key phrase"Who says organization, says oligarchy""A committee for managing the common affairs of the whole bourgeoisie"
Strongest evidenceThe socialist states did not wither awayConcentration of wealth, and law's systematic favour to the propertied
Main weaknessCannot distinguish accountable from unaccountable minoritiesCannot account for caste, religion, language or nationalism
munotes.in57

The Elite Theory and the Marxist Theory Compared

What this comparison is NOT

It is not a choice between two errors. Each is strong exactly where the other is weak, and the standard modern position takes something from both: power is concentrated for structural reasons, ownership is one of the most important of them, and the concentration can be reduced by institutions even though it cannot be abolished.

Elite theory is not conservative by definition. Mills used it to attack the American establishment, not to defend it.

Marxism is not a theory that ignores organisation. Lenin's entire contribution was about organisation, and Michels would say Lenin proved his point rather than answered it.

Neither theory says democracy is worthless. They say it does not do what its official description claims. What follows from that is a further argument, and it is the argument of Module IV.

Quick revision

  1. Agree: power is concentrated; democratic forms conceal it; rulers justify themselves with an idea; the visible decision is not where to look.
  2. Disagree on the definition of the minority: ownership against organisation and position.
  3. Disagree on inevitability: Marx says class rule ends, the elite theorists say it never does.
  4. Disagree on the state: an instrument against a prize.
  5. Michels's line at Marxism: the socialists might conquer, but not socialism.
  6. The historical record favours the elite theorists on the withering away of the state, and shows that "iron" overstated the case where organisations have been made accountable.
  7. In India neither predicts caste, and neither explains the change in the composition of power since the 1990s.

Test yourself

1. On what do the elite theory and the Marxist theory agree? That political power is concentrated in a small minority and that pluralism's picture of many groups bargaining on a level field is false; that democratic forms conceal rather than describe where power lies; that rulers maintain a justifying idea, which Mosca calls the political formula and Marx calls the ruling ideas of the age; and that the visible decision is not where power is to be studied.

munotes.in58

The Elite Theory and the Marxist Theory Compared

2. What is the fundamental disagreement between them? What defines the ruling minority, and therefore whether minority rule can end. Marxists define it by ownership of the means of production, which is historically specific, so changing ownership changes the ruling class and eventually abolishes class rule. Elite theorists define it by organisation, capacity and institutional position, which are permanent features of social life, so no change of ownership can abolish the elite; it can only change who belongs to it.

3. How does Michels's conclusion bear directly on Marxism? Michels studied the German Social Democratic Party, the organisation most committed to internal democracy, and found it run by its officials. If oligarchy appears there, it is a property of organisation as such, and any movement organised to end class rule must itself become an oligarchy. He states the consequence in the sharpest form: the socialists might conquer, but not socialism, which would perish at the moment of its adherents' triumph.

4. Which theory does the historical record support? On one decisive point, the elite theorists. Where private ownership of the means of production was abolished, the state did not wither away as Engels predicted; it grew, and power concentrated in a party apparatus no election could displace, which is exactly Michels's prediction. But the record is not one-sided: where organisations have adopted term limits, contested internal elections, audit and enforceable member rights, leadership power has measurably fallen, which shows that "iron" was too strong a word for the law.

5. Apply both theories to India and say what each fails to explain. The Marxist reading is supported by concentrated ownership of land and industry and by the limits within which labour and property law operate. The elite reading is supported by the narrow social composition of legislatures, senior services and courts, by political families, and by party organisations run without internal elections. Neither predicts caste, which has been India's most consequential cleavage for decades and is a status hierarchy rather than a relation to production or a difference of organisational capacity. And neither explains the entry of previously excluded groups into State and local office since the 1990s, since ownership did not change and calling it circulation of elites does not say why the circulation went the way it did.

Contents This chapter on its own page

munotes.in59

Chapter Thirteen

What Authority Is

Syllabus topic 1.2, "Authority as a Concept in Political Science"; 1.2.1, "Meaning and Features of Authority"

In one line

Authority is power that the people subject to it accept as rightful, so that they obey because of who gave the order and not because of what will happen if they do not.

In the wording a student can write in an exam: authority is the right to command and the corresponding duty to obey, resting not on the capacity to compel but on the acceptance by those subject to it that the person or office commanding is entitled to do so, so that obedience is given voluntarily and the exercise of force becomes unnecessary in the normal case.

Why this is the most important idea in the module

The difference between power and authority is the difference between the dacoit and the tax officer, and everything in Modules II and IV depends on it.

If there were only power, then political obligation would be an empty question: you obey the strongest, and that is all there is to say. There would be no such thing as an unjust law, because "unjust" would add nothing to "one I dislike". There would be nothing for legitimacy to explain, because nothing would need explaining. And civil disobedience would be indistinguishable from crime.

The moment you say that some commands are entitled to be obeyed, all of those questions open at once. That is the work the concept of authority does.

Weber's definition

In section 16 of the first part of Wirtschaft und Gesellschaft, Weber defines three things in a single passage, and the relations between them are what a student must hold on to.

Macht, power, is every chance within a social relationship of carrying through one's own will even against resistance, no matter what that chance rests on.

Herrschaft, which we render as authority or domination, is the chance of finding obedience, among specifiable persons, for a command of a given content.

Disziplin, discipline, is the chance of finding prompt, automatic and unthinking obedience among a specifiable number of people, by force of a practised attitude.

Three features of the middle definition matter.

"A command of a given content." Authority is exercised through commands, which are addressed to somebody and tell them to do something. This distinguishes authority from mere influence, which need not command at all.

"Among specifiable persons." Authority has a scope. A Collector's authority runs in the district; a Vice Chancellor's in the university. Nobody has authority over everybody in everything.

"The chance of finding obedience." Like power, authority is a probability. It exists in the expectation of obedience, not in the act of obeying.

A translation note worth carrying. Herrschaft is usually rendered "authority" in Indian textbooks and "domination" in the scholarly literature, and the two English words do not feel the same. The German carries both senses. If a question quotes "legitimate domination", it is quoting the same concept this chapter calls authority.

munotes.in60

What Authority Is

The meaning of authority, and its essential feature

The meaning of authority is compressed into one word in every definition of it, and the word is accepted.

The whole content of the concept is in this. Authority exists because those subject to it think it exists. It is not a physical fact like strength or a legal fact like a section number; it is a shared belief, and it evaporates when the belief does.

Two consequences follow and both are examinable.

Authority is conferred from below, even when it is exercised from above. A judge's authority is real because litigants, lawyers, officials and the police accept it. On the day they stop accepting it, the judgment is a piece of paper.

Authority is cheap, and power is expensive. A state that has authority governs a hundred crore people with a few lakh police, because almost everybody complies without being made to. This is why every regime, however brutal, tries to convert power into authority, and why legitimacy is a practical problem and not a philosophical ornament.

Where authority comes from

Weber's three types are the classical answer and get chapters of their own. Before them, it helps to see the general sources.

Office. A person has authority because they occupy a position that carries it, and they lose it when they leave the position. This is the dominant form in a modern state.

Rules. An office has authority because a rule, ultimately a constitution, confers it.

Tradition. The arrangement has always been so.

Personal qualities. A leader is followed because of who they are, which is Weber's charisma.

Expertise. A specialist is obeyed on their subject. This is often called authority "in" a field as against authority "over" persons, and it is the sense in which a surgeon or a scholar is called an authority.

The two senses of the word, which students confuse

Authority as a right to command, which is what this module is about, and which is a relation between persons: "the tribunal has authority to decide this".

Authority as expertise, which is a relation between a person and a subject: "she is an authority on Roman law".

They are connected, because expertise is one reason people accept a right to command, but they are not the same, and an answer that slides between them loses marks.

A worked example

A traffic constable raises a hand and a line of vehicles stops.

Nothing was compelled. No barrier came down. The constable could not physically stop a bus and both parties know it.

munotes.in61

What Authority Is

The order was obeyed because of who gave it. The same gesture from a passer-by would be ignored. The uniform is the visible sign of an office, and the office is what is being obeyed.

The order was within scope. If the constable had directed the driver to sell his bus, nobody would have complied, and the refusal would not have been disobedience at all, because the direction would be outside the authority.

The obedience is voluntary but not optional. The driver may believe the direction is mistaken and stops anyway. That is the signature of authority: compliance detached from agreement.

Force is in the background and is not doing the work. A prosecution is possible, and the fact that it is almost never necessary is what makes this authority and not coercion. If every driver had to be threatened individually, the arrangement would collapse in an hour.

Distinctions that carry marks

PowerAuthority
Rests onCapacity to compel or induceAcceptance that the holder is entitled
Subject obeys becauseOf what will happen otherwiseOf who gave the order
Conferred byResources, position, strengthThe belief of those subject to it
CostHigh: it must be applied case by caseLow: compliance is general and voluntary
RangeWherever the capacity reachesOnly within its defined scope
If challengedEscalate, or loseThe system faces a legitimacy crisis
ExampleA dacoit taking your moneyA tax officer collecting it

What authority is NOT

Authority is not the same as authoritarianism. The first is a normal and necessary feature of every organised society; the second is a form of rule that suppresses opposition. A word's ugly cousin is not its meaning.

Authority is not the same as legitimacy. Authority is the right to command; legitimacy is the belief in the rightness that makes that right recognised. They are so close that textbooks blur them, and the difference is that legitimacy is the ground and authority is the relation built on it. This is why 1.4 comes after 1.2 in MU's own numbering.

Authority does not mean the subject agrees. The obedience of authority is precisely obedience without agreement. A litigant who obeys a decree they think wrong is the paradigm case.

Authority is not unlimited. It always has a scope, and a command outside the scope is not an exercise of authority at all. In administrative law this is exactly the doctrine that an act beyond the power conferred is void, and the political concept and the legal doctrine are the same idea in two vocabularies.

Quick revision

  1. Authority is power accepted as rightful: the right to command and the duty to obey.
  2. Weber, in one passage: Macht is the chance of prevailing against resistance; Herrschaft, authority or domination, is the chance of finding obedience to a command of a given content among specifiable persons; Disziplin is prompt and automatic obedience by habit.
  3. The essential feature is acceptance. Authority exists because those subject to it believe it does.
  4. Therefore it is conferred from below and it is cheap, while power is expensive.
  5. Sources: office, rules, tradition, personal qualities, expertise.
  6. Two senses: authority over persons, and authority on a subject. Do not slide between them.
  7. Scope is essential: a command outside the scope is not authority at all, which is the political twin of the legal doctrine that an act beyond power is void.
munotes.in62

What Authority Is

Test yourself

1. Define authority and explain what distinguishes it from power. Authority is the right to command and the corresponding duty to obey, resting on the acceptance by those subject to it that the commander is entitled to command. Power rests on the capacity to compel or induce, so the subject complies because of what will follow otherwise; authority rests on acceptance, so the subject complies because of who gave the order. The dacoit and the tax officer both take money; only one of them can expect to be thought entitled.

2. Give Weber's three definitions from the same passage and say how they relate. Power, Macht, is every chance within a social relationship of carrying through one's own will even against resistance, whatever it rests on. Authority, Herrschaft, is the chance of finding obedience for a command of a given content among specifiable persons. Discipline, Disziplin, is the chance of prompt, automatic and unthinking obedience among a specifiable number of people by force of habit. Power is the widest, authority narrower, discipline narrowest; each is a special case of the one before.

3. Why is authority said to be conferred from below? Because it exists only in the belief of those subject to it. A judge's orders bind because litigants, counsel, officials and the police accept that they do; if that acceptance were withdrawn, the judgment would be a piece of paper and no additional legal provision could restore it. The command is issued downward, but the fact that makes it a command rather than a request is supplied upward.

4. Why is authority cheaper than power? Because compliance is general and voluntary, so the sanction almost never has to be applied. A state with authority governs an enormous population with a small police force, since nearly everybody complies without being made to. Power has to be brought to bear case by case, at a cost in money, manpower and resentment, and a government that must compel routinely is displaying weakness rather than strength.

munotes.in63

What Authority Is

5. What is the scope of authority, and what is its legal counterpart? Weber's definition confines authority to commands of a given content addressed to specifiable persons, so every authority has a defined range of subjects and subject matter. A direction outside that range is not disobeyed but disregarded, and disregarding it is not disobedience at all. Its counterpart in law is the rule that an authority may do only what its conferring provision permits, and that an act beyond that power is void; the political concept and the legal doctrine are one idea in two vocabularies.

Contents This chapter on its own page

munotes.in64

Chapter Fourteen

The Features of Authority

Syllabus topic 1.2.1, "Meaning and Features of Authority - De jure and De facto Authority"

In one line

Authority is always attached to a position rather than a person, limited in what it may reach, exercised by commands, accepted rather than imposed, capable of being delegated, and dependent on a belief that can be withdrawn.

In the wording a student can write in an exam: the essential features of authority are that it is relational, legitimate, impersonal in the sense of attaching to an office, limited in scope, hierarchical, exercised through commands, voluntarily obeyed, delegable, backed by sanctions that it seldom needs, and revocable.

The features

1. It is relational

Authority exists between people. There is one who commands and one who obeys, and the question is always "authority over whom".

2. It is legitimate

This is the feature that makes it authority and not power. Those subject to it accept that the holder is entitled to command. If that acceptance is absent, what remains is coercion wearing the same uniform.

3. It attaches to the office, not to the person

The most important feature for a law student, and the one students state least clearly.

A District Magistrate has authority; the individual who is District Magistrate today has authority only while they hold the post. On transfer, the authority stays with the office and the person leaves without it. This is why an order signed by a Magistrate remains valid after that Magistrate retires, and why the successor may vary it.

Weber called this the impersonal character of legal authority and treated it as the mark of a modern state. Where authority attaches to a person rather than an office, as it does under charismatic and to some extent traditional authority, succession becomes a crisis every time.

4. It is limited in scope

Every authority has boundaries of three kinds: over whom it runs, over what subject matter, and for how long. A command outside those boundaries is not an authoritative command at all. In administrative law this is the rule that an authority may act only within the power conferred and that an act beyond it is void, and a student should notice that the political concept and the legal doctrine are the same thing.

5. It is hierarchical

Authority is normally arranged in a ladder, so that each holder is subject to a higher one and there is a route by which a decision can be questioned. This is what makes appeal, revision and review possible, and it is why an authority that answers to nobody is regarded as a defect in a system rather than as its strongest point.

6. It is exercised through commands

Authority operates by directions addressed to somebody, telling them what to do or not to do. This distinguishes it from influence, which changes behaviour without commanding.

munotes.in65

The Features of Authority

7. Obedience to it is voluntary

The subject complies without being compelled, and, importantly, often without agreeing. A litigant who obeys a decree they think mistaken is exercising exactly the attitude that authority requires.

8. It can be delegated

An authority may authorise another to exercise a part of its power, and the delegate's acts then bind as the delegator's would. Two limits follow, and both are law as well as politics: the delegate cannot receive more than the delegator has, and, in the absence of permission, a delegate cannot delegate further.

9. It carries sanctions but rarely uses them

Behind an authority there is always the possibility of a consequence for disobedience. What makes it authority is that the possibility is in the background. When the sanction has to be applied to everybody, the authority has failed and only power is left.

10. It is revocable

Authority depends on a belief and beliefs change. It can be lost when the office is abolished, when the holder is removed, when a court declares the exercise unlawful, or, most fundamentally, when the people subject to it stop accepting it. That last possibility is what makes Modules II and IV possible.

A worked example

A Registrar of a university issues a circular that examinations will be held offline.

Relational: it binds the students and staff of that university and nobody else.

Legitimate: it is obeyed because the Registrar's office is accepted as entitled to issue it.

Impersonal: if the Registrar retires tomorrow, the circular stands, and the successor may amend it.

Limited: the same Registrar cannot direct where students must live or how they must vote. A circular attempting it would not be disobeyed; it would be disregarded, and rightly.

Hierarchical: the Registrar acts under the Vice Chancellor and the statutes, and a student may take the matter to the university's own authorities and then to a court.

Commanded: it is a direction, not a suggestion.

Voluntarily obeyed: students who think online examinations better still attend the hall.

Delegable: the Registrar may authorise a Deputy Registrar to issue the hall tickets, and cannot authorise them to do what the Registrar could not do.

Sanctioned: absence has consequences, and almost nobody has to be told so.

Revocable: the statutes may be amended, the office reorganised, or the circular quashed by a court as beyond power.

Distinctions that carry marks

AuthorityInfluenceCoercion
Operates byA commandArgument, reputation, exampleA threat
Attaches toAn officeA personWhoever holds the means of harm
Obeyed becauseThe holder is entitledThe subject is persuadedThe subject is afraid
Has a defined scope?Yes, alwaysNoOnly the reach of the threat
Survives the holder?YesNoNo
Can be delegated?YesNoOnly with the means of harm
munotes.in66

The Features of Authority

What these features are NOT

"Impersonal" does not mean cold or indifferent. It means that the authority belongs to the office. A very popular officer and an unpopular one hold identical authority.

"Hierarchical" does not mean authoritarian. The ladder exists so that decisions can be questioned, which is a protection and not a threat.

"Voluntary" does not mean optional. The subject is not free to disobey without consequence; they are complying without being compelled.

"Limited" is not a weakness of authority. It is part of the definition. An unlimited authority is a contradiction, because there would be nothing to distinguish its commands from anybody's demands.

Quick revision

  1. Relational: always over somebody, in something.
  2. Legitimate: accepted as rightful. This is the feature that makes it authority.
  3. Impersonal: attaches to the office, not the person; survives the holder.
  4. Limited in scope: over whom, over what, for how long. Outside the scope it is not authority at all.
  5. Hierarchical: subject to a higher authority, which is what makes appeal and review possible.
  6. Exercised by command, unlike influence.
  7. Voluntarily obeyed, often without agreement.
  8. Delegable, but a delegate takes no more than the delegator had and cannot sub-delegate without permission.
  9. Backed by sanctions it rarely needs. When it must always use them, it has failed.
  10. Revocable, ultimately by the withdrawal of acceptance.

Test yourself

1. State the features of authority. It is relational, existing between a commander and a subject; legitimate, in that those subject accept the holder is entitled; impersonal, attaching to an office rather than a person and surviving its holder; limited in scope as to persons, subject matter and time; hierarchical, so that each holder answers to a higher one; exercised through commands; voluntarily obeyed, often without agreement; delegable within limits; backed by sanctions it seldom needs to use; and revocable, ultimately by the withdrawal of acceptance.

2. Why is it important that authority attaches to the office rather than the person? Because it makes the exercise of power continuous and reviewable. An order signed by a Magistrate remains valid after that Magistrate retires, and a successor may vary it, because the authority never belonged to the individual. Weber treated this impersonal character as the mark of the modern state, and its absence is why systems built on charisma or on personal traditional rule face a crisis at every succession.

3. What follows from the fact that authority is limited in scope? That a command outside its boundaries is not an authoritative command at all, and disregarding it is not disobedience. A Registrar who directs how students must vote has not issued an order that is wrong; they have issued something that is not an order. Its legal counterpart is the rule that an authority may act only within the power conferred and that an act beyond that power is void.

munotes.in67

The Features of Authority

4. Explain delegation and its two limits. An authority may authorise another to exercise part of its power, and the delegate's acts then bind as the delegator's would, which is how any large organisation functions. The first limit is that a delegate cannot receive more than the delegator possesses. The second is that, without express permission, a delegate cannot delegate further, since the confidence was reposed in the delegate personally.

5. "An authority that must always use its sanctions has failed." Explain. Authority is compliance given because the commander is accepted as entitled, with the sanction remaining in the background as a possibility. If the sanction must be applied to everyone, then nobody is complying on the ground of entitlement and the relationship has become coercion, which has to be applied case by case at a cost in money, manpower and resentment. The rarity with which sanctions are used is therefore the measure of how much authority a system actually has.

Contents This chapter on its own page

munotes.in68

Chapter Fifteen

De Jure and De Facto Authority

Syllabus topic 1.2.1, "Meaning and Features of Authority - De jure and De facto Authority"

In one line

De jure authority is authority somebody is legally entitled to; de facto authority is authority somebody actually has, whether or not the law says they should.

In the wording a student can write in an exam: de jure authority, meaning authority in law, is that which is conferred by and exercised in accordance with the legal or constitutional rules of the system; de facto authority, meaning authority in fact, is that which is actually exercised and actually obeyed, irrespective of whether the holder has a lawful title to it. The two normally coincide, and the interesting cases are those in which they come apart.

The two Latin phrases

De jure is Latin for "of law" or "by right". It describes what the legal rules say ought to be.

De facto is Latin for "of fact" or "in fact". It describes what actually is, whatever the rules say.

The pair is used all over law: a de facto director, a de facto guardian, a de facto marriage, de facto and de jure recognition of a state. In every use the same contrast is being drawn between title and reality.

The four combinations

The clearest way to hold this is to see that authority in law and authority in fact are two independent questions, so there are four possible answers.

Both de jure and de facto. The ordinary case, and the one a stable political system aims at. A Collector who is validly appointed and whose directions are obeyed.

De jure but not de facto. Somebody has the lawful title and nobody obeys. A government in exile. A court whose orders are systematically ignored. A local body that exists on paper but whose functions are performed by somebody else.

De facto but not de jure. Somebody is obeyed but has no lawful title. A regime that came to power by a coup and is running the country. A person exercising an office whose appointment is later found invalid. In some parts of India at some periods, an armed group whose writ ran in a district while the lawful administration existed on the map.

Neither. Not authority at all.

An answer that sets out those four gets the whole topic in a paragraph.

Why the distinction matters

Because obedience has to be settled somehow. If a person is obeyed but is not entitled to be, what is the position of somebody who obeys them? Every legal system has had to answer this, and the answer is usually that acts done under an apparent authority stand.

Because recognition is a political act. In international law, states recognise other states and governments either de facto, acknowledging that a body is in control, or de jure, acknowledging that it is entitled to be. The distinction lets a state deal with a regime without endorsing it.

munotes.in69

De Jure and De Facto Authority

Because legitimacy is what turns one into the other. A regime that begins de facto will try to make itself de jure, through a constitution, an election or a court that validates it. That process is exactly what topic 1.4 studies.

The Indian illustration

Facts. Gokaraju Rangaraju v. State of Andhra Pradesh, (1981) 3 SCC 132, arose out of two criminal appeals. The appellants had been convicted of offences by two District Judges. By the time the appeals were heard in the High Court, the appointments of those two judges had been declared void, because they had been made contrary to article 233 of the Constitution, which governs the appointment of district judges. The appellants therefore argued that the convictions were themselves void: a person whose appointment was a nullity could not be a judge, their liberty was being taken away otherwise than by the procedure established by law, and applying the de facto doctrine would render the Constitution (Twentieth Amendment) Act 1966 superfluous.

Held. The Supreme Court dismissed the appeals. It held that the two judges were not usurpers or intruders but persons who had discharged the functions and duties of a judge under colour of lawful authority, and that so long as the office itself is validly created, the acts of a person holding it de facto are valid even though the appointment is afterwards found invalid. The Court separated two questions that the appellants had run together: the contravention of a constitutional provision may invalidate the appointment, but the effect of that invalidation on the acts done is a different question, and the de facto doctrine saves those acts. It added that the doctrine is no stranger to the Constitution, pointing to article 71(2), which provides that acts done by the President or the Vice President in the exercise of their office are not invalidated by reason of the election of that person being afterwards declared void.

Why it matters here. The two judges had de facto authority and no de jure authority, and Indian law protected everybody who had treated them as judges. The reason the law takes that position is the political point of this whole chapter. Authority works because people accept it and act on that acceptance. If every act of an officer whose title was later faulted became a nullity, no citizen could safely obey anybody, because no citizen can audit an appointment before complying with an order.

A worked example

A municipality's ward officer transfers a shop licence. Six months later a court holds that the officer's posting was irregular because the sanction of the standing committee was never obtained.

munotes.in70

De Jure and De Facto Authority

The de jure position. The officer had no lawful title to the post, so no authority in law.

The de facto position. The officer sat in the chair, used the seal, signed the file and was obeyed by everybody in the ward. Authority in fact, complete.

The consequence for the licensee, applying the reasoning above. The office of ward officer was validly created, and the person acted under colour of lawful authority rather than as an intruder. The transfer stands.

And the limit. If a private person with no connection to the municipality had walked in and issued the transfer, they would be a usurper, the office would never have been theirs even in appearance, and nothing would be saved. The doctrine protects those who relied on an appearance of authority; it does not create authority out of nothing.

Distinctions that carry marks

De jure authorityDe facto authority
MeaningAuthority in law, by rightAuthority in fact, actually exercised
SourceThe legal or constitutional rulesActual obedience
TestIs the title valid?Is the person actually obeyed?
ExampleA validly appointed CollectorA regime installed by a coup and in control
Can exist without the other?Yes: a government in exileYes: a person whose appointment is later voided
In international lawRecognition that a body is entitled to governRecognition that a body is in control
What it needs to become the otherActual obedienceLegitimation: a constitution, an election, a court

What this distinction is NOT

De facto does not mean unlawful. It means the question of lawfulness is being left aside. A perfectly lawful authority is also de facto authority whenever it is actually obeyed.

De jure does not mean real. A body with an unimpeachable legal title and no obedience has authority in the same sense that a person has a valid ticket for a train that no longer runs.

The de facto doctrine is not a way of curing an invalid appointment. The appointment stays invalid, and the person may be removed. What is saved is the acts done in the meantime, and the beneficiary is the public who relied on them.

It does not protect a usurper. The doctrine requires that the office be validly created and that the person acted under colour of lawful authority. A pure intruder is outside it.

Quick revision

  1. De jure is authority in law; de facto is authority in fact.
  2. Four combinations: both, de jure only, de facto only, neither. Learn the examples of the middle two.
  3. De jure only: a government in exile, a court whose orders are ignored.
  4. De facto only: a regime installed by a coup, an officer whose appointment is later voided.
  5. Gokaraju Rangaraju v. State of Andhra Pradesh, (1981) 3 SCC 132: convictions by District Judges whose appointments were void under article 233 were upheld; the judges acted under colour of lawful authority and were not usurpers; the office being validly created, the acts of the de facto holder stand. Compare article 71(2), which says the same thing about the President and Vice President.
  6. In international law, de facto recognition acknowledges control, de jure recognition acknowledges entitlement.
  7. What turns de facto into de jure is legitimation, which is topic 1.4.
munotes.in71

De Jure and De Facto Authority

Test yourself

1. Distinguish de jure from de facto authority. De jure authority is conferred by the legal or constitutional rules of the system and is exercised by a person with a valid title; the test is whether the title is good. De facto authority is authority actually exercised and actually obeyed, whatever the state of the title; the test is whether the person is in fact obeyed. They normally coincide, and the important cases are those in which they separate.

2. Give an example of each of the four possible combinations. Both: a validly appointed Collector whose directions are followed. De jure without de facto: a government in exile, which has a lawful title and controls nothing. De facto without de jure: a regime installed by a coup which governs the country, or an officer whose appointment is afterwards declared void. Neither: a person with no title who is not obeyed, which is not authority at all.

3. State the facts and holding of Gokaraju Rangaraju. The appellants were convicted by two District Judges whose appointments were later declared void for contravening article 233, and they argued that the convictions were therefore nullities. The Supreme Court dismissed the appeals, holding that the judges were not usurpers but had acted under colour of lawful authority, and that where the office itself is validly created the acts of a de facto holder are valid though the appointment is afterwards invalidated. It separated the validity of the appointment from the validity of the acts done under it, and pointed to article 71(2) as a constitutional instance of the same principle.

4. Why does the law protect acts done by a de facto officer? Because authority works only if people can act on it, and no citizen can audit an appointment before obeying an order. If every act of an officer whose title was later found faulty became a nullity, every decree, licence, conviction and permission would be open to attack on a ground the person who relied on it could never have checked. The doctrine therefore protects those who relied on the appearance of authority, while leaving the invalid appointment itself to be set aside.

munotes.in72

De Jure and De Facto Authority

5. What is the relation between this distinction and legitimacy? Legitimacy is what converts one into the other. A regime that begins with de facto authority alone will seek to acquire a de jure title, by promulgating a constitution, holding an election or obtaining validation from a court, because authority resting on control alone is expensive and unstable. That process of converting fact into right is exactly what the topic on legitimacy studies, and it is why MU places legitimacy after authority in its own numbering.

Contents This chapter on its own page

munotes.in73

Chapter Sixteen

Max Weber's Classification of Authority

Syllabus topic 1.2.2, "Max Webber's Classification of Authority"

In one line

Weber said there are exactly three pure ways in which people come to accept that somebody is entitled to command them: because it has always been so, because of the extraordinary personal quality of the commander, and because a rule made the commander competent.

In the wording a student can write in an exam: Weber classified legitimate authority into three pure types according to the ground on which its claim to legitimacy rests: traditional authority, resting on the everyday belief in the sanctity of immemorial traditions and the legitimacy of those called to authority by them; charismatic authority, resting on devotion to the exceptional sanctity, heroism or exemplary character of a person and of the order they reveal or create; and legal or rational authority, resting on belief in the legality of enacted rules and in the right to command of those raised to authority under them.

Weber's own statement

Weber writes, in the part of Wirtschaft und Gesellschaft dealing with the types of domination, that there are three pure types of legitimate domination, and that their claim to legitimacy may rest primarily on one of three characters.

Rational in character, resting on the belief in the legality of enacted orders and in the right to give directions of those called to exercise authority under them. Weber's own bracket for this is legale Herrschaft, legal domination.

Traditional in character, resting on the everyday belief in the sanctity of traditions valid from time immemorial and in the legitimacy of those called to authority by them: traditionale Herrschaft.

Charismatic in character, resting on the extraordinary devotion to the sanctity, or the heroic force, or the exemplary quality of a person and of the order revealed or created by that person: charismatische Herrschaft.

He then adds a second passage that students almost never quote and that is worth more than the first, because it says in each case what is being obeyed.

Under legal domination, obedience is given to the legally established impersonal order, and to the superior determined by it, by virtue of the formal legality of the directions and within their scope.

Under traditional domination, obedience is given to the person of the master who is called by tradition and himself bound by it, out of Pietät, a word meaning reverence or dutiful respect, and only within the circle of what is customary.

Under charismatic domination, obedience is given to the charismatically qualified leader as such, out of personal trust in revelation, heroism or exemplary quality, and only so far as the belief in that charisma holds.

Read the three together and the classification stops being a list. In one the rule is obeyed, in another the person as heir of a custom, in the third the person as an extraordinary individual. That is the whole of Weber's answer to the question of why people obey.

munotes.in74

Max Weber's Classification of Authority

Two things to fix before the three chapters that follow

Weber is classifying legitimacy, not government. He is not saying there are three kinds of state. He is saying there are three grounds on which a claim to be obeyed is accepted. A single state contains all three at once.

These are ideal types. An ideal type, in Weber's method, is a deliberately purified mental construct: it exaggerates the essential features of a phenomenon so that real cases can be compared against it. No actual regime is a pure type, and pointing out that a real government is a mixture is not an objection to Weber but an application of him. "Ideal" here does not mean desirable. It means conceptual.

The classification at a glance

TraditionalCharismaticLegal rational
Legitimacy rests onThe sanctity of immemorial customDevotion to an extraordinary personBelief in the legality of enacted rules
What is obeyedThe person of the master, as heir to customThe person of the leader, as suchThe impersonal order, and the office under it
Weber's word for the ground of obediencePiety, reverence for what has always beenPersonal trust in revelation, heroism or exampleFormal legality
Limit on the commandWhat custom permitsThe follower's continued beliefThe scope the rule confers
StaffPersonal retainers, kin, favouritesDisciples, chosen for their devotionOfficials, appointed for qualification
SuccessionInheritance or customThe crisis of the type; solved by routinisationProvided for by rule in advance
StabilityHigh, but rigidVery lowHigh, and adaptable
ExampleA monarch, a hereditary head, a caste elderA prophet, a revolutionary, a founderA judge, a Collector, a returning officer

A worked example

A village faces a dispute about the use of a common pond.

The traditional claim. The head of the oldest family says that the pond has always been used in a certain order and that his family has always settled such matters. He is obeyed by those who accept that this is how it has always been. His authority stops where custom stops: if he ordered the pond filled in, the same villagers would refuse, and the refusal would not feel like disobedience.

The charismatic claim. A young man who led the drought relief two years ago and who is believed to have unusual judgment proposes a completely new arrangement. Those who follow him do so because of him, not because of any office. If the arrangement fails, his authority does not diminish; it disappears.

munotes.in75

Max Weber's Classification of Authority

The legal rational claim. The Gram Panchayat passes a resolution under the powers conferred on it by statute, and the Secretary issues a notice. It binds everybody in the village, including those who dislike it and those who never heard of the head of the oldest family. It binds because a rule says the Panchayat may decide such matters, and it lasts after every present member has gone.

Three claims to command, in one village, on one afternoon. That is why Weber's classification is still taught.

What this classification is NOT

It is not a historical sequence. Weber is not saying that societies pass from traditional to charismatic to legal rational. All three appear in ancient societies and all three appear now.

It is not a ranking. Legal rational authority is not "better"; Weber was, if anything, gloomy about it, because he thought bureaucratic rationality would trap people in what he called an iron cage.

It is not a classification of governments. It classifies grounds of legitimacy, and any government rests on more than one.

It is not a classification of power. Weber is explicit that this is Herrschaft, authority, the chance of finding obedience to a command, which is the narrower concept. Power in his wider sense need not be legitimate at all.

Quick revision

  1. Three pure types of legitimate domination: traditional, charismatic, legal rational.
  2. Traditional: the sanctity of immemorial custom; the person of the master is obeyed, out of piety, within the circle of the customary.
  3. Charismatic: devotion to the sanctity, heroism or exemplary quality of a person; the leader as such is obeyed, out of personal trust, so long as the belief lasts.
  4. Legal rational: belief in the legality of enacted rules; the impersonal order and the office are obeyed, by virtue of formal legality, within the scope conferred.
  5. They are ideal types: purified constructs for comparison, not descriptions of real regimes, and "ideal" does not mean desirable.
  6. Every real state contains all three at once.

Test yourself

1. State Weber's three types of legitimate authority. Traditional authority, resting on the everyday belief in the sanctity of traditions valid from time immemorial and in the legitimacy of those whom those traditions call to authority. Charismatic authority, resting on extraordinary devotion to the sanctity, heroism or exemplary character of a person and of the order that person reveals or creates. And legal or rational authority, resting on belief in the legality of enacted rules and in the right to command of those raised to office under them.

2. In each type, what exactly is being obeyed? Under legal authority, the legally established impersonal order and the superior determined by it, by virtue of the formal legality of the direction and only within its scope. Under traditional authority, the person of the master who is called by tradition and is himself bound by it, out of reverence, and only within the circle of what is customary. Under charismatic authority, the charismatically qualified leader as such, out of personal trust in revelation, heroism or exemplary quality, and only so long as the belief in that charisma holds.

munotes.in76

Max Weber's Classification of Authority

3. What is an ideal type, and why does it matter here? A deliberately purified mental construct that exaggerates the essential features of a phenomenon so that real cases can be measured against it. It matters because Weber's three types are ideal types, so no actual regime is any of them in pure form, and observing that a real government mixes all three is not a criticism of the classification but the intended use of it. "Ideal" here means conceptual, not desirable.

4. Is Weber's classification a historical sequence? Give reasons. No. All three types are found in ancient and in modern societies, and a modern legal rational state contains traditional elements, such as ceremonial monarchy or customary practices, and charismatic ones, such as a leader followed for personal qualities rather than for the office held. Weber is classifying the grounds on which claims to obedience are accepted, and those grounds coexist rather than succeed one another.

5. Distinguish what Weber classifies here from power in his wider sense. Here he classifies Herrschaft, authority or domination, which he defines as the chance of finding obedience to a command of a given content among specifiable persons, and the classification is of the grounds on which such obedience is thought legitimate. Power, Macht, is the wider concept: every chance of carrying through one's own will within a social relationship even against resistance, whatever it rests on. Power need not be legitimate at all, and this classification has nothing to say about it.

Contents This chapter on its own page

munotes.in77

Chapter Seventeen

Traditional Authority

Syllabus topic 1.2.2, "Max Webber's Classification of Authority"

In one line

Traditional authority is obeyed because it has always been obeyed: the ruler holds power by inheriting a position that custom created, and the customs that put him there also limit what he may do.

In the wording a student can write in an exam: traditional authority is the type of legitimate domination which rests on the everyday belief in the sanctity of traditions valid from time immemorial and in the legitimacy of those called to authority by them; obedience is owed to the person of the master, out of reverence, and only within the circle of what custom sanctions.

The ground of obedience

Weber's own account is precise on a point that summaries lose. Under traditional domination, obedience is given to the person of the master, and the master is both called by tradition and bound by tradition. Obedience is given out of Pietät, a word best rendered as reverence or dutiful respect, and it is owed only within the circle of what is customary.

Four consequences follow, and they are the chapter.

The person, not the office. A subject obeys the king, not the crown as an abstraction. The relationship is personal, which is why traditional systems are held together by loyalty and why disloyalty is treated as a moral betrayal rather than as a breach of a rule.

The master is bound too. This is the feature students forget. Custom is not a licence; it is a boundary in both directions. A traditional ruler who violates custom is not exercising authority at all, and this is one of the classical grounds of resistance.

The scope is what custom covers. Where custom is silent, the ruler acts on personal discretion, and Weber notes that this is where arbitrariness enters a traditional system: not in defiance of custom but in the space custom does not reach.

Change is illegitimate by definition. A traditional system cannot say "we shall now do it differently" without undermining the reason it is obeyed. Reforms are therefore presented as restorations of an older and purer practice.

Weber's forms of traditional domination

Gerontocracy. Rule by the elders of a group, exercised because age is believed to carry the tradition. There is no separate administrative staff.

Patriarchalism. Rule by the head of a household or clan, inherited by a fixed rule of succession, again without a separate staff. The household is the model on which the whole political relationship is built.

Patrimonialism. The stage at which the master acquires a personal administrative and military staff. The staff are personal retainers, recruited from kin, favourites, slaves or clients, and they hold their positions at the master's pleasure. The realm is treated as an extension of the household, which is why the ruler's revenue and the state's revenue are not distinguished.

munotes.in78

Traditional Authority

Estate type patrimonialism, or feudalism in the wide sense. The staff have appropriated their positions and the powers attached to them: an office is now a property held by right, and the ruler must bargain with those who hold it. This is where a traditional system starts to develop enforceable limits on the ruler.

What holds it together, and what it cannot do

Its strengths. Enormous stability. Nothing has to be justified. Succession is settled in advance by custom. Legitimacy is not periodically tested and therefore does not periodically fail.

Its weaknesses, and each one is examinable.

It cannot innovate. Any deliberate change is an attack on the ground of its own authority.

Administration is unspecialised. Officials are chosen for loyalty and personal relationship rather than for competence, so a traditional system cannot run a modern economy.

Public and private are not separated. The ruler's household and the public treasury are the same thing, which is the structural reason that patrimonial systems appear corrupt when judged by legal rational standards. It is worth stating carefully: it is not that patrimonial rulers are dishonest, but that the very distinction between public funds and private funds does not exist in the system.

Its arbitrariness lies in the gaps. Custom governs the customary; beyond it the ruler is unconstrained.

It is unequal by design. Custom encodes an existing hierarchy of birth, and traditional authority reproduces it.

Traditional authority in India

A good answer moves from Weber's Europe to India, because the Indian material is unusually rich.

Before 1947, the princely states, the zamindari system and hereditary village office were traditional authority in Weber's sense, and several fit patrimonialism exactly.

Caste authority is the largest Indian instance. The authority of a caste council over its members rests on nothing but the belief that this is how it has always been. It is worth noticing that this authority is often exercised today in flat defiance of legal rational authority, and that where it purports to punish, the courts have treated its orders as having no legal existence at all.

Family and community elders exercise real authority over marriage, property arrangements and disputes, often more effectively than any court.

Religious offices, whether hereditary or successional, carry authority of the same kind.

The important Indian observation is that the Constitution of 1950 was a deliberate attempt to replace traditional authority with legal rational authority in one step: it abolished titles, ended untouchability, made every office answerable to law, and put the source of all authority in a document that begins "We, the people". Seventy-five years later, traditional authority has not disappeared; it has retreated into the private and the local, where it remains strong. That tension is much of Indian politics.

munotes.in79

Traditional Authority

A worked example

A Deputy Collector visits a village to hear objections to a land record entry.

The traditional claim in the room. The head of the dominant family says the boundary has been where it is since his grandfather's time, that his family has settled such disputes for as long as anyone can remember, and that the neighbours accept it. Several of them do accept it, and would accept it if the officer were not there.

Why it is traditional authority and not something else. Nobody appointed him. No rule confers anything. What is being obeyed is the person, as the holder of a place that custom created, and only within the range of matters custom covers. If he told a neighbour whom to vote for, the same men who defer to him on the boundary would not comply, and would not feel they had disobeyed anything.

Where it collides with legal rational authority. The record of rights is maintained under a statute, and the officer is bound by it. The village's custom is not irrelevant, because the statute may itself direct that possession and long usage be considered. But the custom now operates as evidence within a legal framework, not as a source of authority in its own right, and that shift is precisely the difference between the two types.

Distinctions that carry marks

TraditionalLegal rational
GroundIt has always been soA rule confers the power
Obedience owed toThe person of the masterThe impersonal order and the office
Basis of the relationshipPersonal loyalty and reverenceImpersonal rule and qualification
Staff chosen forLoyalty and personal connectionTechnical qualification
Public and privateNot distinguishedSharply separated
ScopeWhat custom covers; discretion beyond itWhat the rule confers, and nothing more
Attitude to changeChange is illegitimateChange is normal, by amendment

What traditional authority is NOT

It is not merely old power. A dictatorship that has lasted thirty years is not traditional authority, because it is not obeyed on the ground that it has always been so.

It is not unlimited. Custom binds the ruler as much as the subject, and this is the feature most often missed.

It is not extinct. In India it operates every day, in families, castes, temples, and village life.

It is not necessarily hostile to law. Legal systems have absorbed a great deal of custom, and Indian personal law is the largest instance.

Quick revision

  1. Ground: the everyday belief in the sanctity of immemorial tradition and in the legitimacy of those tradition calls to authority.
  2. What is obeyed: the person of the master, out of reverence, and only within the circle of the customary.
  3. The master is bound by custom too; violating it destroys the claim to be obeyed.
  4. Weber's forms: gerontocracy, patriarchalism, patrimonialism, and the estate type.
  5. Patrimonialism is the crucial one: a personal staff of retainers, and no separation of the ruler's purse from the public purse.
  6. Strengths: stability, settled succession, no need for justification. Weaknesses: cannot innovate, unspecialised administration, no public and private divide, arbitrary in the gaps, unequal by design.
  7. In India: princely states, zamindari, caste councils, family elders, hereditary religious office; and a Constitution designed to displace all of it.
munotes.in80

Traditional Authority

Test yourself

1. Define traditional authority and state its ground. It is the type of legitimate domination resting on the everyday belief in the sanctity of traditions valid from time immemorial and in the legitimacy of those called to authority by them. Obedience is owed to the person of the master, who is both called by tradition and bound by it, is given out of reverence, and extends only to the circle of matters that custom covers.

2. "Traditional authority binds the ruler as much as the subject." Explain. Because the ruler's title comes from custom, custom is also the measure of what the ruler may do. A traditional ruler who orders something custom forbids is not exercising authority at all, and subjects who refuse are not disobeying but denying that any command was made. This is why breach of custom is one of the classical grounds of resistance in traditional systems, and it is the feature most often omitted from answers.

3. Set out Weber's forms of traditional domination. Gerontocracy, rule by the elders of a group with no separate staff. Patriarchalism, rule by the head of a household or clan under a fixed rule of succession, again with no separate staff. Patrimonialism, in which the master acquires a personal administrative and military staff of kin, favourites and clients holding office at his pleasure, and treats the realm as an extension of his household. And the estate type, in which the staff have appropriated their offices as rights, so that the ruler must bargain with them.

4. Why do patrimonial systems appear corrupt from a legal rational standpoint? Because they do not separate the ruler's household from the public treasury. Revenue is the master's, offices are granted as personal favours, and retainers are maintained out of the same purse. Judged by the legal rational standard, in which public office is a trust and public money is not the officer's, all of this is misappropriation. Judged internally it is not, because the distinction that makes it wrong does not exist in the system. It is a structural difference, not a difference in the honesty of individuals.

munotes.in81

Traditional Authority

5. Give three Indian examples of traditional authority and say what the Constitution did about it. The princely states and the zamindari system before 1947; the authority of caste councils over their members; and the authority of family, community and hereditary religious office. The Constitution attempted to displace all of it at once by abolishing titles, ending untouchability, subjecting every office to law and locating the source of all authority in a document adopted by the people. Traditional authority did not disappear but retreated into the private and the local, where it remains strong, and the friction between the two is much of Indian politics.

Contents This chapter on its own page

munotes.in82

Chapter Eighteen

Charismatic Authority

Syllabus topic 1.2.2, "Max Webber's Classification of Authority"

In one line

Charismatic authority is obeyed because of who the leader is: an extraordinary person is believed to have qualities nobody else has, and the belief itself is the only thing holding the authority up.

In the wording a student can write in an exam: charismatic authority is the type of legitimate domination which rests on the extraordinary devotion of followers to the sanctity, heroism or exemplary character of an individual person and of the order revealed or created by that person; obedience is owed to the leader as such, out of personal trust, and lasts only so long as the belief in the leader's charisma lasts.

What the word means

Charisma comes from the Greek for a gift of grace, and Weber says so expressly: it is an early Christian term, used for the gifts believed to be conferred by the spirit. Weber takes it out of theology and uses it for any quality of an individual by which they are set apart from ordinary people and treated as endowed with exceptional powers or qualities.

Two cautions follow, and both are commonly failed.

Charisma is not charm, popularity or good speaking. A leader may be a poor speaker and still hold charismatic authority; a very attractive celebrity may hold none.

Charisma is in the eyes of the followers, not in the person. Weber's test is not whether the leader really has extraordinary powers. It is whether the followers believe it and act on the belief. This is why the same person can be charismatic to one group and nobody at all to another, and why charisma can be lost overnight without the person changing.

The ground of obedience

Weber's second passage on the three types says that under charismatic domination obedience is given to the charismatically qualified leader as such, by virtue of personal trust in revelation, heroic quality or exemplary character, and only within the sphere in which the belief in that charisma holds.

Every feature of the type comes out of that sentence.

It attaches to the person, not to an office or a custom. There is no post to inherit and no rule to invoke.

It is proved by results. A charismatic leader must keep demonstrating the quality. Weber is explicit that if the leader's mission fails, if the followers cease to prosper, if the promised deliverance does not come, the charisma is regarded as having departed and the authority collapses. Nothing else in Weber's scheme has this property: a Collector who makes a bad decision is still a Collector.

It is revolutionary. Traditional authority says "it has always been so"; legal authority says "the rule says so"; charismatic authority says, in effect, "you have heard it said, but I say to you". It is the only one of the three types capable of overturning an established order from the inside, which is why every great social upheaval has a charismatic figure at the front of it.

munotes.in83

Charismatic Authority

Its administration is improvised. The staff are disciples chosen for devotion and personal calling, not for qualification or for birth. There is no career, no fixed salary, no jurisdiction and no promotion; there is a mission.

It is economically unstable. Weber points out that charismatic movements are hostile to routine economic life and live on gifts, booty or endowments, which cannot be sustained.

The problem of succession, and routinisation

The characteristic crisis of charismatic authority is that the leader dies. There is no rule of succession, because rules are exactly what this type does without, and the followers face a choice between dispersing and finding some way of transferring the authority.

Weber calls the process by which they solve it Veralltäglichung, usually translated as the routinisation of charisma: literally, its becoming everyday. The devices are worth knowing by name, because a question on charisma very often ends here.

Search for a new leader with the same qualities, by signs or by revelation.

Designation by the leader, or by the leader's staff, of a successor.

Hereditary charisma, in which the quality is believed to run in the blood, and the leader's family inherits. This turns charismatic authority into traditional authority.

Charisma of office, in which the quality is believed to attach to a position and to be transferred by ritual, such as ordination or coronation. This turns it into traditional or legal authority depending on how the office is then governed.

The conclusion is the point. Charismatic authority is inherently temporary. It either dies with the leader or turns into one of the other two types. Weber's own word for it is that it must become everyday in order to survive, and in becoming everyday it stops being charismatic.

Examples

Religious founders and prophets, which is where the term came from.

Revolutionary leaders, who claim a mandate that no existing law confers.

Military figures who acquire a following personally rather than by rank.

Founders of movements and of states. In India the obvious instance is Gandhi, whose authority rested on no office of any kind: he held no post in government, and for long stretches no post in the Congress either, and was obeyed nonetheless by millions. He is also a good illustration of the limits of the type, because his authority did not transfer, and the movement he led continued after him as an organisation with rules, offices and elections, which is routinisation exactly.

munotes.in84

Charismatic Authority

A caution about modern politics. Contemporary leaders with large personal followings are often described as charismatic, and there is something in it. But almost all of them also hold constitutional office, which means their authority is a compound: the office supplies legal rational authority and the following supplies charisma. Weber's ideal types are for analysing such compounds, not for labelling people.

A worked example

A cyclone destroys a coastal town. The administration is overwhelmed for four days.

A young volunteer organises the first relief camp, walks into flooded lanes nobody else will enter, and by the third day is being obeyed by several hundred people, including some officials, none of whom appointed her.

This is charismatic authority in its pure form. No office, no rule, no custom. She is obeyed because of what she is believed to be, and the belief was formed by what she did.

Its instability. On the fifth day a rumour spreads that supplies were misdirected. The rumour is false, but the number of people obeying her drops sharply within hours. Nothing about her changed; the belief did, and that is all this type ever consisted of.

Routinisation. Three weeks later the relief work has become a registered trust with a bank account, a committee and a set of rules, and she is its secretary. Her authority is now partly legal rational, and it will survive her departure.

Distinctions that carry marks

CharismaticTraditionalLegal rational
GroundExtraordinary personal quality, believed inIt has always been soA rule confers it
Attaches toThe person, uniquelyThe person, as heir to customThe office
StaffDisciples, chosen for devotionRetainers, chosen for loyaltyOfficials, chosen for qualification
RulesNone; the leader creates themCustomEnacted, and binding on the holder too
SuccessionThe crisis of the typeSettled by customSettled in advance by rule
DurationShort; it must be renewed constantlyVery longLong, and adaptable
Attitude to the existing orderRevolutionaryConservativeReformist within the rules
How it endsThe belief fails, or it is routinisedCustom is displacedThe rules are changed

What charismatic authority is NOT

It is not popularity. A leader may be widely liked and hold no authority whatever, and a charismatic leader may be feared and disliked by everybody outside the following.

It is not necessarily good. Weber's category is value neutral: it covers saints and demagogues equally, and he says so.

It is not a quality of the leader alone. It exists in the relationship, and specifically in the followers' belief.

It cannot be inherited without changing type. The moment the quality is said to run in a family, the authority has become traditional, whatever it is still called.

munotes.in85

Charismatic Authority

It is not the same as authoritarian rule. Many authoritarian rulers hold no charisma at all and rest on coercion, which is not authority in Weber's sense at all.

Quick revision

  1. Charisma is Greek for a gift of grace; Weber notes it is an early Christian term.
  2. Ground: devotion to the sanctity, heroism or exemplary quality of a person and of the order that person reveals or creates.
  3. What is obeyed: the leader as such, out of personal trust, and only while the belief holds.
  4. It is proved by results: if the mission fails, the charisma is regarded as departed.
  5. It is revolutionary, its staff are disciples, and it is economically unstable.
  6. Its crisis is succession, solved by routinisation: search, designation, hereditary charisma, or charisma of office.
  7. Therefore it is inherently temporary: it either fails or turns into traditional or legal authority.

Test yourself

1. Define charismatic authority. The type of legitimate domination resting on extraordinary devotion to the sanctity, heroism or exemplary character of an individual and of the order that individual reveals or creates. Obedience is owed to the leader personally rather than to any office or custom, is given out of personal trust in revelation, heroism or example, and lasts only within the sphere in which belief in the leader's charisma holds.

2. "Charisma is in the followers, not in the leader." Explain. Weber's test is not whether the leader actually possesses extraordinary powers but whether the followers believe it and act on the belief. It follows that the same person may hold charismatic authority over one group and none at all over another, that the authority can be destroyed by a rumour without anything about the leader changing, and that the relationship, not the individual, is the unit of analysis.

3. Why is charismatic authority unstable? Because it must be constantly proved. Weber notes that if the mission fails or the promised benefit does not come, the charisma is regarded as having departed and the authority collapses, which is true of neither of the other types. Its administration is improvised and its finances rest on gifts or booty rather than on regular revenue. And it has no rule of succession, because rules are exactly what it does without, so the leader's death is a crisis by construction.

4. What is routinisation, and what forms does it take? The process, which Weber calls Veralltäglichung or becoming everyday, by which a charismatic movement converts itself into a durable structure after the leader is gone. Its forms are the search for a new leader displaying the same qualities; designation of a successor by the leader or the staff; hereditary charisma, in which the quality is believed to run in the family, which converts the authority into traditional authority; and charisma of office, in which the quality is believed to attach to a position and to be transmitted by ritual.

munotes.in86

Charismatic Authority

5. Why do modern political leaders rarely exemplify the pure type? Because almost all of them also hold constitutional office, so their authority is a compound: the office supplies legal rational authority that survives any loss of popularity, and the personal following supplies charisma that a mere office holder would not have. Weber's ideal types are constructed precisely to analyse such compounds by comparison, and treating them as labels to be pinned on individuals misuses the method.

Contents This chapter on its own page

munotes.in87

Chapter Twenty

The Sources of Authority: How Power Is Legalised

Syllabus topic 1.2.3, "Sources - How is Power legalised?"

In one line

Power becomes authority when it can be traced back, step by step, to something the society accepts as the ultimate source of the right to command; in India that something is the Constitution, and every lawful order in the country is the bottom of a chain that ends there.

In the wording a student can write in an exam: the sources of authority are those grounds from which a right to command is derived and by reference to which it is accepted, principally the constitution and law, tradition and custom, popular consent expressed through elections, personal qualities, expertise, office, and religion; and power is legalised when it is conferred by, exercised in accordance with, and confined within a rule which is itself valid under a higher rule, up to the constitution, which rests on acceptance rather than on any further rule.

The general sources

Constitution and law. The dominant source in a modern state. The right to command is created by a written instrument and by the statutes made under it.

Tradition and custom. Authority derived from what has always been done, which Weber's traditional type describes.

Consent, expressed through election. The claim that the holder was chosen by those they command. This is the distinctively democratic source and the one Module IV is about.

Personal qualities. Weber's charisma.

Expertise. The specialist's authority within their field, which modern administration relies on heavily.

Office. The position itself, whoever holds it. This is derivative, because an office is created by a rule or a custom, but it is worth naming separately because it is what a citizen actually encounters.

Religion. Authority claimed as conferred by, or exercised on behalf of, a divine source. Historically the most widespread of all and still operative in personal law, in religious institutions and in community life.

Force, which is the honest addition to the list. Conquest, coup and occupation produce power that is obeyed. It is not yet authority; it becomes authority only if it is legalised, and the process by which regimes born of force acquire a constitution, an election and a court to validate them is exactly the subject of the second half of this chapter.

How power is legalised: the chain

A written constitution answers MU's question with a chain, and the value of the chain is that any exercise of power in the country can be tested against it.

Step 1: the ultimate source

Every legal system rests, in the end, on something not itself derived from a higher rule. Jurists have two well-known names for this and a student meets both in jurisprudence.

Kelsen's Grundnorm, or basic norm: the presupposed norm that gives the first constitution its validity. It is not itself enacted by anybody; it is presupposed, because otherwise the chain of validity has no beginning.

munotes.in93

The Sources of Authority: How Power Is Legalised

Hart's rule of recognition: the rule, accepted and practised by the officials of a system, which settles what counts as law in that system. Hart's version is a fact about behaviour rather than a presupposition: it exists because judges, officials and lawyers actually use it.

Both make the same political point, and it is the point of this whole module. At the bottom of the most rule bound legal order there is not another rule but an acceptance. Legal rational authority does not escape the need for legitimacy; it postpones it to the top of the pyramid.

In India that acceptance is expressed in the Preamble, which says that the people of India adopt, enact and give the Constitution to themselves. It is a claim about the source of authority, made in the instrument itself.

Step 2: the Constitution confers power on organs

The executive power of the Union is vested in the President by article 53 and extends, under article 73, to the matters on which Parliament may legislate; the executive power of a State is vested in the Governor by article 154 and extends, under article 162, to matters on which the State legislature may legislate. Legislative power is conferred and distributed by articles 245 and 246, read with the three Lists.

Step 3: the organ makes law within its competence

A statute is valid if the legislature had competence and the statute does not contravene the Constitution. Article 13 makes any law inconsistent with the Fundamental Rights void to the extent of the inconsistency.

Step 4: the statute confers power on an authority

Almost every statute names an officer or a body and states what it may do, on what grounds and by what procedure.

Step 5: delegated legislation fills in the detail

Rules, regulations, notifications and orders are made under the enabling section, and they are valid only so far as the section permits.

Step 6: the individual order

The permit, the licence, the notice, the assessment, the decree. This is where a citizen meets authority, and it is valid only if every step above it was valid.

And the loop back to the top

Article 368 provides how the Constitution itself may be amended, so even the top of the chain can be changed by a procedure the chain prescribes. And the Supreme Court has held that this power of amendment does not extend to damaging the Constitution's basic structure, which places a limit above the highest rule the text confers, on the reasoning that a power to amend cannot include a power to destroy.

munotes.in94

The Sources of Authority: How Power Is Legalised

What legalisation actually adds

An answer that lists the chain has described the mechanics. What earns marks is saying what the mechanics achieve.

A test of validity. Any order can be measured against the step above it, so a citizen can ask a court whether the power existed.

Limits. Each step confers something narrower than the step above.

Impersonality. The power belongs to the office, so it survives the holder and can be exercised by a successor.

Predictability. Because the rules are general and published, a person can know in advance what may be done to them.

Accountability. Because each step is traceable, somebody can always be identified as responsible.

Legitimacy. A power that can be traced to the Constitution can be defended in public as rightful, which is what converts power into authority.

A worked example: a regime legalising itself

A general seizes power in a state and suspends its constitution. He has power. He has no authority.

What he does next is the same everywhere, and it is a case study in legalising power.

He issues a proclamation that all existing laws continue in force, so that daily life goes on and the courts keep sitting. He obtains, from those courts, some acknowledgment that his orders are being given effect. He appoints a commission to draft a new constitution. He holds a referendum or an election, and the result is announced as the will of the people. The new constitution then declares that everything done since the seizure was lawfully done, which is a validation clause, and every subsequent order is traceable to that constitution.

What has happened. Nothing changed the fact that the origin was force. What changed is that the origin has been covered by a chain of rules that people accept, so the general's successors will command as officers rather than as conquerors. That is precisely what "legalising power" means, and it is why the question MU asks is a real one and not a formality.

And the limit of the technique. Legalisation is not the same as legitimation. A validation clause makes acts lawful; it does not make them accepted. Which is why the next two chapters, on legitimacy, are the necessary completion of this one.

Distinctions that carry marks

LegalisationLegitimation
What it doesMakes power traceable to a valid ruleMakes power accepted as rightful
TestIs there a rule conferring it?Do those subject to it believe it is entitled?
Proved byA document, and a court's rulingCompliance without compulsion
Can exist without the otherYes: a validly enacted law nobody acceptsYes: a leader obeyed with no legal office
Who supplies itThe legal systemThe people subject to it
munotes.in95

The Sources of Authority: How Power Is Legalised

What this topic is NOT

Legalising power is not the same as making it just. The chain tests validity, not content.

The chain is not a formality. It is what a writ petition is made of. Every ground of judicial review is an allegation that one step in the chain is missing.

The Grundnorm is not a rule of Indian law. It is a jurisprudential device for explaining why the chain has an end. Hart's rule of recognition is a different device for the same problem.

Authority does not require legalisation. Traditional and charismatic authority are unlegalised and perfectly real. Legalisation is what the legal rational type does.

Quick revision

  1. Sources of authority: constitution and law, tradition and custom, consent through election, personal qualities, expertise, office, religion, and force, which is a source of power that must be legalised before it becomes authority.
  2. The chain in India: acceptance expressed in the Preamble; the Constitution confers power on organs (articles 53, 73, 154, 162, 245, 246); law is valid if competent and not void under article 13; the statute confers power on an authority; delegated legislation fills in detail; the individual order is issued. Article 368 governs change, and the basic structure limits even that.
  3. At the bottom of every legal order is an acceptance, not a rule. Kelsen's Grundnorm and Hart's rule of recognition are the two classical accounts.
  4. What legalisation adds: a test of validity, limits, impersonality, predictability, accountability and a public justification.
  5. Legalisation is not legitimation. A validation clause makes acts lawful; only acceptance makes them authoritative.

Test yourself

1. What are the sources of authority? Constitution and law, which dominate in a modern state; tradition and custom; consent expressed through election, which is the democratic source; personal qualities, which is Weber's charisma; expertise, which modern administration relies on; office, which is derivative but is what a citizen actually encounters; and religion. Force must be added honestly: it produces power that is obeyed, and it becomes authority only when it is legalised.

2. Trace how power is legalised in India. The Preamble locates the source in the people, who adopt and give themselves the Constitution. The Constitution then confers executive power by articles 53 and 154 and legislative power by articles 245 and 246 with the Lists. A statute made within that competence and not void under article 13 confers a specific power on a named authority. Delegated legislation made under the enabling section supplies the detail. The individual order follows, and it is valid only if every step above it is valid. Article 368 governs amendment, and the basic structure doctrine limits even that.

munotes.in96

The Sources of Authority: How Power Is Legalised

3. What is the Grundnorm, and how does Hart's account differ? Kelsen's Grundnorm is the presupposed basic norm that confers validity on the first constitution, presupposed rather than enacted because the chain of validity must otherwise have no beginning. Hart's rule of recognition is not a presupposition but a social fact: the rule actually accepted and practised by the officials of a system, which settles what counts as law there. Both make the same political point, that at the foundation of a legal order lies an acceptance rather than a further rule.

4. Distinguish legalisation from legitimation. Legalisation makes an exercise of power traceable to a valid rule, and it is tested by asking whether a rule conferred it and proved by a document or a court's ruling. Legitimation makes power accepted as rightful, and it is tested by asking whether those subject to it believe the holder is entitled, and proved by compliance given without compulsion. Each can exist without the other: a validly enacted law nobody accepts, and a leader obeyed who holds no office at all.

5. Describe how a regime born of force legalises itself, and say what that process cannot achieve. It proclaims that existing laws continue, so that ordinary life and the courts carry on; it obtains judicial acknowledgment that its orders are being given effect; it appoints a body to draft a new constitution; it holds a referendum or election announced as the will of the people; and the new instrument validates everything done since the seizure, so that every later order is traceable to it. What this cannot achieve is acceptance. A validation clause makes acts lawful; it does not make the regime believed in, and that gap is what the topic on legitimacy addresses.

Contents This chapter on its own page

munotes.in97

Chapter Twenty-One

Power and Authority Compared

Syllabus topic 1.3, "Comparative Study - Power and Authority (Specified)"

In one line

Power is the ability to make somebody comply; authority is the right to require it. The dacoit and the tax officer both take your money, and only one of them can expect you to think they were entitled to.

In the wording a student can write in an exam: power is the capacity to affect the behaviour of others in a way they would not have chosen, resting on any basis whatever, whereas authority is that species of power which those subject to it accept as rightful, so that obedience is rendered voluntarily by reason of the commander's title rather than by reason of the consequences of refusal.

The relation between them

Before the differences, the relation, because students state it wrongly in two opposite ways.

Authority is a species of power, not its opposite. Every authority is power: the subject's behaviour is being affected. What distinguishes authority is the ground on which the subject complies.

But power is not a lesser form of authority. Power without authority is complete in itself. It works. It is simply expensive, unstable and resented.

The correct picture is two overlapping circles. There is power without authority, which is coercion. There is authority without much raw power, as with a court that commands nothing but a bailiff. And there is the overlap, where most stable government lives.

The differences

1. The ground of compliance

Power: the subject complies because of what will happen otherwise. Authority: the subject complies because of who gave the order.

This is the master difference and every other difference follows from it. It also gives the test to apply to any case: ask why the person complied.

2. Legitimacy

Power may be legitimate or not. It is a fact about capacity. Authority is legitimate by definition. Remove the acceptance and there is no authority left, only power.

3. The source

Power comes from resources: wealth, weapons, numbers, information, organisation, position. Authority comes from the belief of those subject to it, however that belief was produced, whether by custom, by charisma or by rule.

4. Direction

Power is exercised downward, from the one who has the resources. Authority is exercised downward and conferred upward. The judge commands the litigant; the litigant's acceptance is what makes it a command.

5. Scope

Power extends as far as the resource reaches. Authority has defined boundaries: over whom, over what, and for how long. A command outside them is not authority at all.

6. Cost

Power is expensive. Each subject must be separately compelled, and compulsion generates resentment that raises the cost of the next application. Authority is cheap. Compliance is general and voluntary, and the sanction stays in the background.

munotes.in98

Power and Authority Compared

7. Stability and duration

Power lasts as long as the resource does. Authority attaches to an office and survives its holder, so long as the belief holds.

8. Personal or impersonal

Power is usually personal to whoever holds the resources. Authority, in its legal rational form, is impersonal: it belongs to the office.

9. What happens when it is challenged

Power must escalate or lose. Authority faces a legitimacy crisis, and its usual response is to reassert its title rather than its strength: to hold an election, to obtain a court's ruling, to point to the rule.

10. Whether it can be transferred

Power can be transferred only by transferring the resource. Authority can be delegated, within limits, and passes automatically to a successor in the office.

The table

PowerAuthority
DefinitionCapacity to affect another's behaviour in a way they would not have chosenPower accepted as rightful; the right to command
Ground of complianceWhat will happen otherwiseWho gave the order
LegitimacyMay or may not be legitimateLegitimate by definition
SourceResources: wealth, force, numbers, information, positionThe belief of those subject to it
DirectionExercised downwardExercised downward, conferred upward
ScopeAs far as the resource reachesDefined: over whom, over what, for how long
CostHigh; compulsion is applied case by caseLow; compliance is general and voluntary
DurationWhile the resource lastsWhile the belief lasts; survives the holder
Personal or impersonalUsually personalImpersonal in its legal rational form
If challengedEscalate or loseLegitimacy crisis; reassert the title
TransferOnly with the resourceDelegable; passes to the successor in office
Standard exampleA dacoit taking your moneyA tax officer collecting it
Weber's wordMachtHerrschaft

A worked example

Two men take ten thousand rupees from the same shopkeeper on the same day.

The first shows a weapon. The shopkeeper hands over the money because he is afraid. Ask him afterwards whether the man was entitled to the money and he says no. Ask him whether he would pay again if the man were unarmed and he says no. That is power.

The second hands over a notice under a taxing statute. The shopkeeper pays, and complains bitterly about the rate all the way home. Ask him whether the officer was entitled to the money and he says yes, unfortunately. Ask him whether he would pay if the officer had no power to prosecute him and he says, probably, yes, most people do. That is authority.

Notice three things about the comparison.

The outcome is identical. Ten thousand rupees left the shop in both cases. If you measured only outcomes you could not tell the two apart, which is why the concept of authority is needed at all.

munotes.in99

Power and Authority Compared

The shopkeeper's disagreement is irrelevant to the second case. He thinks the rate is too high and pays anyway. Authority produces compliance without agreement, which is exactly what makes government possible.

The costs differ enormously. The first man must be present, armed, and prepared to use the weapon, once per shop. The second sends a piece of paper to a lakh of shops and most of them pay. A state can be run the second way and cannot be run the first.

What this comparison is NOT

It is not a contrast between bad and good. Power is not wicked, and authority is not automatically benign. An authority accepted as rightful can command atrocities, and it commands them more efficiently than any coercion could, precisely because it is accepted. This is the uncomfortable observation that Module II's chapters on unjust laws are built on.

Authority is not power plus law. A legally conferred power that nobody accepts is not authority: it is power with a certificate. And an authority may exist with no legal basis at all, as traditional and charismatic authority do.

The distinction is not always sharp in practice. Most real relationships contain both, and the interesting question is usually the proportion. A tax system rests mostly on authority with a fringe of coercion; an occupation rests mostly on coercion with a fringe of authority.

The distinction is not merely academic. Whether an order is authority or power decides whether disobeying it is a crime, a wrong, or an act of resistance, and that is the whole of Module II.

Quick revision

  1. Authority is a species of power, distinguished by the ground of compliance.
  2. The master difference: power is obeyed for what will follow, authority for who commanded.
  3. Source: resources against belief. Direction: downward against downward but conferred upward.
  4. Scope: as far as the resource reaches, against defined limits.
  5. Cost: high and case by case, against low and general.
  6. On challenge: escalate or lose, against a legitimacy crisis met by reasserting title.
  7. Weber's terms: Macht and Herrschaft.
  8. The example: the dacoit and the tax officer. Identical outcome, different relationship, hugely different cost.
  9. Not a contrast between bad and good. Accepted authority can command worse things than coercion can, because it is accepted.

Test yourself

1. Distinguish power from authority. Power is the capacity to affect the behaviour of others in a way they would not have chosen, resting on any basis whatever, and the subject complies because of what will happen otherwise. Authority is the species of power that those subject to it accept as rightful, and the subject complies because of who gave the order. Power comes from resources and lasts while they last; authority comes from belief, has defined limits, attaches to an office and survives its holder.

munotes.in100

Power and Authority Compared

2. "Authority is a species of power." Explain. Because in every exercise of authority a subject's behaviour is being affected in a way they would not otherwise have chosen, which satisfies the definition of power. Authority is marked off within that genus by the ground of compliance: the subject obeys because the commander is accepted as entitled, and not because of the consequences of refusal. It follows that power and authority are not opposites, and that describing something as power says nothing about whether it is also authority.

3. Why is authority cheaper than power, and why does that matter to a state? Because compliance is general and voluntary, so the sanction is rarely applied, while power has to be brought to bear on each subject separately at a cost in money, manpower and resentment that rises with each use. It matters because no state can compel a population the size of India's. A tax notice sent to a lakh of shops is paid by most of them; a demand backed by nothing but force would require a collector standing in every shop, which is why every regime, however coercive, tries to convert its power into authority.

4. Give the standard example and explain what it shows. A dacoit and a tax officer each take ten thousand rupees from the same shopkeeper. The outcome is identical, which is why outcomes alone cannot distinguish the two. The shopkeeper regards only the second as entitled, which locates the difference in the relationship rather than in the transfer. And the second could be repeated across a lakh of shops by post, while the first requires the man to be present and armed each time, which shows why states are built on authority.

5. Is authority always preferable to power? Give reasons. Not in any moral sense. Weber's category is value neutral, and an authority accepted as rightful can command grave wrongs and will command them more efficiently than coercion could, precisely because those who obey believe they ought to. What authority is preferable in is cost, stability and predictability. Whether it should be obeyed in a given case is a different question altogether, and it is the question Module II asks under the heading of obedience to unjust laws.

Contents This chapter on its own page

munotes.in101

Chapter Twenty-Two

Legitimacy: The Concept

Syllabus topic 1.4, "Legitimacy - Concept and Relevance of Legitimacy in the Exercise of Political Power"

In one line

Legitimacy is the quality that makes people believe a ruler, a rule or an institution is entitled to be obeyed; it is what turns power into authority.

In the wording a student can write in an exam: legitimacy is the quality of rightfulness attributed to a political order, an institution, a rule or a command by those subject to it, in virtue of which they accept a duty to comply that is independent of the consequences of non-compliance; it is the ground on which authority rests and the resource by which power is converted into authority.

The word

Legitimacy comes from the Latin legitimus, lawful, from lex, law. The etymology is a trap, because in political science legitimacy means considerably more than lawfulness. A law may be perfectly valid and thoroughly illegitimate. What the word now names is rightfulness accepted, and the legal sense is only one of the grounds on which the acceptance may rest.

The two senses, and why the difference matters

This is the single distinction to get right, because a question on legitimacy is often really a question about which sense is being used.

The descriptive or sociological sense, associated with Weber. Legitimacy is a belief. A regime is legitimate if those subject to it believe it is entitled to rule. The question is empirical: do they believe it? The answer says nothing at all about whether they ought to.

The normative sense, associated with political philosophy. Legitimacy is a justification. A regime is legitimate if it actually satisfies the standards that entitle a government to be obeyed, whether or not anybody believes it does. The question is moral: is the belief warranted?

Why the two must be kept apart. On the descriptive test, a regime that has persuaded a population to believe in it is legitimate however it treats them, and a just government that nobody trusts is illegitimate. Most students find that intolerable, and the reason they find it intolerable is that they are using the normative sense. Weber's answer is that he is describing a fact about societies and not endorsing it, and that a sociologist who defined legitimacy by justice would be unable to study the regimes that were plainly obeyed and plainly unjust.

The mature position, and the one to write, is that both senses are needed and they ask different questions. The descriptive sense explains why a regime is stable; the normative sense tells you whether it deserves to be.

Beetham's three conditions

David Beetham's account is the most useful single framework for an answer, because it repairs the weakness of the purely descriptive approach without collapsing into pure philosophy. Power is legitimate, he argues, when three conditions are satisfied.

munotes.in102

Legitimacy: The Concept

1. It conforms to established rules. The power was acquired and is exercised in accordance with the rules of the society, whether those rules are legal, customary or conventional. This is legal validity, and it is necessary but not sufficient.

2. The rules are justifiable by reference to beliefs shared by both the dominant and the subordinate. It is not enough that a rule exists; the rule must be defensible in terms the ruled themselves accept. A rule of succession justified by a divine right that nobody now believes in fails at this level even if it is perfectly valid.

3. There is evidence of consent by the subordinate. Some positive act of recognition: voting, taking an oath, participating, publicly acknowledging.

Beetham's real contribution is what he says about failure. Each condition has its own kind of breakdown, and they are not the same thing. Breach of the rules is illegitimacy. A loss of shared belief is a legitimacy deficit. Withdrawal of consent is delegitimation. A regime may be in one of these and not the others, and the remedy for each differs.

Where legitimacy comes from

Legality, that is, acquisition and exercise according to rule.

Tradition, that is, the belief that the arrangement has always been so.

Charisma, that is, belief in an extraordinary person.

Those three are Weber's, and they are the classic answer. Modern states add three more, and an answer that names them is fuller.

Consent, expressed through elections. The dominant source in the modern world. The rulers are entitled because the ruled chose them.

Performance. The claim that a regime is entitled because it delivers: security, growth, order, welfare. This is sometimes called output legitimacy, in contrast with input legitimacy which rests on how decisions were made. It is powerful and it is fragile, because a regime that rests on performance falls when performance falls.

Ideology. A shared account of the world in which the regime's rule is the right one, whether religious, nationalist or revolutionary.

The connections a good answer draws

Legitimacy and authority. Legitimacy is the ground; authority is the relation it supports. Where legitimacy is present, power is exercised as authority; where it is absent, only coercion remains.

Legitimacy and legality. Legality is one source of legitimacy, and only one. A statute passed by a competent legislature is legal; whether it is legitimate depends on whether the people subject to it accept the legislature's title to make it and the rule's claim on them.

Legitimacy and obligation. If a regime is legitimate in the normative sense, an obligation to obey follows. If it is legitimate only in the descriptive sense, people behave as though an obligation followed, which is a different fact. Module II is entirely about the gap between the two.

munotes.in103

Legitimacy: The Concept

Legitimacy and consent. Consent is evidence of legitimacy and is not identical with it. People consent to things for many reasons, including fear and ignorance, and a regime can be legitimate in the eyes of a population that has never been asked.

A worked example

Three governments take office in three neighbouring states in the same year.

The first wins a general election conducted by an independent commission, and takes office under the constitution. Its legitimacy is at its strongest: it satisfies Beetham's first condition by rule, the second because the population accepts elections as the right way to choose a government, and the third because millions voted.

The second takes power when the army removes the elected government. It has power. Beetham's first condition fails outright, so it is illegitimate in the strict sense, and everything it does afterwards is an attempt to repair the failure: a promise of elections, a referendum, a new constitution, a court ruling.

The third was elected fairly, but four years later has stopped holding local elections, has taken control of the broadcast media, and has arranged that the electoral commission's members are its own nominees. Notice that this is the hardest case and the most common. Condition one is arguably satisfied, because each step was done by a law validly passed. Condition two is failing, because the population's shared belief is in elections that are real. And condition three is being hollowed out. This is Beetham's legitimacy deficit rather than illegitimacy, and it is why "ethical decay of democracy" is a topic in Module IV.

Distinctions that carry marks

LegalityLegitimacy
Question askedWas it done according to the rules?Is it accepted as rightful?
Decided byCourts, applying the rulesThe people subject to it
EvidenceThe instrument, the record, the judgmentCompliance without compulsion; participation
Can exist without the otherYes: a validly passed law nobody acceptsYes: a leader obeyed with no legal office
Failure looks likeAn order set aside as voidNon-compliance, protest, withdrawal
Descriptive legitimacyNormative legitimacy
Legitimate meansBelieved to be entitledActually entitled
QuestionDo people accept it?Ought they to?
MethodObservationArgument
Associated withWeberPolitical philosophy
Uncomfortable resultAn unjust regime may be legitimateA stable regime may be illegitimate

What legitimacy is NOT

It is not legality. The words share a root and not a meaning.

It is not popularity. A government can be unpopular and legitimate, and that combination is normal: most governments are disliked for most of their terms and are still accepted as entitled to govern.

munotes.in104

Legitimacy: The Concept

It is not the same as consent. Consent is evidence of it.

It is not permanent. It is continuously earned and can be lost quickly.

It is not all or nothing. A regime may be legitimate to some groups and not others, and in some functions and not others, which is the ordinary condition of a large state.

Quick revision

  1. Legitimacy is accepted rightfulness: the ground on which authority rests, and what converts power into authority.
  2. Two senses: descriptive (Weber), a belief, tested by asking whether people accept it; normative, a justification, tested by asking whether they ought to.
  3. Beetham's three conditions: conformity to established rules; justifiability by shared beliefs; evidence of consent.
  4. Three failures, and they differ: breach of rules is illegitimacy, loss of shared belief is a legitimacy deficit, withdrawal of consent is delegitimation.
  5. Sources: legality, tradition, charisma, consent through elections, performance, ideology.
  6. Input legitimacy rests on how a decision was made; output legitimacy rests on what it delivers. The second is powerful and fragile.
  7. Not legality, not popularity, not consent, not permanent, not all or nothing.

Test yourself

1. Define legitimacy and distinguish it from legality. Legitimacy is the quality of rightfulness attributed to a political order by those subject to it, in virtue of which they accept a duty to comply independent of the consequences of refusal. Legality asks only whether something was done according to the rules and is settled by a court; legitimacy asks whether the arrangement is accepted as rightful and is settled by those subject to it. A validly enacted law that nobody accepts is legal and illegitimate; a leader obeyed without any office is legitimate and has no legality at all.

2. Explain the descriptive and normative senses of legitimacy. In the descriptive or sociological sense, associated with Weber, legitimacy is a belief: a regime is legitimate if those subject to it believe it is entitled to rule, and the question is empirical. In the normative sense, associated with political philosophy, legitimacy is a justification: a regime is legitimate if it in fact satisfies the standards that entitle a government to obedience, whether or not anybody believes it does, and the question is moral. Both are needed, because the first explains stability and the second tells you whether stability is deserved.

3. State Beetham's three conditions and the three ways they fail. Power is legitimate when it conforms to established rules, when those rules are justifiable by reference to beliefs shared by both rulers and ruled, and when there is evidence of consent by the subordinate. Breach of the rules is illegitimacy; loss of the shared beliefs that justify the rules is a legitimacy deficit; and withdrawal of the expressed consent is delegitimation. The distinction matters because the remedy for each is different.

munotes.in105

Legitimacy: The Concept

4. What are input and output legitimacy? Input legitimacy rests on how decisions are made, so a government is entitled because it was chosen by proper procedures and decides by them. Output legitimacy rests on what is delivered, so a government is entitled because it produces security, order, growth or welfare. Output legitimacy is powerful, since people forgive a great deal to a government that works, and fragile, since a regime resting on performance has nothing left when performance fails.

5. "An unjust regime can be legitimate." Is this a defect in the concept? On the descriptive sense it is not a defect but the point: Weber is recording what societies actually believe, and a sociology that defined legitimacy by justice could not study the many regimes that were plainly obeyed and plainly unjust. On the normative sense the statement is false, since a regime that fails the standards entitling it to obedience is not legitimate however widely it is believed in. The two senses answer different questions, and the error is to use one sense to refute the other.

Contents This chapter on its own page

munotes.in106

Chapter Twenty-Three

The Relevance of Legitimacy in the Exercise of Political Power

Syllabus topic 1.4, "Legitimacy - Concept and Relevance of Legitimacy in the Exercise of Political Power"

In one line

Legitimacy is what makes power cheap, durable and effective, so a government that has it can do things no amount of force could achieve, and a government losing it cannot govern however much force it has.

In the wording a student can write in an exam: legitimacy is relevant to the exercise of political power because it converts power into authority and so secures voluntary compliance; because it reduces the cost of governing to a level at which a modern state is possible at all; because it enables a government to impose burdens and survive unpopular decisions; because it makes the peaceful transfer of power possible; and because its loss produces a crisis that no exercise of power can resolve.

The seven things legitimacy does

1. It converts power into authority

A regime with legitimacy is obeyed because it is thought entitled. A regime without it is obeyed only when somebody is watching. This is the master function and the rest follow from it.

2. It makes government affordable

Consider the arithmetic. India has a population of well over a hundred crore and a few tens of lakhs of police and armed forces. If even five per cent of the population had to be individually compelled to comply with the ordinary law, the machinery would be overwhelmed within a week. Government at scale is possible only because almost everybody complies almost all the time, without anybody being sent to make them.

3. It lets a government impose burdens

Any government must sometimes do things people dislike: raise taxes, acquire land, restrict movement in an epidemic, conscript, ration. A legitimate government can do these and survive; an illegitimate one cannot attempt them.

4. It allows unpopular decisions to be accepted

A legitimate authority is obeyed by people who disagree with the particular decision. That gap between compliance and agreement is what makes a plural society governable, because in any large society some substantial group disagrees with every decision.

5. It makes the transfer of power peaceful

This is the achievement people notice least and would miss most. A defeated government hands over office to its opponents, and the machinery of the state, which was entirely under its control the day before, transfers with it. Nothing compels this. It happens because the office is accepted as belonging to whoever the process selects.

6. It stabilises the system across crises

Legitimacy is held by the constitutional order, not only by the government of the day. A war lost, a currency collapsed or a scandal exposed brings down governments in a legitimate system and brings down the system itself in an illegitimate one.

munotes.in107

The Relevance of Legitimacy in the Exercise of Political Power

7. It supplies the ground of political obligation

If a regime is legitimate, its commands generate a duty to obey. If it is not, the citizen's position changes completely, and the whole of Module II follows from that change.

What its absence looks like

Rising cost of enforcement. More police, more prosecutions, more force, for the same level of compliance.

Evasion rather than defiance. People do not resist, they avoid: taxes go unpaid, rules are ignored where nobody is watching, the informal sector grows.

Withdrawal. Turnout falls, offices go unfilled, institutions stop being used.

Reliance on other legitimating claims. A government losing its electoral legitimacy will reach for performance, for tradition, for a national emergency or for an external enemy.

Then a legitimacy crisis, in which the population no longer accepts the arrangement as rightful. Jurgen Habermas's term for the modern form of this is a legitimation crisis: a state which has taken responsibility for economic outcomes and welfare comes to be judged on them, and when it cannot deliver, the deficit is transferred from the economy to the political order itself.

The Indian case in which the two came apart

Facts. Indira Nehru Gandhi v. Raj Narain, 1975 Supp SCC 1, began as an election petition. The Allahabad High Court set aside the Prime Minister's election from Rae Bareli on the ground of corrupt practices. While the appeal was pending in the Supreme Court, Parliament enacted the Constitution (Thirty-ninth Amendment) Act 1975, inserting article 329A. Clause (1) provided that the election of a person holding the office of Prime Minister could not be called in question except before an authority Parliament might set up. Clause (4) declared that such an election, if a court had already declared it void, should continue to be valid in all respects, and that the court's order and the findings on which it rested should be deemed always to have been void. Clauses (5) and (6) carried the scheme into pending appeals and gave the article overriding effect.

Held. The Supreme Court struck down clause (4) of article 329A in its entirety. Democracy is a basic feature of the Constitution and free and fair elections are part of that democratic structure, so a provision that simply declared valid an election which a court had found invalid for corrupt practices damaged an essential feature and was beyond the amending power. The Court held further that the constituent power is legislative in nature and cannot exercise judicial power: validating one particular election by fiat, without laying down any law by reference to which validity could be judged, was the exercise of a judicial function by an amending body. It found the clause inseverable, so no part of it survived. The election itself was then upheld on the merits by applying the Representation of the People Act as amended.

munotes.in108

The Relevance of Legitimacy in the Exercise of Political Power

Why it matters here. Everything the government did was done with the votes it had, in the form the Constitution provides for amendment. It was, in that sense, an exercise of legal power. What it lacked was legitimacy: a provision that declares its own leader's election valid by deeming a court's finding never to have existed cannot be justified in terms that the people who are supposed to elect governments share, which is Beetham's second condition failing while his first appears to be satisfied. The case shows three things a student should take from it. Legality and legitimacy can be separated, and a government under pressure will separate them. A legitimacy crisis in a constitutional state is fought in institutions, here in a court. And the resolution was itself a claim to legitimacy: the Court did not assert power, it asserted that some things are beyond the reach of any majority.

A worked example

Two governments each impose a sudden restriction on movement during an epidemic.

The first has been elected recently, publishes the medical advice it acted on, has its measure debated in the legislature, allows it to be challenged in court, and sets a date on which it expires. Compliance is high, complaints are loud, and almost nobody has to be prosecuted. The cost of the measure to the state is the cost of announcing it.

The second issues the same restriction by an order nobody may see, without a legislature sitting, with the courts not functioning, and with no end date. Compliance is high in the first fortnight, because people are frightened, and then falls. Enforcement moves from persuasion to fines to force. Within a month the government is spending more on enforcing the restriction than on the epidemic.

The measure was identical. Everything that differed was legitimacy, and legitimacy turned out to be the whole of the difference between a rule that worked and a rule that had to be imposed.

Distinctions that carry marks

A regime with legitimacyA regime without it
ComplianceGeneral and voluntaryOnly where enforcement reaches
Cost of governingLowRises continuously
Unpopular decisionsPossible, and survivableAttempted only under compulsion
Transfer of powerPeaceful, by the processContested, and usually violent
Response to crisisThe government falls, the system standsThe system is at risk
Typical failureLoss of an electionEvasion, withdrawal, then collapse
What it reaches for when weakeningRenewal of consentPerformance claims, tradition, an emergency, an enemy

What this topic is NOT

Legitimacy is not a substitute for power. A legitimate government still needs police, courts and revenue. What legitimacy does is reduce how often they must be used.

munotes.in109

The Relevance of Legitimacy in the Exercise of Political Power

It is not the same as being liked. Governments are routinely unpopular and legitimate at the same time.

It is not conferred once. It is renewed continuously, by elections, by the courts, by the ordinary experience of citizens dealing with the administration.

Its loss is not always visible. It shows first in evasion and withdrawal, which look like apathy, long before it shows in protest.

Quick revision

  1. Legitimacy converts power into authority, which is the master function.
  2. It makes government affordable: no state can compel a population its own size.
  3. It lets a government impose burdens and survive unpopular decisions, because compliance is detached from agreement.
  4. It makes the transfer of power peaceful, which is the achievement least noticed and most missed.
  5. It stabilises the system: a legitimate order loses governments, an illegitimate one loses itself.
  6. It supplies the ground of political obligation, which is the bridge into Module II.
  7. Loss shows as rising enforcement cost, evasion, withdrawal, and a reach for other legitimating claims; then a legitimation crisis, Habermas's term for the modern form.
  8. Indira Nehru Gandhi v. Raj Narain, 1975 Supp SCC 1: clause (4) of article 329A struck down; free and fair elections part of the democratic basic structure; the constituent power cannot exercise judicial power.

Test yourself

1. Why is legitimacy relevant to the exercise of political power? Because it converts power into authority and so secures compliance that is voluntary and general. That makes governing affordable at a scale no coercive apparatus could reach, allows a government to impose necessary burdens and to survive decisions large groups dislike, makes the transfer of office peaceful, keeps the constitutional order standing when a particular government falls, and supplies the ground on which citizens owe any obligation to obey at all.

2. "Legitimacy makes government affordable." Explain with reference to India. India's population exceeds a hundred crore and its police and armed forces number a few tens of lakhs. If even a small fraction of the population had to be individually compelled to obey the ordinary law, the enforcement machinery would be overwhelmed within days. Government on this scale is possible only because almost everyone complies almost always without anyone being sent to make them, and that voluntary compliance is exactly what legitimacy produces.

3. What are the symptoms of a loss of legitimacy? The cost of enforcement rises for the same level of compliance. Evasion rather than open defiance spreads: taxes go unpaid and rules are ignored wherever nobody is watching. Participation withdraws, so turnout falls and institutions stop being used. And the government reaches for substitute claims, resting on performance, on tradition, on an emergency or on an external enemy. Only later does this appear as open protest.

munotes.in110

The Relevance of Legitimacy in the Exercise of Political Power

4. State the facts and holding of Indira Nehru Gandhi v. Raj Narain, and say why the case belongs in this topic. The Allahabad High Court set aside the Prime Minister's election for corrupt practices. Pending appeal, Parliament inserted article 329A, clause (4) of which declared such an election to continue valid and deemed the court's order and findings always to have been void. The Supreme Court struck clause (4) down in its entirety: democracy is a basic feature, free and fair elections are part of it, and the constituent power, being legislative, cannot exercise judicial power by validating one election without laying down any law. It belongs here because legality and legitimacy were visibly pulled apart: the amendment had the votes and the form, and lacked any justification in terms the electorate shared.

5. What is a legitimation crisis? Habermas's term for the modern form of a legitimacy crisis. A state that has taken responsibility for economic outcomes and for welfare comes to be judged on them, so an economic failure it cannot resolve is transferred upward and becomes a failure of the political order itself. The distinguishing feature is that the deficit begins outside politics and ends by attacking the acceptance on which the political order rests, which is why no exercise of power can resolve it.

Contents This chapter on its own page

munotes.in111

Module II

Political Obligation - State Authority and Citizen

munotes.in

Chapter Twenty-Four

What Political Obligation Is

Syllabus topic 2.1, "Concept of Political Obligation"

In one line

Political obligation is the duty to obey the state, and the question is not whether the state can make you obey but whether you ought to.

In the wording a student can write in an exam: political obligation is the moral duty of a citizen to obey the laws and commands of the state to which they belong, and the problem of political obligation is the question whether such a duty exists at all, on what ground it rests, to whom it is owed, how far it extends, and what may be done when it conflicts with the citizen's other duties.

Why the question is worth asking

A student's first reaction is that the question answers itself: you obey because it is the law and because there are consequences if you do not. Neither answer touches the problem.

"There are consequences" is not an obligation. A robber who points a gun at you creates consequences, and nobody says you have a duty to hand over your money. If the state's claim on you were nothing more than the ability to punish, then the state would be a very large robber, and the words "ought" and "duty" would have no work to do. This is exactly why Module I spent so long separating power from authority: the distinction was made in order to make this question possible.

"Because it is the law" is circular. Asking why you should obey the law is not answered by saying that the law says you must. The question is precisely why that saying binds you.

So the problem stands, and it is a real one. A law student will meet it in the first week of jurisprudence and will meet it again every time a client asks whether a rule must be complied with while a challenge to it is pending.

Three duties that are not the same

This is where marks are lost, so it is worth being slow.

Legal duty. What the law requires, enforceable by the courts. Whether you have a legal duty is settled by reading the statute.

Moral duty. What you ought to do, all things considered. Whether you have a moral duty is settled by argument, not by a statute.

Political obligation. The moral duty to comply with legal duties because they are imposed by the state you belong to. It sits across the other two, and that is its whole difficulty.

Take a rule requiring helmets. The legal duty comes from the statute. There may be an independent moral duty not to endanger yourself and your dependants, which would exist whether or not any statute said so. Political obligation is neither of those. It is the further claim that even if you thought the rule pointless you ought to comply, because your state enacted it.

Contents This chapter on its own page

munotes.in112

The rest of this chapter

Module one is free. The rest of this chapter comes with the B.L.S. LL.B. 5 Years Semester 3 notes.

You are reading a chapter from a later module. Everything in module one of every subject stays free, and so does every question paper and the syllabus.

Notes + Solved papers: ₹798 Already bought it? Sign in

Or notes only: ₹499

Free either way: question papers, the syllabus, and module one of every subject.

Chapter Twenty-Five

The Command and Obedience Relationship

Syllabus topic 2.1.1, "Command and Obedience Relationship"

In one line

The oldest account of law says that a law is a command issued by a sovereign to a subject, backed by a threat, and that obedience is what a subject owes; the most influential criticism of that account is that it describes a gunman and not a legal system.

In the wording a student can write in an exam: the command and obedience relationship is the model of political authority in which the state, as sovereign, issues general commands to its subjects and the subjects are under a duty of habitual obedience enforced by sanctions; it was stated systematically by John Austin, and H. L. A. Hart's criticism of it is the standard starting point of modern jurisprudence.

The relationship, stated plainly

At its simplest the political relationship has two ends. At one end somebody issues a direction. At the other somebody complies. Everything in this module is about what joins the two.

Three elements make it a command relationship rather than a request or a suggestion.

A superior and an inferior. The relationship is asymmetrical: one party is in a position to require, the other to comply.

An expression of a wish, addressed to the other, that they do or not do something.

A sanction, that is, the power and the intention to inflict some evil if the wish is not complied with.

Austin's own formulation binds the three together: wherever a wish is expressed by a party who will visit an evil on you if you do not comply, the expression is a command, and you lie under a duty to obey it. Duty, command and sanction are, on this view, three names for one relationship looked at from three sides.

John Austin's command theory

Austin's account, from the early nineteenth century, is the classical statement and every later theory is a reaction to it.

Law is the command of the sovereign. A law properly so called is a general command issued by a sovereign to those subject to that sovereign.

Who is the sovereign? The person or body that receives habitual obedience from the bulk of a society and is not itself in the habit of obeying anybody else. Both halves matter: habitual obedience from below, and independence from above.

Sanction. Every law carries the threat of an evil for disobedience. Without a sanction, on this account, there is no duty and therefore no law.

Sovereignty is illimitable and indivisible. The sovereign cannot be legally limited, because a limit would require a superior to impose it, and then that superior would be the sovereign.

Consequences Austin accepted. Constitutional law, on his account, is not law properly so called but positive morality, because it purports to bind the sovereign. International law is not law either, for the same reason. And a bad law is still a law, which is Austin's famous separation of law from morals: the existence of a law is one thing, its merit or demerit another.

Contents This chapter on its own page

munotes.in117

The rest of this chapter comes with the notes. See the prices

Chapter Twenty-Six

Why People Obey Laws: The Grounds of Political Obligation

Syllabus topic 2.1.2, "Grounds of Political Obligations-Why do people obey laws?"

In one line

People obey the law for reasons that are mostly not moral at all, and the grounds that would justify obedience are a different list from the causes that produce it.

In the wording a student can write in an exam: the causes of obedience are fear of sanction, habit, self-interest, ignorance of alternatives and social pressure, none of which creates a duty; the grounds of political obligation, which purport to justify obedience, are consent, gratitude, fair play, the natural duty of justice, associative membership and the common good, each of which is a distinct theory and each of which has a distinct weakness.

Why the two lists must be kept apart

A regime that is universally obeyed may have no claim on anybody, and a regime with an excellent claim may be widely disobeyed. If the reasons people actually obey were the same as the reasons they ought to, then the most feared government would be the most legitimate one, which nobody believes.

So: causes explain, and grounds justify. Answer both, label both, and never offer one as the other.

Why people DO obey: the causes

Fear of the sanction. The most obvious and the least important. Most people go their whole lives without calculating the penalty for most offences, and the penalty for the great majority of rules is never applied to anybody they know.

Habit and socialisation. People obey because they have always obeyed, because their parents did, and because obeying is what one does. Austin built his sovereign on exactly this, calling it habitual obedience.

Self-interest. Compliance often pays. Registering a document, paying a tax on time, obtaining a licence: each buys something the person wants.

Convenience and coordination. For a large class of rules the content does not matter and the coordination does. Driving on the left, standard weights, the side of the platform a train arrives at. Once a rule exists it is in nobody's interest to deviate.

Social pressure. The opinion of neighbours, colleagues and family enforces more rules than any inspectorate.

Ignorance of any alternative. A great deal of obedience is the absence of the thought that things could be otherwise. This is the third face of power in Module I, seen from below.

Belief in legitimacy. Some people obey because they think the state is entitled to be obeyed, which is where the causes and the grounds finally touch.

Studies of compliance repeatedly find that the belief that authorities are entitled and act fairly predicts obedience better than the perceived probability of punishment. That finding, which is what Module I meant by saying authority is cheap and power expensive, is worth a line in an answer.

Contents This chapter on its own page

munotes.in122

The rest of this chapter comes with the notes. See the prices

Chapter Twenty-Seven

D. D. Raphael on Political Obligation

Syllabus topic 2.1.3, "D.D. Raphael's views on Political Obligation."

In one line

Raphael's contribution to this subject is not a new theory of why we must obey; it is a way of putting the question that separates two things students run together, the problem of political obligation and the problem of political authority.

In the wording a student can write in an exam: D. D. Raphael treats political obligation as one of the central problems of political philosophy, distinguishing the question of the citizen's duty to obey from the question of the state's right to command, and examining the classical grounds of that duty, consent, general will, gratitude, utility and the common good, and finding each of them insufficient to justify obedience without qualification, so that obedience to law is a strong but defeasible duty rather than an absolute one.

Why MU names him, and how to write about him

Raphael, who taught philosophy at Glasgow and later at Imperial College London, wrote Problems of Political Philosophy, first published in 1970 and revised in 1990. It is one of the standard short introductions used in Indian syllabuses, and MU has followed his arrangement of the subject: the chapter you are reading exists because his book has a chapter on political obligation that sets the problem out in the way this module then works through it.

An examiner asking about "Raphael's views on political obligation" is testing whether you can do three things.

State the problem precisely, in the way a philosopher would rather than in the way a newspaper would.

Separate obligation from authority, which is the distinction his treatment turns on.

Run the classical grounds against the problem and say why each is insufficient by itself.

Those three are what the rest of this chapter gives you, and every one of them is taught in this book from sources that were read.

The distinction the topic turns on

The problem of political obligation is about the citizen. Why should I obey?

The problem of political authority, sometimes called political power or the right to rule, is about the state. What entitles it to command me and to enforce its commands?

These look like the same question from two ends, and they are not. They can come apart in both directions.

Authority without obligation. A state may be entitled to make and enforce law and yet no citizen have a duty to obey it. That is exactly the position of the philosophical anarchist described in chapter 240: the state may permissibly govern, and the citizen owes it nothing.

Obligation without authority. A citizen may have a duty to comply with a rule for reasons of fairness or of the common good even where the body issuing it has no title to command at all, as where an unrecognised body's traffic directions prevent accidents.

Contents This chapter on its own page

munotes.in127

The rest of this chapter comes with the notes. See the prices

Chapter Twenty-Eight

The Theories of Political Obligation: A Map

Syllabus topic 2.2, "Theories of Political Obligation"

In one line

Five theories, five answers to one question, and they can be arranged in a single line running from "obey because God said so" to "obey because it has always been so".

In the wording a student can write in an exam: MU sets five theories of political obligation, the divine right theory of kings, the social contract or consent theory, the theory of force, the theory of prescriptive possession, and the Marxist view; the first four are attempts to justify the duty to obey and the fifth denies that any such general duty exists.

The five, in one sentence each

Divine right of kings. The ruler holds power from God, so disobedience to the ruler is disobedience to God. Chapter 290.

Social contract and consent. People agreed, expressly or by implication, to be governed, and are bound by their own agreement. Chapters 300 to 340, which take Hobbes, Locke and Rousseau separately because they contract for different things on different terms.

Force. The state arose from conquest and rests on superior strength; obedience is owed to whoever can compel it. Chapter 350.

Prescriptive possession. The arrangement has stood so long that its origins may no longer be questioned, and long possession itself confers title. Chapter 360.

Marx. The state is an instrument of one class against another, so there is no general duty to obey it at all. Chapter 370.

The line they can be arranged on

Set them out by where the obligation comes from, and the whole module becomes one argument rather than five.

From outside the human world. Divine right. The duty exists because a source above all human beings placed the ruler there.

From the citizen's own act. Social contract and consent. The duty exists because you did something, promised or accepted or took a benefit.

From nothing at all except superior strength. Force. Strictly this is not a theory of obligation but a denial that one is needed, and saying so is worth a mark.

From time. Prescription. The duty exists because the arrangement is old, and its age is what makes questioning it improper.

Nowhere. Marx. There is no general duty; there is a class that rules and a class that is ruled, and calling the relation a duty is part of how it is maintained.

Notice that the middle three answer the four problems from chapter 240 quite differently. Contract explains particularity best, because you contracted with this state. Prescription explains generality best, because age covers the whole arrangement. Force explains none of them, which is its defect. And Marx explains why the question keeps being asked, which is a different kind of contribution.

Contents This chapter on its own page

munotes.in132

The rest of this chapter comes with the notes. See the prices

Chapter Twenty-Nine

The Divine Right Theory of Kings

Syllabus topic 2.2.1, "Divine Right Theory of Kings, Social Contract/ Consent Theory, Theory of Force,"

In one line

The divine right theory says the king holds his crown directly from God, so resisting the king is resisting God, and no subject may judge him.

In the wording a student can write in an exam: the divine right of kings is the doctrine that monarchical authority is derived immediately from God, that the king is accountable to God alone and to no earthly authority, that the crown descends by hereditary and indefeasible right, and that the subject's duty of obedience is therefore absolute and non-resistance is a religious as well as a political obligation.

The four propositions

Every version of the theory contains these four, and an answer that lists them has the doctrine.

1. Monarchy is divinely ordained. Kingship is not a human invention or a convenience but an institution appointed by God.

2. Hereditary and indefeasible right. The crown descends by birth, and no act of the king and no decision of any body can defeat the right of the lawful heir. This is what "indefeasible" means and it is the proposition that did most work politically, because it made the succession unarguable.

3. The king is accountable to God alone. No earthly body, no parliament and no court may judge him. He may be a bad king and answer for it in the next world, and nowhere else.

4. Non-resistance and passive obedience. The subject may not resist by force. The most the theory allows is what its own writers called passive obedience: where the king commands something forbidden by God, the subject may decline to perform it and must then submit to the punishment without resistance.

That fourth proposition is the answer to the University's question about the sanction. The sanction behind the obligation is divine: disobedience is sin, and the penalty is God's, not merely the king's. This is what makes the theory so powerful, because the subject cannot escape by escaping the king's officers.

Where it came from

The theory was not medieval in the form set out above. In the Middle Ages the standard European view gave the Church a role in conferring or confirming royal authority, and the Pope claimed to be able to release subjects from their allegiance. The fully developed divine right theory was an early modern doctrine, forged in exactly that quarrel: it was designed to cut out the Church as an intermediary.

James VI and I stated it for England, arguing in his own writings that kings are God's lieutenants on earth and sit upon God's throne, and that to dispute what a king may do is sedition.

Sir Robert Filmer gave it its systematic form in Patriarcha, published in 1680 after his death. His argument is patriarchal: God gave Adam authority over his family and over the earth; that authority descended to the patriarchs and from them to kings; so royal authority is fatherly authority, and every subject stands to the king as a child to a father. This is why the theory needs no contract and no consent: a child does not consent to a father.

Contents This chapter on its own page

munotes.in136

The rest of this chapter comes with the notes. See the prices

Chapter Thirty-One

Hobbes: The Contract Into Absolute Sovereignty

Syllabus topic 2.2.1, "Social Contract/ Consent Theory"

In one line

Hobbes says life without government is so unbearable that rational people would hand over everything to a sovereign with no limits, and having handed it over they can never take it back.

In the wording a student can write in an exam: Hobbes holds that in the state of nature, where there is no common power to keep men in awe, there is a war of every man against every man in which life is solitary, poor, nasty, brutish and short; that reason therefore dictates a covenant by which every man surrenders his right of governing himself to a sovereign, on condition that every other man does the same; and that since the sovereign is not a party to that covenant, the sovereign's power is absolute, indivisible and irrevocable, and the subject has no right of resistance except where life itself is directly threatened.

The state of nature

Hobbes begins from human nature rather than from history. Men are roughly equal in body and mind, so that even the weakest can kill the strongest by stealth or by combining with others. From equality comes equality of hope; from equality of hope, competition for the same things; and from competition, war.

He identifies three causes of quarrel: competition, for gain; diffidence, meaning distrust, for safety; and glory, for reputation.

The result is the condition he calls warre, and he is careful about the word: war does not consist only in fighting but in the known disposition to it, as foul weather lies not in a shower or two but in an inclination to rain over many days.

What is lost in that condition is the famous passage. There is no place for industry, because the fruit is uncertain; no cultivation of the earth, no navigation, no building, no arts, no letters, no society; and, worst of all, continual fear and danger of violent death. And, in Hobbes's own words, the life of man is "solitary, poore, nasty, brutish, and short."

Is it a historical claim? Hobbes anticipates the objection and answers it in the same passage: a man who doubts the inference from the passions should consider his own conduct, arming himself when he takes a journey and locking his doors at night, and ask what opinion he has of his fellow subjects when he rides armed. The state of nature is a claim about what people are, evidenced by what they do inside a state.

Natural right and natural law

The right of nature, in Hobbes, is the liberty of each to use their own power for the preservation of their own life, and to do anything they judge necessary to it. In that condition every man has a right to everything, including to another's body, which is why the right is worthless: a right everybody has to everything secures nothing to anybody.

Contents This chapter on its own page

munotes.in146

The rest of this chapter comes with the notes. See the prices

Chapter Thirty-Two

Locke: The Contract as a Trust

Syllabus topic 2.2.1, "Social Contract/ Consent Theory"

In one line

Locke says people set up government to fix the three things missing in an otherwise tolerable state of nature, that they hand over only what is needed to fix them, and that a government which breaks that trust may be replaced.

In the wording a student can write in an exam: Locke holds that the state of nature is a state of perfect freedom and equality governed by a law of nature which teaches that no one ought to harm another in life, health, liberty or possessions; that it lacks an established law, an impartial judge and a power to execute judgment, and is therefore inconvenient rather than intolerable; that men therefore consent to form a political society and entrust it with a limited power, held as a trust for their preservation; and that when the trust is broken the power reverts to the people, who may resume it and establish a new government.

The state of nature, and why the difference from Hobbes decides everything

Locke's state of nature is a state of perfect freedom to order one's actions and dispose of one's possessions as one thinks fit, and a state of equality, in which no one has more power or jurisdiction than another.

It is not a state of licence. It is governed by the law of nature, which is reason, and which teaches that being all equal and independent, no one ought to harm another in their life, health, liberty or possessions.

Two features of that condition matter enormously.

Property exists before government. Locke's account is that a person owns their own person and therefore their labour, so that by mixing their labour with what nature has left in common they make it theirs. Property is thus a natural right, not a creation of the state. This is why a Lockean government cannot simply take property: it did not create it, and it was set up to protect it.

Everybody may enforce the law of nature. In the state of nature each person may punish a transgressor. Locke calls this a strange doctrine and defends it: without it the law of nature would be vain.

The three inconveniences

Locke's state of nature is defective, but not in Hobbes's way. There are exactly three defects, and they are worth memorising because the powers of government correspond to them one for one.

1. There is no established, settled, known law, received by common consent as the standard of right and wrong.

2. There is no known and indifferent judge with authority to determine disputes according to that law.

3. There is no power to back and support the sentence and to give it due execution.

Contents This chapter on its own page

munotes.in152

The rest of this chapter comes with the notes. See the prices

Chapter Thirty-Three

Rousseau: The General Will

Syllabus topic 2.2.1, "Social Contract/ Consent Theory"

In one line

Rousseau says you can be governed and still be free, if the law you obey is a law you helped make and which aims at the good of everybody including you.

In the wording a student can write in an exam: Rousseau seeks a form of association which defends the person and goods of each member with the whole common force, and in which each, while uniting himself with all, may still obey himself alone and remain as free as before; his solution is the total alienation of each associate with all his rights to the whole community, so that sovereignty rests permanently in the people acting as a body, and the law they make expresses the general will, which aims always at the common interest.

The problem he sets himself

Rousseau's book opens with the sentence everybody quotes and few can place: "Man is born free; and everywhere he is in chains." Read the next lines, because they contain the actual project. He says one who thinks himself the master of others remains a greater slave than they; that he does not know how the change came about; but that he thinks he can answer the question what can make it legitimate.

That is the whole book in one sentence. Rousseau is not asking how the state arose. He is asking what would make it rightful.

He rejects two answers immediately.

Force cannot make right. If force alone justified obedience, then the moment a people could shake off the yoke and did so, it would do still better, since it would be regaining its liberty by the same right by which it was taken. An obligation that disappears when the strength behind it disappears was never an obligation.

Nobody can contract into slavery. To renounce liberty is to renounce being a man, and an agreement which gives everything on one side and nothing on the other is void for want of any equivalent.

The contract

Rousseau states the terms of the compact himself, and this is the passage to quote: "Each of us puts his person and all his power in common under the supreme direction of the general will, and, in our corporate capacity, we receive each member as an indivisible part of the whole."

Three features of that formula do all the work.

The alienation is total. Everybody gives everything. This sounds worse than Hobbes and is not, for the reason in the next point.

Everybody gives to everybody, so nobody gives to anybody. Rousseau's own argument is that in giving himself to all, each man gives himself to nobody, and since there is no associate over whom he does not acquire the same right as he yields others over himself, he gains an equivalent for everything he loses, with more force to preserve what he has.

Contents This chapter on its own page

munotes.in157

The rest of this chapter comes with the notes. See the prices

Chapter Thirty-Five

The Theory of Force

Syllabus topic 2.2.1, "Divine Right Theory of Kings, Social Contract/ Consent Theory, Theory of Force,"

In one line

The theory of force says the state was born of conquest and lives by superior strength, so obedience is owed to whoever is strong enough to compel it.

In the wording a student can write in an exam: the force theory holds that the state originated in the subjugation of the weak by the strong, that its essential characteristic is the possession of coercive power, and that political authority rests on the capacity to compel obedience rather than on any agreement, divine appointment or moral title.

The two claims inside it, which must be separated

Almost every mistake in answering this topic comes from running these together.

The historical claim. States actually arose by force. War, conquest and subjugation produced the earliest political units, and continued to produce them afterwards.

The normative claim. Force is what makes obedience owed. Might, in the slogan, makes right.

The first is largely true. The second is almost universally rejected. A good answer says so in its opening paragraph.

Who argued it

The ancient version. The claim that justice is nothing but the interest of the stronger is put in Plato's Republic by Thrasymachus, and answering it is much of what the dialogue is about.

The historical school. Nineteenth century writers, of whom Ludwig Gumplowicz and Franz Oppenheimer are the ones usually named, argued that the state arose from the conquest of one group by another and is essentially an organisation by which a victorious group exploits a defeated one.

The German account of the state and war. Writers in that tradition treated war as the means by which states are made and remade, and force as the state's defining attribute.

Anarchists, from the other side. Anarchist writers accepted the description entirely and drew the opposite conclusion: if the state is founded on force, it deserves no obedience at all.

Notice that the last group agree with the theory's premise and reject its conclusion, which is the fastest way to see that the premise does not carry the conclusion.

What is right in it

An answer that only refutes the theory misses several marks.

Historically it is well supported. Very few states were founded by agreement. Conquest, annexation, partition and revolution are how the political map was actually made.

Force is a real element of every state. Weber's own definition of the state is the human community that successfully claims the monopoly of the legitimate use of physical force within a given territory. Force is not incidental to the state; it is part of what the state is.

It corrects a sentimental picture. Contract theories can make the state sound like a club that members joined. Force theory is a useful reminder that boundaries were drawn by armies and that consent had nothing to do with where most people were born.

Contents This chapter on its own page

munotes.in167

The rest of this chapter comes with the notes. See the prices

Chapter Thirty-Six

The Theory of Prescriptive Possession

Syllabus topic 2.2.2, "Theory of Prescriptive Possession, Views of Karl Marx (Specified)"

In one line

The theory of prescription says that an arrangement which has lasted long enough acquires a title from its own duration, so that asking how it began is no longer a permitted question.

In the wording a student can write in an exam: the theory of prescriptive possession holds that political authority is legitimated by long, uninterrupted and unchallenged enjoyment, so that a constitution or a government which has been accepted and obeyed over many generations acquires a title which does not depend on the manner of its origin, and which the present generation is not entitled to reopen.

The idea, and the word

Prescription, in law, is the acquisition of a right by long use, and its mirror image is limitation, the extinction of a right by long failure to assert it. A person who occupies land openly and continuously, as of right, for the period the law prescribes, acquires a title good against the world, and the true owner's right is extinguished. Nobody thinks this is an endorsement of trespass. It is a rule about what happens when a state of affairs has lasted long enough that unsettling it would do more harm than leaving it.

The political theory is the same idea applied to constitutions. If a government has been obeyed for centuries, its title comes from that, and the question how the first ruler acquired power is no longer a live one.

Edmund Burke, the theory's great exponent

Burke is the name to give, and his argument in the Reflections on the Revolution in France has four parts a student should be able to reproduce.

Society is a partnership across generations. It is a partnership not only between those living, but between those who are living, those who are dead and those who are to be born. That is why the present generation cannot simply cancel the arrangement: it holds the estate for others.

Prescription is the most solid of all titles. Long possession is not merely evidence of a title; it is a title, and Burke says it is the soundest one there is, precisely because it has been tested by time in a way that a paper theory has not.

Institutions carry latent wisdom. An arrangement that has worked for centuries encodes solutions to problems nobody now remembers, discovered by trial and error across many lifetimes. An individual reformer's reason, however brilliant, is a small stock compared with the accumulated stock of the ages.

Therefore reform, not reconstruction. Burke is not opposed to change; he supported the American colonists and attacked misgovernment in India. His objection is to demolishing an inherited constitution on the strength of an abstract theory, because the theorist can see what is wrong and cannot see what the arrangement was quietly doing.

Contents This chapter on its own page

munotes.in172

The rest of this chapter comes with the notes. See the prices

Chapter Thirty-Seven

Karl Marx on Political Obligation

Syllabus topic 2.2.2, "Theory of Prescriptive Possession, Views of Karl Marx (Specified)"

In one line

Marx's answer to "why should I obey the state?" is that the question has been asked the wrong way round: the state is an instrument by which one class holds another down, so there is no general duty to obey it, and the belief that there is one is part of how the arrangement is maintained.

In the wording a student can write in an exam: Marx offers no theory of political obligation but a rejection of the question; since political power is merely the organised power of one class for oppressing another, and law and morality form a superstructure serving the class that owns the means of production, obedience to the state is not a moral duty owed by citizens but a condition of class rule, which will disappear along with classes and with the state itself.

Why Marx is not answering the same question

Every other theory in this module takes the question at face value and offers a ground: God, agreement, force, time. Marx does something different, and an answer that misses this misses the point.

He treats the question itself as a symptom. Asking "what obliges me to obey the state?" presupposes that the state is a neutral body standing above society, whose claim on me needs explaining. Marx denies the presupposition. The state is not above society; it is one part of society organised against another. Once that is seen, the question changes from "why must I obey?" to "whose interest does my obeying serve?".

In the vocabulary of chapter 240, Marx does not answer the four problems of generality, particularity, content independence and universality. He denies that there is anything there to be explained, which is why he belongs in a list of theories of obligation while being of a different kind from the rest.

The argument, in four steps

1. The state is an instrument of class rule

The proposition is stated in the Manifesto in the sentence to quote: "The executive of the modern State is but a committee for managing the common affairs of the whole bourgeoisie." And more generally: "Political power, properly so called, is merely the organised power of one class for oppressing another."

If that is what political power is, then obedience to it is not a relation between a citizen and a public authority. It is a relation between a subordinate class and the organised power of a dominant one.

2. Law is part of the same apparatus

Law defines and protects property, enforces contracts between parties of very unequal strength, and calls the arrangement freedom. The Manifesto addresses the bourgeois reader directly on this point, saying that his very ideas are products of the conditions of bourgeois production and property, and that his jurisprudence is but the will of his class made into a law for all.

Contents This chapter on its own page

munotes.in177

The rest of this chapter comes with the notes. See the prices

Chapter Thirty-Eight

What an Unjust Law Is

Syllabus topic 2.3, "Problems of Obedience to Unjust Laws"; 2.3.1, "What is Unjust Law?"

In one line

An unjust law is one that is validly made and ought not to have been made, and the tests for identifying one are that it treats people unequally without reason, that it takes away what it may not take away, that it was made or applied without fairness, or that its own purpose could not be stated in public.

In the wording a student can write in an exam: an unjust law is a rule which satisfies the formal requirements for validity in its legal system but violates the standards by which the content of law is judged, principally equality, the protection of basic interests, procedural fairness and the possibility of public justification; whether such a rule remains law is disputed between natural law theory, which holds that a sufficiently unjust rule is no law at all, and legal positivism, which holds that it is law and ought not to be obeyed.

The prior question: can a law be unjust at all?

Before you can ask what an unjust law is, you must be able to say that a law can be unjust, and two traditions answer differently.

Natural law. There is a standard above enacted law by which enacted law is judged, and a rule that fails badly enough is not law at all. The tradition's slogan is lex iniusta non est lex, an unjust law is not a law. On this view the citizen faced with such a rule is not facing a law and so faces no question of obedience.

Legal positivism. The existence of a law is one thing, its merit or demerit another. A rule enacted by a competent authority in the prescribed manner is law however wicked it is, and it should be described as law and then condemned.

Why the positivist position is the more useful one here, and Hart's reason for it. If a monstrous rule is said not to be law, the citizen's problem disappears by definition and the question of what to do about it is never asked. Saying "this is law, and it is too iniquitous to obey" states the problem accurately and keeps it open. A student who makes this point has understood the whole topic, and the point matters practically: a court in India does not say that section 377 was never law; it says the section was law and is now void.

Notice that Indian constitutional practice is a third thing, and is closer to natural law in effect while remaining positivist in form. A statute inconsistent with the Fundamental Rights is void, but it is void because a higher enacted rule says so, not because of a standard outside all enacted law.

Contents This chapter on its own page

munotes.in183

The rest of this chapter comes with the notes. See the prices

Chapter Thirty-Nine

The Right to Resistance and Dissent

Syllabus topic 2.3.2, "Right to Resistance and Dissent - T.H. Green, M. K. Gandhi, Harlod Laski, Martin Luther King Jr and Nelson Mandela (New)"

In one line

Resistance, revolution, civil disobedience and dissent are four different responses to an unjust law, they differ in what is broken, whether force is used and whether punishment is accepted, and the five men MU names chose differently between them.

In the wording a student can write in an exam: the right of resistance is the claim that a citizen is entitled, and in some accounts obliged, to refuse obedience to a government that has exceeded or betrayed the purpose for which authority was conferred; it ranges from dissent, which uses lawful means to oppose, through civil disobedience, which breaks the law openly and non-violently and accepts the penalty, to revolution, which seeks to replace the government by force.

The four things, kept apart

This is the whole value of the chapter, and the table at the end is what an answer should reproduce.

Dissent. Disagreement expressed by lawful means: speech, writing, assembly, petition, voting, litigation, a strike within the law. No law is broken. In India dissent is not merely tolerated; it is a fundamental right under article 19(1)(a) and 19(1)(b), and the courts have repeatedly said that the space for it is what distinguishes a democracy.

Conscientious refusal. A person refuses to do a particular thing because their conscience forbids it: a doctor who will not perform a procedure, a person who will not take an oath in a particular form, a soldier who will not fire on a crowd. It is personal rather than persuasive: the object is to keep one's own hands clean, not to change public policy.

Civil disobedience. A public, non-violent and conscientious breach of law, undertaken to change a law or policy, by a person who accepts the legal consequences. Each of those four features is doing work, and dropping any one of them turns it into something else. It is not secret, or it could not persuade. It is not violent, or it destroys the moral advantage it depends on. It is not self interested. And the penalty is accepted, which is what demonstrates that the disobedient still accepts the legal order as a whole while rejecting one part of it.

Revolution or rebellion. An attempt to overthrow the government or the constitutional order itself, usually by force. The target is not one law but the regime.

The single most useful distinction for an examination. Civil disobedience breaks a law and accepts the system. Revolution rejects the system. That is why civil disobedience can be argued for inside a constitutional order and revolution cannot.

Where the right of resistance comes from

Every theory of obligation in chapter 280 produces a different answer, and the differences are worth a paragraph.

Contents This chapter on its own page

munotes.in189

The rest of this chapter comes with the notes. See the prices

Chapter Forty

T. H. Green on Resistance

Syllabus topic 2.3.2, "Right to Resistance and Dissent - T.H. Green, ... (New)"

In one line

Green says the state rests on will and not on force, that a citizen obeys because the state maintains the conditions in which people can live a moral life, and that where a law attacks those conditions the ground of obedience is gone.

In the wording a student can write in an exam: T. H. Green holds that political obligation rests not on force or on a contract but on the common recognition of a common good; that the state exists to maintain the conditions under which its members can realise their moral capacities, which he describes as hindering the hindrances to the good life; that rights are powers recognised by society as necessary to that end; and that a right of resistance therefore exists where the sovereign's command destroys the very conditions the state exists to secure, subject always to the effect of resistance on the social fabric as a whole.

The position Green is arguing from

Green is an idealist, which in this context means something precise: he thinks the state is not an external machine standing over individuals but the arrangement through which individuals become what they are capable of being. Everything in his account follows from that.

"Will, not force, is the basis of the state." This is the heading of section 113, and it is the sentence every Indian textbook attributes to Green without saying where it is. His point is not that states never use force; it is that force cannot explain why they hold together. What holds a state together is the common recognition, by its members, of a common good.

The contract theorists went wrong in the same way as the force theorists. Green's own criticism, in the same section, is that theories explaining political obligation by contract treat sovereign and subject apart, whereas the two are correlative: there is no sovereign without subjects who recognise the sovereign, and no subject except in relation to a recognised sovereign. A contract between two pre-existing parties gets the relation the wrong way round.

But the contract theorists were groping at something true. Green says the theory of contract expresses, in a confused way, the truth that it is only through the common recognition of a common good that political society exists at all. That generosity is characteristic and is worth reproducing in an answer: Green does not simply refute his predecessors, he says what they were reaching for.

Freedom, and why it is not being left alone

This is Green's most influential contribution and it returns at topic 3.1.1.

Freedom is positive. It is not the absence of restraint but the positive power or capacity of doing or enjoying something worth doing or enjoying, and doing it in common with others.

Contents This chapter on its own page

munotes.in195

The rest of this chapter comes with the notes. See the prices

Chapter Forty-One

Harold Laski on Resistance

Syllabus topic 2.3.2, "Right to Resistance and Dissent - ... Harlod Laski, ... (New)"

In one line

Laski says the state has to earn obedience: we obey it because of what it achieves, we are the judges of whether it is achieving it, and where it is being used for ends incompatible with its nature we are under a duty to resist.

In the wording a student can write in an exam: Harold Laski holds that the state is not an end in itself but an organisation for enabling its members to realise themselves at their best; that power is always a trust held upon conditions, so that our obligation to obey depends on the degree to which the state achieves its purpose and we are the judges of that achievement; and that where the state's power is exercised for ends incompatible with its nature the civic outcome is a duty of resistance, exercisable only at the margins of political conduct and only where there is reasonable ground to believe the change sought will produce the end desired.

The starting point: the state is judged by what it does

Laski's whole position is contained in a passage a student should be able to state closely.

He argues that there is a difference between the purpose institutions embody and the substance they give to that purpose, and that our obligation to obey the State is, law apart, an obligation dependent upon the degree to which the State achieves its purpose. Then the sentence that makes him famous: "We are the judges of that achievement." We must obey the state, he says, not because its theoretic purpose is a splendid one, but because of our conviction that it is genuinely pursuing it.

Three things are packed in there.

Obligation is conditional. It is not owed to the state as such, and it does not follow from the state's existence. It follows from performance.

The condition is the state's purpose, which for Laski is that each member, in common with their fellows, may be themselves at their best.

The citizen is the judge. Not the government, not the courts, and not a theorist. The person subject to the decision assesses whether the state is doing its job.

Power is a trust, and scrutiny is a duty

Laski's second key passage develops this and adds an obligation most writers do not.

He says that power is always a trust, and it is always held upon conditions; that the will of the state is subject to the scrutiny of all who come within the ambit of its decisions; and that because it moulds the substance of their lives they have the right to pass judgment on the quality of its effort. Then he goes further: "They have, indeed, the duty so to pass judgment", because it is the plain lesson of the historic record that the wants of men will only secure recognition to the point that they are forcibly articulate.

Contents This chapter on its own page

munotes.in200

The rest of this chapter comes with the notes. See the prices

Chapter Forty-Two

M. K. Gandhi on Resistance

Syllabus topic 2.3.2, "Right to Resistance and Dissent - ... M. K. Gandhi, ... (New)"

In one line

Gandhi's answer is that obeying an unjust law is itself a form of taking part in the injustice, and that the way out is to disobey openly and take the punishment, which he calls using soul-force instead of body-force.

In the wording a student can write in an exam: Gandhi holds that a law is not entitled to obedience merely because a legislature made it; that a citizen who complies with a law repugnant to conscience is a partner in the wrong it does; that the remedy is passive resistance, which he defines as a method of securing rights by personal suffering and describes as the reverse of resistance by arms; and that the disobedient must accept the penalty for the breach, since it is the willingness to suffer, and not the breach itself, that constitutes the force of the method.

The passage that carries the topic

In chapter 17 of Hind Swaraj the Reader asks the Editor to explain passive resistance, and the answer is the text to know.

"Passive resistance is a method of securing rights by personal suffering; it is the reverse of resistance by arms."

Then the worked distinction, in Gandhi's own words. When I refuse to do a thing that is repugnant to my conscience, I use soul-force. Suppose the Government of the day has passed a law which is applicable to me, and I do not like it. If by using violence I force the Government to repeal the law, I am employing what may be termed body-force. If I do not obey the law and accept the penalty for its breach, I use soul-force. It involves sacrifice of self.

Read that carefully, because it contains the entire doctrine and students routinely lose half of it. There are two ways of not complying, and only one of them is Gandhi's. Forcing the repeal is body-force. Disobeying and taking the punishment is soul-force. The penalty is not an unfortunate consequence of the method; it is the method.

The four propositions

1. A law's provenance does not settle its claim. Gandhi rejects the idea that a legislature's enactment is by itself a reason for a person to act against conscience. The law's claim on me is not established by the fact that somebody with power passed it.

2. Obedience to an unjust law is participation in it. This is the moral premise. A tax paid to an unjust regime funds it; a rule complied with is a rule that works. The person who obeys quietly is not neutral, and cannot regard the injustice as somebody else's doing.

3. The remedy is refusal plus suffering. Refusal alone is defiance; refusal with acceptance of the penalty is soul-force. The suffering is what communicates, because it demonstrates that the resister is not acting out of self-interest and that they have counted the cost.

Contents This chapter on its own page

munotes.in206

The rest of this chapter comes with the notes. See the prices

Chapter Forty-Three

Martin Luther King Jr on Resistance

Syllabus topic 2.3.2, "Right to Resistance and Dissent - ... Martin Luther King Jr ... (New)"

In one line

King's contribution is a test for telling a just law from an unjust one, and a defence of breaking the unjust one openly while professing the highest respect for law itself.

In the wording a student can write in an exam: Martin Luther King Jr defended civil disobedience on the ground that an unjust law is no law in the moral sense, offering a test by which a just law uplifts human personality while an unjust law degrades it, that an unjust law is one a majority imposes on a minority which it does not make binding on itself, and that a law is unjust where those bound by it had no part in enacting it; and he insisted that one who breaks an unjust law must do so openly, lovingly and with a willingness to accept the penalty, which is the highest respect for law.

The situation the argument arose in

King wrote in April 1963 from a cell in Birmingham, Alabama, where he had been arrested for taking part in a demonstration against racial segregation in breach of a court injunction. The letter answers a public statement by eight local clergymen who agreed that segregation was wrong but urged that the campaign was untimely, that the courts should be used instead of the streets, and that outsiders should not have come.

That is worth stating, because it explains the shape of the argument. King is not answering a defender of segregation. He is answering people who agreed with his goal and objected to his method, which is exactly the objection every student instinctively makes, and it is why the letter is on so many syllabuses.

The four steps of a campaign

King describes non-violent direct action as a disciplined sequence, and this is the part most easily reproduced accurately.

1. Collection of the facts to determine whether injustices are alive.

2. Negotiation with those in a position to remedy them.

3. Self-purification, in which those who will take part train themselves, ask whether they can endure being struck without striking back and being jailed without bitterness, and withdraw if they cannot.

4. Direct action, only after the first three have been done.

Notice the resemblance to Gandhi's conditions, which is not accidental: King had studied Gandhi's campaigns closely and said so. The differences are that King's sequence is stated as an organisational method for a movement, and that self-purification is a formal stage with a test attached.

The tests for an unjust law

This is the most examinable material in the chapter, and there are four tests.

1. The moral test. A just law squares with the moral law; an unjust law is out of harmony with it. Any law that uplifts human personality is just; any law that degrades human personality is unjust.

Contents This chapter on its own page

munotes.in211

The rest of this chapter comes with the notes. See the prices

Chapter Forty-Four

Nelson Mandela on Resistance

Syllabus topic 2.3.2, "Right to Resistance and Dissent - ... Nelson Mandela (New)"

In one line

Mandela's argument is that non-violence is a tactic rather than a principle, that a government which answers peaceful protest with force and closes every lawful channel leaves its opponents no other means, and that the responsibility for the turn to force lies with the government that closed the channels.

In the wording a student can write in an exam: Nelson Mandela defended the decision to abandon exclusively non-violent methods on the ground that fifty years of constitutional and peaceful struggle had produced only more repressive legislation and fewer rights; that the government met peaceful demands with force and outlawed the organisations pressing them; that in those conditions continued non-violence would have been a passive submission to a permanent state of inferiority; and that violence directed at property and at the machinery of the state, and calculated to avoid loss of life, was the least destructive of the alternatives remaining.

The situation

Mandela was tried at Rivonia in 1963 and 1964 with others, on charges arising from sabotage and from the activities of Umkhonto we Sizwe, the organisation formed to carry it out. He faced the death penalty. Rather than deny the acts, he made a long statement from the dock in which he set out why the decision had been taken and accepted personal responsibility for it. He was sentenced to life imprisonment and served twenty-seven years.

The context that matters for this topic is the legal one. Apartheid was not lawlessness. It was a comprehensive body of legislation: statutes classifying people by race, allocating land by race, requiring passes, prohibiting mixed marriages, reserving occupations, and removing the franchise. That is what makes the case central to a module on unjust laws. Everything Mandela objected to had been validly enacted by a parliament.

The argument, in five steps

1. The struggle began, and long remained, non-violent. Mandela's account emphasises that the movement had for decades used petitions, deputations, strikes, boycotts and defiance campaigns in which volunteers deliberately broke unjust laws and submitted to arrest, which is exactly the technique of the two previous chapters.

2. Peaceful methods were met with force and with more law. Demonstrations were fired on; leaders were banned, restricted and imprisoned; and the response to each campaign was fresh legislation making the next one an offence. The organisations themselves were declared unlawful, which removed even the possibility of lawful political activity.

3. Non-violence was a tactic, not a creed. This is the point on which Mandela differs from Gandhi and the point an answer must state clearly. For Gandhi, non-violence is a principle bound up with truth and with the relation of means to ends. For Mandela it was a method, adopted because it was thought effective, and to be reconsidered when it ceased to be. When the government's response made peaceful protest impossible, continuing it would have been not a moral stand but an acceptance of permanent subjection.

Contents This chapter on its own page

munotes.in217

The rest of this chapter comes with the notes. See the prices

Chapter Forty-Five

Satyagraha: The Gandhian Technique of Resistance

Syllabus topic 2.3.3, "Satyagraha - Gandhian Technique of Resistance against Unjust Laws"

In one line

Satyagraha is the technique of holding to the truth by accepting suffering rather than inflicting it, conducted in a disciplined sequence, in which the resister breaks an unjust law openly and takes the punishment.

In the wording a student can write in an exam: satyagraha, from satya meaning truth and agraha meaning firmness or holding fast, is the Gandhian technique of resisting injustice by refusing to comply with it while accepting the suffering that the refusal brings, without violence and without hatred of the opponent, the object being not to defeat the opponent but to convert them.

The word, and why Gandhi coined it

Gandhi first used the English phrase passive resistance, and came to dislike it for two reasons: it suggested weakness, and it suggested the method was for those too weak to fight. He wanted a word for a method requiring more courage than fighting, so the term was coined from satya, truth, and agraha, firmness or holding fast.

Two things follow from the etymology and both are examinable.

Truth is the object, not victory. A satyagrahi who discovers that their own case is wrong is required to abandon it. This is what distinguishes the technique from a strategy of moral pressure.

Firmness, not passivity. The satyagrahi initiates. They break the law, publish their intention and bear the consequence. Nothing about it is passive except the refusal to strike back.

The three foundations

Satya, truth. The case must be true and must be stated truthfully, including what tells against it. The opponent must never be misled.

Ahimsa, non-violence. Not merely refraining from physical harm, but the absence of ill-will in act, word and thought. Gandhi's positive formulation is that it is love of the opponent, extended to those who wrong you.

Tapasya, self-suffering. The willingness to accept the consequence of the refusal, including imprisonment, loss of property and physical injury, without retaliation. This is the operative element: as Hind Swaraj puts it, if I do not obey the law and accept the penalty for its breach, I use soul-force, and it involves sacrifice of self.

How the three work together. Truth supplies the case; non-violence removes the opponent's justification and preserves the possibility of reconciliation; and self-suffering is what communicates, because a person who accepts loss rather than inflicts it cannot easily be accused of self-interest.

The rules of a satyagraha campaign

Gandhi's own discipline, and an answer that gives it in sequence is a strong answer.

Before the campaign.

  1. Exhaust every other means: petition, negotiation, arbitration, and appeal to the authority concerned.
  2. State the demand precisely and make it minimal, so that the opponent knows exactly what would end the campaign.
  3. Give notice to the authority, saying what will be done and when. Nothing is secret.
  4. Prepare the participants: training, a pledge, and the withdrawal of anybody who cannot maintain non-violence under provocation.

Contents This chapter on its own page

munotes.in223

The rest of this chapter comes with the notes. See the prices

Chapter Forty-Six

Punishment: Why the State Does It at All

Syllabus topic 2.4, "Punishment - Objectives, Justification and Deviation"; 2.4.1, "Responsibility of the Modern State to Punish"

In one line

Punishment is the deliberate infliction of suffering by the state on somebody it has found guilty, and because that is what it is, it needs a justification that ordinary state action does not.

In the wording a student can write in an exam: punishment is the intentional imposition of a hardship or deprivation on a person for a breach of a rule, by an authority constituted for the purpose and against the offender's will, and it requires justification because the state is doing to a person, deliberately, the very kind of thing the criminal law exists to prevent private persons doing to each other.

What punishment is

The standard analysis gives five elements, and an answer that lists them handles almost any question in this block.

1. It involves hardship or deprivation. Something the person would not choose: liberty, money, reputation, and at the limit life.

2. It is imposed for an offence against a rule.

3. It is imposed on an actual or supposed offender for that offence.

4. It is intentionally administered by human beings other than the offender.

5. It is imposed by an authority constituted by the legal system against which the offence was committed.

Every element is doing work. Remove the second and you have arbitrary harm; remove the third and you have punishing the innocent; remove the fifth and you have a lynching. When a question asks you to distinguish punishment from something else, it is one of these five that has been dropped.

What it is not

It is not compensation. Compensation looks at the victim's loss and restores it; punishment looks at the offender's wrong and imposes a deprivation. The same act may attract both, and they are different in aim, in measure and in who receives the benefit.

It is not a tax or a fee. A fee is a price for a permitted activity; a penalty marks the activity as forbidden. Two identical payments may be either, and which they are depends on whether the conduct is being priced or condemned.

It is not treatment. Treatment is directed at curing a condition, is measured by what the patient needs, and can be given to somebody who has committed no offence. Punishment is measured by what was done. The reformative theory at chapter 510 pulls hard on this line and the line still exists.

It is not preventive detention. Detention to stop a future harm is imposed on the basis of what somebody may do, not what they have done, and it lacks elements 2 and 3. Whether it can be justified at all is a separate constitutional question.

It is not revenge. Revenge is personal, unlimited, need not be inflicted by an authority, and need not be deserved. Punishment is imposed by a body with jurisdiction, is limited by rules, and requires guilt. The distinction between retribution and revenge is chapter 470's job and it is the distinction students most often collapse.

Contents This chapter on its own page

munotes.in229

The rest of this chapter comes with the notes. See the prices

Chapter Forty-Seven

Kant's Retributivism

Syllabus topic 2.4.2, "Philosophical underpinnings: Kant's Retributivism, Jeremy Bentham's Utilitarian"

In one line

Kant says punishment is owed to the guilty because they are guilty, that it may never be inflicted as a means of producing some benefit, and that the measure of it is what the offender did.

In the wording a student can write in an exam: Kant holds that juridical punishment can never be administered merely as a means of promoting another good, whether for the criminal himself or for civil society, but must in all cases be imposed only because the individual on whom it is inflicted has committed a crime; that the principle of equality determines both the quality and the quantity of punishment, which he calls the right of retaliation or ius talionis; and that this is the only principle which, in regulating a public court as distinguished from private judgment, can definitely assign the kind and degree of punishment.

The moral foundation

Kant's theory of punishment is not a separate doctrine bolted on to his ethics. It follows from two propositions that run through everything he wrote.

A person must never be treated merely as a means. Human beings possess dignity, which is a worth beyond price, and to use a person as an instrument for producing some result is to deny that worth. This is why the utilitarian theory of the next chapter is, for Kant, not merely mistaken but a wrong done to the person punished.

Punishment must be deserved, and desert is backward looking. The question is what the offender did, not what will follow from punishing them. Consequences are irrelevant to whether punishment is owed, and can be relevant only within the limits desert has already fixed.

The consequence students find hardest. On Kant's account, punishing a guilty person is not a regrettable necessity to be minimised. It is required. A society that let a murderer go free because nothing would be gained by punishing him would, in Kant's language, be a party to the wrong.

The two passages

The right of retaliation

Kant's own text puts the principle plainly. Whatever undeserved evil you inflict upon another within the people, that you inflict upon yourself: if you strike yourself, you strike another; if you kill another, you kill yourself. This, he says, is the Right of Retaliation, in his Latin the ius talionis, and, properly understood, it is the only principle which, in regulating a public court as distinguished from mere private judgment, can definitely assign both the quality and the quantity of a just penalty.

Three things to notice.

It is a principle of measurement, not of vengeance. Kant's claim is not that the victim's family are entitled to satisfaction. It is that the offence itself supplies the standard by which a court can fix a sentence, and that no other principle can.

Contents This chapter on its own page

munotes.in234

The rest of this chapter comes with the notes. See the prices

Chapter Forty-Eight

Jeremy Bentham's Utilitarian Theory of Punishment

Syllabus topic 2.4.2, "Philosophical underpinnings: Kant's Retributivism, Jeremy Bentham's Utilitarian"

In one line

Bentham says punishment is itself an evil, so it can never be justified by what the offender deserves, but only by the greater evil it prevents, and where it prevents nothing it must not be inflicted.

In the wording a student can write in an exam: Bentham holds that the business of government is to promote the happiness of society by punishing and rewarding; that punishment is mischief and all punishment in itself is evil, so that upon the principle of utility it ought to be admitted only in so far as it promises to exclude some greater evil; and that punishment is therefore improper in four classes of case, where it is groundless, inefficacious, unprofitable or needless.

The starting point

Bentham's whole system rests on the principle of utility, which approves or disapproves of every action according to its tendency to augment or diminish the happiness of the party whose interest is in question. The legislator's business is to promote the happiness of the society, and to exclude, as far as may be, everything that tends to subtract from that happiness, which is to say, to exclude mischief.

Then comes the sentence on which this chapter turns. But punishment is mischief: all punishment in itself is evil. Upon the principle of utility, if it ought at all to be admitted, it ought only to be admitted in as far as it promises to exclude some greater evil.

Read that against Kant and the whole disagreement appears in two lines. For Kant, punishing the guilty is required. For Bentham, punishing anybody is a harm which needs to buy something, and if it buys nothing it is simply harm added to harm.

The ends of punishment

On the utilitarian account, punishment is instrumental, and four purposes are recognised.

General prevention, which later writers call general deterrence: the example made of this offender deters others. Bentham regards this as the chief end, because it operates on the whole population rather than on one person.

Particular prevention, or special deterrence: the offender is deterred from repeating.

Incapacitation: while confined, the offender cannot offend against the public.

Reformation: the offender's disposition is changed.

Bentham also stresses that the profit of the offence must be outweighed. Punishment must be so calibrated that the expected evil of the punishment exceeds the expected profit of the offence, allowing for the probability of detection, which is why he treats certainty as more important than severity: a small penalty that is certain deters better than a heavy one that is unlikely.

The four classes of case in which punishment must not be inflicted

This is Bentham's most distinctive contribution and the part of him a student should be able to reproduce. Punishment ought not to be admitted where it is groundless, inefficacious, unprofitable, or needless.

Contents This chapter on its own page

munotes.in240

The rest of this chapter comes with the notes. See the prices

Chapter Forty-Nine

The Justification of Punishment

Syllabus topic 2.4.3, "Justification of Punishment"

In one line

There are five classical justifications of punishment, none of them is sufficient by itself, and the position modern law has reached is that a forward looking aim may be pursued only within limits fixed by what the offender deserves.

In the wording a student can write in an exam: the justifications of punishment are the retributive, which looks backward to desert; the deterrent, which looks forward to the prevention of offences by others and by the offender; the preventive or incapacitative, which removes the offender's opportunity to offend; the reformative, which seeks to change the offender; and the expiatory, which treats punishment as atonement; and the prevailing modern position is a combined theory in which the general justifying aim is forward looking while the distribution and the amount of punishment are limited by desert.

The five theories

Retributive

Punishment is deserved. The offender has done wrong and the wrong itself is the reason for the punishment. Kant is the classical exponent, and chapter 470 sets him out in full. Its answer to "how much" is the offence itself.

Strength. It is the only theory that explains why we may punish only the guilty and only in proportion, and it treats the offender as a responsible agent.

Weakness. It requires punishment even where nothing is gained, and it cannot measure non-violent offences without help.

Deterrent

Punishment prevents future offences by making the prospect unattractive, to the offender and to others watching. Bentham is the classical exponent. Chapter 500 works it in detail.

Strength. It gives a reason for punishing that is intelligible to somebody who does not accept desert.

Weakness. It permits punishing the innocent if that would deter, and it permits disproportionate sentences where they would deter more.

Preventive or incapacitative

Punishment removes the offender's ability to offend, by imprisonment, disqualification, forfeiture or, at the limit, death. Chapter 500 also covers this.

Strength. It works whether or not anybody is deterred, since the incapacitated person simply cannot offend against the public.

Weakness. It looks to what the person may do rather than to what they did, so taken alone it leads to detention on prediction, which is punishment without an offence.

Reformative

Punishment should change the offender so that they do not offend again, and should be measured by what will achieve that. Chapter 510 works it, with the Gandhian version and the Indian cases.

Strength. It is the only theory that treats the sentence as an opportunity, and it produces the whole apparatus of probation, parole, remission, open prisons and juvenile justice.

Weakness. Its measure is need rather than desert, so it can justify detaining a minor offender until they are cured, and it has no answer to the offender who is not in need of reform.

Contents This chapter on its own page

munotes.in246

The rest of this chapter comes with the notes. See the prices

Chapter Fifty

The Deterrent and Preventive Approaches

Syllabus topic 2.4.4, "Deterrent, & Preventive approaches"

In one line

The deterrent approach punishes in order to frighten people out of offending; the preventive approach punishes in order to take away the offender's ability to offend, and the two are constantly confused because a prison sentence does both.

In the wording a student can write in an exam: the deterrent approach justifies punishment by its effect on the will, holding that the prospect of the penalty will dissuade the offender and others from committing the offence, and it is divided into general deterrence, aimed at the public, and special or particular deterrence, aimed at the offender; the preventive or incapacitative approach justifies punishment by its effect on the capacity to offend, holding that a person imprisoned, disqualified or executed is thereby prevented from committing further offences against the public.

Deterrence

The two kinds

General deterrence operates on everybody except the offender. The sentence is a public message: this is what happens. Bentham regarded this as the principal end of punishment, because it operates on the whole population rather than on one person.

Special or particular deterrence operates on the offender, who is expected to weigh the experience and decline to repeat it.

What deterrence assumes

The assumptions are what an examiner is testing, because each one can fail.

A rational calculator. The person weighs the expected gain against the expected cost before acting.

Knowledge of the penalty. They must know roughly what the punishment is.

Belief in the risk of detection. They must think there is a real chance of being caught, since a penalty that will never be applied costs nothing.

Capacity to act on the calculation. They must be in a state in which the calculation can operate, which excludes offences committed in rage, under intoxication, under compulsion, or by the very young.

Alternatives. A person with no lawful means of subsistence is not choosing between two options in the way the theory requires.

The three variables

The expected cost of an offence is the product of three things, and the ranking between them is the most useful thing in this chapter.

Certainty, the probability of being caught and convicted.

Severity, the size of the penalty.

Celerity, the speed with which it follows.

Bentham's own conclusion, and the modern evidence agree. Certainty matters most. A modest penalty that is very likely deters better than a heavy one that is unlikely, because the offender's expected cost is severity discounted by probability, and the probability of detection for most offences is low. This has a direct practical consequence in India, where conviction rates for many offences are low and delays are long: raising sentences in such a system adds severity to an expectation that is already close to zero, while investment in investigation and in speed changes the multiplier.

Contents This chapter on its own page

munotes.in252

The rest of this chapter comes with the notes. See the prices

Chapter Fifty-One

Gandhi and the Reformative Approach to Punishment

Syllabus topic 2.4.5, "Gandhian thought on Reformative Approach to Punish"

In one line

Gandhi's view is that the offender is a person to be healed rather than an enemy to be crushed, that one may hate the offence and not the offender, and that a prison should work as a hospital works.

In the wording a student can write in an exam: the reformative approach holds that the object of punishment is to change the offender so that they do not offend again, and the Gandhian version of it treats crime as a disease of society as much as of the individual, the offender as a patient rather than an enemy, and the prison as a place of treatment; its Indian legal expression is the requirement that a court hear the offender before sentence and consider the circumstances of the criminal and not only the gravity of the crime.

Gandhi's position

Hate the offence and not the offender. Gandhi's formulation is that one should hate the sin and not the sinner, and he treated the distinction as a practical rule and not a pious sentiment: a person who is treated as an enemy will behave as one, and a society that treats offenders as enemies produces more of them.

Crime is a symptom. For Gandhi much offending is produced by poverty, by unemployment, by the destruction of village occupations and by the loss of a moral community. A society that creates those conditions and then punishes the results is punishing its own product.

The offender is capable of change. This follows from his general position that human beings are capable of being reached, which is the same premise that underlies satyagraha at chapter 450: the technique works because the opponent has a conscience, and so does the offender.

Punishment must not degrade. Whatever else is done to a person, they are not to be dehumanised. A punishment that destroys self respect makes reform impossible and is a wrong of the same kind as the offence.

The community is implicated and must act. Gandhi's constructive programme is relevant here: reform of the offender is meaningless if there is nothing to return to.

Self-suffering rather than the infliction of suffering. The pattern of satyagraha applied to wrongdoing generally: the response to a wrong is to take suffering on oneself rather than to inflict it, which is why Gandhi undertook fasts as penance for the failings of his own side.

What the reformative theory means in practice

The theory is not merely an attitude, and an answer that lists its institutional consequences is stronger than one that describes a sentiment.

Individualised sentencing. The sentence is fixed after looking at the offender and not only at the offence, which requires the court to have material about them.

Contents This chapter on its own page

munotes.in258

The rest of this chapter comes with the notes. See the prices

Chapter Fifty-Two

Implicit Bias in the Justice Delivery System

Syllabus topic 2.4.6, "Implicit Biases in the Justice Delivery System , Social Injustice and Social Inequality"

In one line

Implicit bias is an association a person carries without being aware of it, which influences their decisions while they believe they are being impartial, and a justice system made of such decisions can produce unequal outcomes without anybody in it being prejudiced.

In the wording a student can write in an exam: implicit bias is an unconscious association between a social group and an attribute, acquired from the surrounding culture, which operates automatically on perception, memory and judgment; it is distinguished from explicit bias, which is consciously held and can be reported, and its significance for the justice delivery system is that it can produce systematically unequal treatment through the ordinary, honest and well-intentioned decisions of individual officers, prosecutors and judges.

The concept, defined precisely

Explicit bias is a belief or attitude a person holds and can state: they know they have it, and they may act on it or restrain it.

Implicit bias is an association operating below awareness. The person does not know it is there, would sincerely deny holding it, and may hold the opposite belief consciously.

Three features follow, and each is examinable.

It is acquired from the environment. Implicit associations reflect the patterns a person has been exposed to, in language, in media, in family and in institutions, rather than anything they decided.

Sincerity is no defence and no evidence. A decision maker who honestly reports having no prejudice may still be affected, which is exactly why the concept exists. Asking officials whether they are biased tests explicit bias only.

It operates hardest where information is thin and time is short. A judgment made quickly, on incomplete facts, with discretion, is where automatic associations fill the gaps. This is precisely the shape of most criminal justice decisions.

Where it can enter a criminal process

Listing the decision points is what turns a general observation into an answer, because each point is a place where discretion exists.

Whether an incident is treated as a crime at all, which is often decided informally at a police station.

Whether a complaint is recorded. A refusal to register is invisible in every subsequent statistic.

Who is stopped, questioned and searched.

Whether a person is arrested or released, and how force is used during arrest.

How witnesses perceive and identify, since perception itself is affected by expectation, and cross-group identification is known to be less reliable.

Whether bail is opposed and granted, where much turns on assessments of respectability, roots in the community and likelihood of absconding, all of which are judgments about a person's social position.

The quality of representation, which depends on means.

Charging decisions, including which of several available offences is charged.

Contents This chapter on its own page

munotes.in265

The rest of this chapter comes with the notes. See the prices

Chapter Fifty-Three

Social Injustice and Social Inequality in Punishment

Syllabus topic 2.4.6, "Implicit Biases in the Justice Delivery System , Social Injustice and Social Inequality"

In one line

Even a system with no biased person in it will punish the poor more than the rich, because almost every stage of a criminal process costs money, time and standing, and those are exactly what the poor do not have.

In the wording a student can write in an exam: social inequality affects punishment not only through the prejudices of individuals but structurally, because criminal procedure at every stage distributes advantages according to wealth, literacy, social standing and access to representation, so that formally equal rules produce systematically unequal outcomes, and because the conduct that is defined and enforced as crime is itself shaped by who has the power to define it.

The structural argument, in five steps

1. Formal equality is not substantive equality

The law is the same for everybody, and that is the problem rather than the answer. Anatole France's observation is the classic statement of the point: the law in its majestic equality forbids rich and poor alike to sleep under bridges, to beg in the streets and to steal bread. A rule that applies identically to unequal people produces unequal results.

2. Every stage of a criminal process has a price

Being stopped. Policing is concentrated where it is visible and cheap, which is public space, and people who live and work in public space are poor.

Bail. Release before trial commonly depends on a surety, on proof of a permanent address and on documented employment. Each of those is a proxy for property and settled work rather than for the risk of absconding. A person who cannot furnish them remains in custody though the law grants them bail.

Representation. Article 39A of the Constitution directs the State to secure that the operation of the legal system promotes justice on a basis of equal opportunity and, in particular, to provide free legal aid so that opportunities for securing justice are not denied to any citizen by reason of economic or other disabilities. The gap between that direction and the quality actually available is where much of this topic lives.

Time. A trial requires attendance on many dates. A salaried person takes leave; a daily wage earner loses the day's wage each time, and after several dates may prefer to plead guilty to a minor offence rather than continue.

Fines. A fixed fine is a trivial sum for one person and a month's food for another, which is why day-fine systems, calibrated to income, exist elsewhere.

Appeal. An appeal costs money and requires somebody to conduct it.

3. Custody before conviction does the work of punishment

The most important structural fact in the Indian criminal process, and it needs no bias at all. A person who cannot obtain bail undergoes confinement, loss of employment, loss of housing and damage to reputation, all before any finding of guilt, and often for longer than the sentence the offence would carry. Every justification in chapter 460 is unavailable, because there is no conviction, no finding, and often in the end no offence.

Contents This chapter on its own page

munotes.in270

The rest of this chapter comes with the notes. See the prices

Chapter Fifty-Four

Ethnic Profiling in the European Union and the United States

Syllabus topic 2.4.7, "Ethnic profiling in the European Union and US ,Case Study- Black Lives Matter Movement"

In one line

Ethnic profiling is the use of a person's race, ethnicity, religion or national origin, rather than their individual behaviour, as a ground for stopping, searching or investigating them, and the objection to it is that it is unlawful discrimination and that it does not work.

In the wording a student can write in an exam: ethnic profiling is the reliance by law enforcement or other authorities on race, ethnicity, religion, national origin or language, without objective and reasonable justification, as a basis for decisions to stop, question, search, detain or investigate; it is prohibited as direct or indirect discrimination under European Union and Council of Europe instruments, and it is criticised as ineffective, because it lowers the accuracy of policing, and as counterproductive, because it destroys the cooperation on which policing depends.

What profiling is, and what it is not

Criminal profiling is lawful and ordinary. A description of a suspect from a witness, an assessment of behaviour, or an intelligence-led operation based on evidence about a particular group of offenders are all normal policing.

Ethnic profiling is the use of a group characteristic as a proxy for individual suspicion. The officer's ground for acting is not what this person did but which category they belong to.

The distinguishing question is therefore individual behaviour. If the reason for the stop would survive the removal of the person's ethnicity from the description, it is not ethnic profiling. If it would not, it is.

A hard case worth stating, because examiners like it. Where a witness describes a specific offender by, among other things, their appearance, using that description is not profiling: it is identification of an individual. Where officers stop members of a group because offenders of that description have committed offences in the area, it is profiling, because the ground is category membership.

Why it is unlawful in the European Union

The clearest anchor is the Union's own legislation, and it is worth quoting because it captures profiling precisely.

Council Directive 2000/43/EC of 29 June 2000 implements the principle of equal treatment between persons irrespective of racial or ethnic origin.

Article 2 defines both kinds of discrimination. Direct discrimination occurs where one person is treated less favourably than another is, has been or would be treated in a comparable situation on grounds of racial or ethnic origin. And indirect discrimination is taken to occur where an apparently neutral provision, criterion or practice would put persons of a racial or ethnic origin at a particular disadvantage compared with other persons, unless that provision, criterion or practice is objectively justified by a legitimate aim and the means of achieving that aim are appropriate and necessary.

Why the second definition matters most for this topic. A police force will rarely have a written instruction to stop members of a particular group. What it will have is a practice, neutral on its face, which in operation falls overwhelmingly on one group. The Directive's definition reaches exactly that, and it puts the burden on the authority to show a legitimate aim and means that are appropriate and necessary. Necessity is the demanding word: it is not enough that profiling helps a little; it must be shown that no less discriminatory means would do.

Contents This chapter on its own page

munotes.in275

The rest of this chapter comes with the notes. See the prices

Chapter Fifty-Five

Black Lives Matter: A Case Study

Syllabus topic 2.4.7, "Ethnic profiling in the European Union and US ,Case Study- Black Lives Matter Movement"

In one line

Black Lives Matter is a movement that arose from the deaths of Black people in encounters with police in the United States, and its importance for this syllabus is that it puts every question in Module II at once: whether the law is just, what a citizen owes it, how they may resist, and whether punishment is being administered equally.

In the wording a student can write in an exam: Black Lives Matter is a decentralised social movement that began in the United States in 2013 and grew internationally, which asserts that Black people are subjected to disproportionate and often lethal force by the police, that the criminal justice system enforces the law unequally against them, and that the remedy requires structural change in policing rather than the discipline of individual officers; it is significant for political theory because it raises the problem of obedience to a legal order that a section of the population experiences as unjust in its operation rather than in its terms.

What happened

The origin. The movement's name and organisation date from 2013, arising from the acquittal of the man who had shot an unarmed Black teenager, Trayvon Martin, in Florida in 2012. It became a national movement in 2014 after the deaths of Michael Brown in Ferguson, Missouri, and Eric Garner in New York, and the decisions of grand juries not to indict the officers involved.

The expansion. In May 2020 the death of George Floyd during an arrest in Minneapolis, recorded on video by a bystander, produced protests across the United States and in many other countries, including large demonstrations in Europe where the local grievances were about local policing rather than American policing.

The form of the movement. It is decentralised, with no single leadership, organised largely through networks and social platforms, and it has repeatedly produced local campaigns with different demands. That structure is itself a subject for analysis and appears in the criticisms below.

What is claimed

An answer must state the claims precisely, because they are different in kind and are supported by different sorts of evidence.

Disproportionate use of force, including lethal force, in police encounters with Black people.

Unequal enforcement, so that the same conduct is more likely to be detected, charged and punished when the person is Black. This is chapter 530's structural argument with ethnicity as the axis.

Profiling, which is chapter 540 exactly: stops made on the ground of appearance rather than behaviour.

Failure of accountability, meaning that officers are rarely prosecuted and still more rarely convicted, so the ordinary mechanism by which a legal system corrects itself does not operate.

And a claim about the structure rather than the individuals: that the pattern is produced by rules, training, incentives and legal doctrines, so that disciplining individual officers cannot correct it.

Contents This chapter on its own page

munotes.in281

The rest of this chapter comes with the notes. See the prices

Module III

Political Ideologies

munotes.in

Chapter Fifty-Six

What a Political Ideology Is

Syllabus topic Module III, "Political Ideologies"; 3.1, "Liberalism"

In one line

An ideology is a connected set of beliefs about how society is, how it ought to be, and how to get from one to the other, held by a group and used to justify or to challenge power.

In the wording a student can write in an exam: a political ideology is a more or less coherent set of ideas which provides an account of the existing social and political order, a model of a desired future, and an indication of how political change can and should be brought about; it is distinguished from a political philosophy by being action oriented and held by groups rather than argued by individuals, and from a mere opinion by being systematic.

The three parts every ideology has

This is the framework, and it is what makes the four ideologies comparable.

1. A description. An account of how things are, and what is wrong with them. Liberalism describes a world of individuals; socialism describes a world of classes and cooperation; communism describes a world of class conflict driven by ownership.

2. A prescription. A picture of how things ought to be. This is where the ideology's central value sits: liberty for liberalism, the greatest happiness for utilitarianism, equality and community for socialism, a classless society for communism.

3. A programme. A route from the first to the second. This is the part most often left out of student answers, and it is where two ideologies that share a goal can differ completely: socialism and communism both want common ownership and disagree about whether to get there by election or by revolution, which is topic 3.4.2 exactly.

What an ideology is not

It is not a political philosophy. A philosophy asks whether a proposition is true and is argued by individuals. An ideology is held by groups and its function is to guide and justify action. The two overlap: Mill wrote philosophy that became liberal ideology, and Marx wrote analysis that became communist ideology.

It is not a party programme. A manifesto is a list of promises for one election; an ideology is the set of ideas from which such lists are generated.

It is not necessarily false. The word acquired a pejorative sense from Marx, for whom ideology meant the distorted consciousness produced by a society's material conditions, and from Napoleon, who used it as an insult. That sense is worth knowing and is not the sense used in this module.

It is not the same as a religion, though the two can occupy the same space, because an ideology's claims are about how society should be organised rather than about the ultimate nature of things.

Contents This chapter on its own page

munotes.in287

The rest of this chapter comes with the notes. See the prices

Chapter Fifty-Seven

Liberalism: Meaning and Basic Principles

Syllabus topic 3.1.1, "Meaning and Definition, Basic Principles, Arguments in Favour and Against. Shift from Negative Liberty to Positive Liberty (Classical and ModernLiberalism)"

In one line

Liberalism is the belief that the individual comes first, that the individual's liberty is the highest political value, and that any power exercised over a person has to be justified to them.

In the wording a student can write in an exam: liberalism is the political ideology which takes the individual human being as the basic unit of society and the possessor of rights that exist independently of the state; which holds liberty to be the supreme political value; which insists that all political authority requires justification and consent, and must therefore be limited, constitutional and accountable; and which regards toleration, equality before the law and the use of reason as the necessary conditions of a free society.

The word, and the two things it names

Liberalism comes from the Latin liber, free. The word entered political use in Spain in the early nineteenth century and spread from there.

It names two different things and students should say which they mean.

A historical movement. The struggle against absolute monarchy, religious compulsion, hereditary privilege and restrictions on trade, running from the seventeenth century.

A body of ideas, which is what this module examines, and which has since divided into the classical and modern strands of the next chapter.

The basic principles

The basic principles of liberalism are eight, and the meaning of liberalism is best conveyed by working through them rather than by any single sentence: a definition of liberalism that omits toleration or limited government has left out something the doctrine cannot do without.

Each of these is a claim, and each has a consequence in law that an Indian student will recognise.

1. Individualism

The individual is the basic unit of political analysis and the ultimate bearer of value. Groups, classes, nations and communities matter because of what they do for the individuals who compose them.

Its consequence. Rights are held by persons rather than by groups, and the person is entitled to be treated as an end. Every fundamental right in Part III of the Indian Constitution is drafted this way.

What it denies. That a person's identity is exhausted by their membership of a caste, a religion or a family, and that a group's interest can override an individual's rights.

2. Liberty as the supreme political value

Liberty comes first among political values, and other goods are pursued so far as they are compatible with it.

Its consequence. Restrictions require justification, and the burden lies on whoever restricts. This is exactly the structure of article 19 of the Indian Constitution, which states freedoms and then requires that any restriction be reasonable and made on stated grounds.

3. Reason

Human beings are capable of reasoning about their own interests and about public questions, so problems are to be solved by argument, evidence and debate rather than by authority, tradition or force.

Contents This chapter on its own page

munotes.in292

The rest of this chapter comes with the notes. See the prices

Chapter Fifty-Eight

Classical and Modern Liberalism

Syllabus topic 3.1.1, "... (Classical and ModernLiberalism)"

In one line

Classical liberalism wants the state to leave people alone; modern liberalism came to see that leaving people alone is worth very little to somebody with nothing, and asked the state to supply the conditions in which liberty can actually be used.

In the wording a student can write in an exam: classical liberalism, dominant from the seventeenth to the nineteenth century, conceives liberty negatively as the absence of interference, treats the state as a necessary evil to be confined to the protection of life, liberty and property, and favours free markets and minimal regulation; modern liberalism, developing from the late nineteenth century, conceives liberty positively as the capacity to make effective use of one's freedom, and accordingly accepts an enabling state which removes obstacles such as poverty, ignorance and disease through welfare provision and regulation.

Classical liberalism

Its period and setting. From Locke in the seventeenth century through the nineteenth, formed in a struggle against absolute monarchy, established religion, hereditary privilege and restrictions on trade. Every one of its doctrines is aimed at a form of power that then existed.

Its core commitments.

Negative liberty. Freedom is the absence of external constraint. A person is free to the extent that nobody is stopping them.

A minimal state. Its functions are defence, the maintenance of order, the enforcement of contracts and the protection of property, and little else. The image often used is a night watchman.

Natural rights, especially property. Locke's account at chapter 320 makes property a natural right existing before government, so the state finds property already there and may not take it without consent.

Free markets. Exchange between willing parties produces prosperity, and interference distorts it.

Equality of opportunity and not of outcome. Careers open to talent; results are the individual's own.

Its assumption about human beings. Rational, self-interested and self-directing adults, capable of looking after themselves if left unobstructed.

What went wrong with the assumption

An answer that explains the transition is much stronger than one that describes the two phases side by side. The transition happened because the assumption failed in a particular set of conditions.

The conditions. Industrialisation produced a working population in cities, without land, dependent on wages, working long hours in dangerous conditions, living in insanitary housing, without education, and without any means of subsistence when unemployed, injured or old.

Why the classical answer did not work. These people were, in the classical sense, free: nobody was legally stopping them from doing anything. The employment contract was voluntary. And their situation was not remotely one of liberty in any sense that mattered to them.

The three observations that produced modern liberalism.

Freedom without capacity is empty. A right to educate one's children is worth nothing to a person who cannot pay a fee.

Contents This chapter on its own page

munotes.in297

The rest of this chapter comes with the notes. See the prices

Chapter Fifty-Nine

The Shift From Negative Liberty to Positive Liberty

Syllabus topic 3.1.1, "Shift from Negative Liberty to Positive Liberty"

In one line

Negative liberty is freedom from interference, positive liberty is freedom to actually do something, and the whole argument is about whether the second is a genuine kind of freedom or a licence for somebody else to decide what you really want.

In the wording a student can write in an exam: negative liberty is the absence of external obstacles, coercion or interference, so that a person is free to the extent that others do not prevent them from acting; positive liberty is the presence of the capacity, resources and self-mastery required to act effectively on one's own purposes, so that a person is free to the extent that they are actually able to determine and pursue their own life; and the shift from the first conception to the second is what transformed classical liberalism into modern liberalism and what supplies the theoretical basis for the welfare state.

The two conceptions

The classic statement of the distinction is Isaiah Berlin's, in a lecture of 1958, and it is put as two different questions.

Negative liberty answers: what is the area within which I am left to do what I want, without interference by others?

Positive liberty answers: who or what is the source of control that determines what I do?

They are not opposites and they are not two names for one thing. They are answers to different questions, and a person can have a great deal of one and almost none of the other.

Negative liberty

Freedom is the absence of obstacles placed by other people. A prisoner is unfree because a person locks the door. A person who cannot fly is not unfree, because no one is preventing them.

Its characteristic questions. How wide is the area? Who may narrow it, and on what justification?

Its characteristic institutions. Rights against the state, limits on power, the requirement that restrictions be justified.

Its advocates. Hobbes, Locke, Bentham, Mill and Berlin himself, who thought this the safer conception.

Its blind spot. It counts only obstacles that people put there. A person who is starving, illiterate and ill is, on this conception, perfectly free, because nobody is stopping them.

Positive liberty

Freedom is the capacity to act on one's own purposes. It has two related senses, and separating them is what makes an answer good.

Freedom as capacity. Having the means, education, health and resources to do the things one has a formal right to do. This is Green's sense at chapter 400.

Freedom as self-mastery. Being governed by one's own reason rather than by impulse, addiction, ignorance or manipulation. This is the older philosophical sense, and it is where the trouble starts.

Its characteristic questions. What can this person actually do? What prevents them?

Contents This chapter on its own page

munotes.in302

The rest of this chapter comes with the notes. See the prices

Chapter Sixty

Liberalism: The Arguments For and Against

Syllabus topic 3.1.1, "Arguments in Favour and Against"

In one line

Liberalism is defended as the only doctrine that takes each person seriously and the only one that has reliably limited power, and it is attacked from four directions: for producing atomised individuals, for protecting formal freedoms while ignoring real ones, for pretending to be neutral when it is not, and for exporting a Western model as though it were universal.

In the wording a student can write in an exam: liberalism is supported on the grounds that it protects the individual against arbitrary power, that it alone has produced constitutional and limited government, that toleration is the only workable arrangement in a plural society, and that free discussion is the condition of finding out anything; and it is criticised by conservatives for dissolving the social fabric, by socialists for protecting formal liberties while permitting substantive inequality, by communitarians and feminists for resting on an abstract individual who does not exist, and by postcolonial critics for universalising a particular Western experience.

The arguments in favour

1. It protects the individual against power. The historical record is the strongest thing liberalism has. The institutions that actually limit governments, constitutions, enforceable rights, independent courts, free elections, a free press, are liberal in origin, and they exist in no other tradition in that combination.

2. It takes each person seriously. On no other account is it true that a person may not be sacrificed for a larger benefit. Utilitarianism permits it, chapter 660 shows how, and collective doctrines permit it more readily.

3. It is the only workable arrangement in a plural society. Where people disagree deeply about religion and about how to live, the alternatives to toleration are suppression or civil conflict. India, with several religions, many languages and a deep caste hierarchy, is the case that makes the argument concrete rather than abstract.

4. Free discussion is how anything is found out. Mill's argument at chapter 610: a silenced opinion may be true; if false it may contain part of the truth; and even a wholly false opinion keeps a true one from becoming dead dogma.

5. It is self-correcting. Liberalism's own commitments to criticism and to evidence let it change, which is what the shift to modern liberalism at chapter 580 actually was. Ideologies that treat their own doctrine as settled cannot do that.

6. It has delivered. The societies that adopted liberal constitutional arrangements have generally produced higher standards of living, longer lives, and fewer people killed by their own governments than those that did not. That is a claim about the record, and it is the argument that persuades people who are unmoved by the philosophy.

The arguments against

From conservatism

It dissolves the fabric it depends on. Liberalism inherits a society held together by family, religion, custom and shared obligation, treats all of these as optional attachments, and then relies on the social trust they produced. Chapter 360's Burke is the classical statement.

Contents This chapter on its own page

munotes.in308

The rest of this chapter comes with the notes. See the prices

Chapter Sixty-One

J. S. Mill on Liberty: The Harm Principle

Syllabus topic 3.1.2, "J.S Mill views on Liberty - Influence on Indian Constitution"

In one line

Mill says the only reason for which power may rightfully be used against a person against their will is to prevent harm to others, and that their own good is never a sufficient reason.

In the wording a student can write in an exam: the object of Mill's essay is to assert one very simple principle as entitled to govern absolutely the dealings of society with the individual by way of compulsion and control, whether by legal penalty or by the moral coercion of public opinion, namely that the sole end for which mankind are warranted in interfering with the liberty of action of any of their number is self-protection, and that the only purpose for which power can rightfully be exercised over any member of a civilised community against his will is to prevent harm to others.

The principle, in Mill's own words

Mill states it in a single passage and it repays reading slowly.

The object of the essay, he says, is to assert one very simple principle, entitled to govern absolutely the dealings of society with the individual in the way of compulsion and control, whether the means used be physical force in the form of legal penalties, or the moral coercion of public opinion.

That principle is that the sole end for which mankind are warranted, individually or collectively, in interfering with the liberty of action of any of their number is self-protection; that the only purpose for which power can be rightfully exercised over any member of a civilised community, against his will, is to prevent harm to others.

His own good, either physical or moral, is not a sufficient warrant. A person cannot rightfully be compelled to do or forbear because it will be better for him to do so, because it will make him happier, or because in the opinion of others it would be wise or even right. These, Mill says, are good reasons for remonstrating with him, or reasoning with him, or persuading him, or entreating him, but not for compelling him or visiting him with any evil in case he does otherwise.

And the conclusion: in the part of his conduct which merely concerns himself, his independence is of right absolute. Over himself, over his own body and mind, the individual is sovereign.

What each part of that is doing

"One very simple principle." Mill is offering a single test, not a list of protected activities. That is what makes it usable.

"Compulsion and control ... or the moral coercion of public opinion." The principle limits society and not only the state. Mill was as worried about social pressure, respectability and the tyranny of majority opinion as about law, and in some passages more so, because law can be resisted in court and opinion cannot.

Contents This chapter on its own page

munotes.in314

The rest of this chapter comes with the notes. See the prices

Chapter Sixty-Two

Mill's Influence on the Indian Constitution

Syllabus topic 3.1.2, "J.S Mill views on Liberty - Influence on Indian Constitution"

In one line

The Indian Constitution takes Mill's structure, freedoms first and restrictions requiring justification, and then permits restrictions on grounds Mill's principle would not allow.

In the wording a student can write in an exam: Mill's influence on the Indian Constitution is structural rather than textual: article 19 confers the freedoms of speech, assembly, association, movement, residence and occupation on all citizens and permits the State to restrict them only by law and only by reasonable restrictions imposed for stated purposes, which places the burden of justification on the State exactly as Mill's principle requires; but the stated purposes include public order, decency or morality, defamation and contempt of court, which are grounds wider than harm to others, so the Constitution adopts Mill's method and departs from his test.

What article 19 actually says

Clause (1) confers on all citizens the right (a) to freedom of speech and expression; (b) to assemble peaceably and without arms; (c) to form associations or unions, and since 2012 co-operative societies; (d) to move freely throughout the territory of India; (e) to reside and settle in any part of the territory of India; and (g) to practise any profession, or to carry on any occupation, trade or business.

Sub-clause (f), the right to acquire, hold and dispose of property, was omitted by the Constitution (Forty-fourth Amendment) Act 1978 with effect from 20 June 1979, and property became a constitutional right under article 300A instead. That removal is itself the classical to modern liberal shift of chapter 580, made in the text.

Clause (2) permits reasonable restrictions on freedom of speech and expression in the interests of the sovereignty and integrity of India, the security of the State, friendly relations with foreign States, public order, decency or morality, or in relation to contempt of court, defamation or incitement to an offence. The words "sovereignty and integrity of India" were inserted by the Sixteenth Amendment in 1963, and the clause as a whole was substituted with retrospective effect by the First Amendment in 1951.

Clause (3) permits reasonable restrictions on assembly in the interests of the sovereignty and integrity of India or public order.

Clause (4) permits reasonable restrictions on association in the interests of the sovereignty and integrity of India, public order or morality.

Clause (5) permits reasonable restrictions on movement and residence in the interests of the general public or for the protection of the interests of any Scheduled Tribe.

Clause (6) permits reasonable restrictions on profession, occupation, trade or business in the interests of the general public.

What is Millian about it

The structure is exactly Mill's. The freedom is stated first and without qualification; the power to restrict is an exception; and the exception must be justified. That is the arrangement Mill's principle demands, and it is not the only arrangement a constitution could have adopted.

Contents This chapter on its own page

munotes.in320

The rest of this chapter comes with the notes. See the prices

Chapter Sixty-Three

Utilitarianism: Meaning and Basic Principles

Syllabus topic 3.2, "Utilitarianism"; 3.2.1, "Meaning and Definition, Basic Principles, Arguments in Favour and Against."

In one line

Utilitarianism says the right action is the one that produces the most happiness, counting everybody's happiness equally, and nothing else matters at all.

In the wording a student can write in an exam: utilitarianism is the moral and political doctrine that the rightness of an action, a law or an institution is determined solely by its consequences for the happiness of all those affected, the standard being the greatest happiness of the greatest number, each person's happiness counting equally; its distinguishing features are therefore consequentialism, hedonism, aggregation and impartiality.

The principle of utility

Bentham defines the principle of utility as that principle which approves or disapproves of every action whatsoever according to the tendency it appears to have to augment or diminish the happiness of the party whose interest is in question. He notes that the principle was latterly called the greatest happiness principle, and Mill uses that name.

Mill's own observation about how widely it operates is worth having: since men's sentiments of approval and aversion are greatly influenced by what they suppose to be the effects of things on their happiness, the principle of utility has had a large share in forming the moral doctrines even of those who most scornfully reject its authority, and no school of thought denies that the influence of actions on happiness is a material and often predominant consideration.

The four components

The meaning of utilitarianism is exhausted by four propositions, and any definition of utilitarianism that drops one of them is describing something else.

Every question on utilitarianism can be answered by taking these apart, because every criticism attacks one of them.

1. Consequentialism

The rightness of an act depends entirely on its consequences. Nothing about the act itself, no promise given, no right violated, no duty owed, counts except through its effects.

What this excludes. Desert, rights, promises and duties as independent considerations. They matter only if and so far as respecting them produces good consequences.

2. Hedonism, or welfarism

The consequence that counts is happiness, understood by Bentham as pleasure and the absence of pain. Later utilitarians substituted preference satisfaction or wellbeing, which avoids some objections and keeps the structure.

3. Aggregation

The happiness of everybody affected is added together, and the option with the largest total is the right one. Gains to some are offset against losses to others.

What this permits. Imposing a loss on a few to produce a larger gain for many, which is the source of nearly every objection at chapter 660.

4. Impartiality

Each person's happiness counts equally. Bentham's formula, as reported by Mill, is that everybody is to count for one and nobody for more than one.

The fourth component is why utilitarianism was a radical doctrine and not a conservative one. In a society organised by rank, caste, sex and property, the proposition that a labourer's pain counts exactly as much as a landowner's was an attack on the whole arrangement, and Bentham's followers used it to argue for legal reform, prison reform, the extension of the franchise and the equal treatment of women.

Contents This chapter on its own page

munotes.in325

The rest of this chapter comes with the notes. See the prices

Chapter Sixty-Four

Bentham's Utilitarianism and the Felicific Calculus

Syllabus topic 3.2.1, "Jeremy Bentham's Views"

In one line

Bentham says pleasure and pain govern everything we do and everything we ought to do, and that morals and legislation can therefore be put on a footing as exact as arithmetic.

In the wording a student can write in an exam: Bentham holds that nature has placed mankind under the governance of two sovereign masters, pain and pleasure, which alone point out what we ought to do and determine what we shall do; that the principle of utility, which approves or disapproves of every action according to its tendency to augment or diminish happiness, is therefore the only defensible standard of right and wrong; and that the value of any pleasure or pain can be estimated by seven measurable dimensions, so that legislation can be made a matter of calculation rather than of custom, sentiment or authority.

The opening, in Bentham's own words

The first sentence of chapter I is the whole doctrine compressed.

Nature has placed mankind under the governance of two sovereign masters, pain and pleasure. It is for them alone to point out what we ought to do, as well as to determine what we shall do. On the one hand the standard of right and wrong, on the other the chain of causes and effects, are fastened to their throne. They govern us in all we do, in all we say, in all we think; every effort we can make to throw off our subjection will serve but to demonstrate and confirm it. In words a man may pretend to abjure their empire, but in reality he will remain subject to it all the while.

Two claims are packed into that and they must be separated, because a student who runs them together cannot answer the standard objection.

A psychological claim. People are in fact moved by pleasure and pain. This is psychological hedonism.

A moral claim. Pleasure and pain are also the standard of right and wrong. This is ethical hedonism.

The standard objection is that the second does not follow from the first: that people are moved by something does not show it is what they ought to pursue. That is the naturalistic objection and Bentham does not answer it.

What Bentham was against

His doctrine is best understood by what he rejected, and each rejection is a target he names.

Natural rights. Bentham regarded them as nonsense, and imprescriptible natural rights as nonsense upon stilts. A right, for him, is the creature of law: to say that a right exists before any law confers it is to mistake what one wants for what is.

The social contract. A fiction. What the state actually rests on is the habit of obedience, and the question is whether obedience produces more happiness than resistance.

Contents This chapter on its own page

munotes.in330

The rest of this chapter comes with the notes. See the prices

Chapter Sixty-Five

J. S. Mill's Modification of Benthamite Utilitarianism

Syllabus topic 3.2.1, "J.S Mill's Modification of Benthamite Utilitarianism"

In one line

Mill accepted Bentham's principle and added that pleasures differ in kind as well as in amount, that the judges of which kind is better are those who know both, and that individual liberty and justice must be protected even by a utilitarian.

In the wording a student can write in an exam: Mill modified Bentham's utilitarianism in four respects: he introduced a distinction between higher and lower pleasures, holding that quality as well as quantity is to be considered and that the test of quality is the decided preference of those who have experience of both; he broadened happiness beyond sensation to include the development of the higher faculties; he grounded individual liberty in a principle of its own; and he treated justice and rights as founded on the most vital of all interests, security, so that they may not be traded away against ordinary gains.

The problem Mill was answering

Bentham's doctrine had been attacked as a pig philosophy: if pleasure is the only good and pleasures differ only in quantity, then a life of simple sensual satisfaction is as good as any other provided the quantity is equal, and the doctrine is fit for swine rather than for human beings.

Mill's answer is the first and most famous of the modifications, and he begins by conceding that the objection would be fatal if the premise were true and then denying the premise.

The first modification: quality of pleasures

Mill's own statement. It is, he says, quite compatible with the principle of utility to recognise the fact that some kinds of pleasure are more desirable and more valuable than others. It would be absurd, he adds, that while in estimating all other things quality is considered as well as quantity, the estimation of pleasures should be supposed to depend on quantity alone.

The test of quality, which is what students most often leave out. If asked what makes one pleasure more valuable than another merely as a pleasure, he says there is but one possible answer: of two pleasures, if there is one to which all or almost all who have experience of both give a decided preference, irrespective of any feeling of moral obligation to prefer it, that is the more desirable pleasure.

The judges. Those qualified by knowledge of both, or, if they differ, the majority among them, and Mill calls their verdict that of the only competent judges, from which he says there can be no appeal. He adds a point that is often missed: there is the less hesitation in accepting this judgment about quality, since there is no other tribunal to be referred to even on the question of quantity.

Contents This chapter on its own page

munotes.in336

The rest of this chapter comes with the notes. See the prices

Chapter Sixty-Six

Utilitarianism: The Arguments For and Against

Syllabus topic 3.2.1, "Arguments in Favour and Against."

In one line

Utilitarianism is defended because it is simple, impartial, secular, practical and demanding, and it is attacked because counting only the total permits sacrificing a person, and because it can require you to do what everybody knows is monstrous.

In the wording a student can write in an exam: utilitarianism is supported on the grounds that it supplies a single, clear and secular standard applicable to any question, that it counts every person equally and so has been a force for reform, that it takes consequences seriously where rival theories do not, and that it is the working method of modern public policy; and it is criticised on the grounds that consequences cannot be predicted or measured, that pleasure is not the only good, that aggregation permits the sacrifice of individuals and ignores distribution, that it leaves no room for rights, promises, desert or special obligations, and that it is impartial to the point of being inhuman.

The arguments in favour

1. It has a single clear standard. One question, applicable to any decision, from a sentencing hearing to a highway alignment. No rival theory offers anything so usable.

2. It is impartial. Everybody counts for one and nobody for more than one, which is what made it an instrument of reform against rank, caste, sex and property, at chapter 630.

3. It is secular and public. Its reasons can be stated to anybody, without appeal to revelation, tradition or authority, which matters most in a society of several religions.

4. It takes consequences seriously. A theory that says a thing must be done though the heavens fall is not obviously superior to one that asks what will happen if they do. Insisting on a rule when following it produces avoidable suffering requires a justification, and utilitarianism at least demands one.

5. It is demanding, not permissive. Because one's own happiness counts for exactly one, the doctrine constantly requires personal sacrifice for others, and it is among the most exacting positions in ethics.

6. It is the working method of public policy. Cost benefit analysis, health measures such as quality adjusted life years, environmental impact assessment and every scheme evaluated by beneficiaries against cost are utilitarianism in operation, and a government has to make comparisons of exactly this kind.

7. It is progressive by construction. Because nothing is exempt from the question, no institution is protected by its age, which is the answer to prescription at chapter 360.

The arguments against, by which component they attack

Attacking consequentialism

Consequences cannot be known. Every calculation runs into the future, and effects ramify indefinitely. A decision maker knows a little about the near consequences and almost nothing about the remote ones.

Contents This chapter on its own page

munotes.in342

The rest of this chapter comes with the notes. See the prices

Chapter Sixty-Seven

Sarvodaya, Compared With Utilitarianism

Syllabus topic 3.2.1, "Comparison to Sarvodaya (Specified)"

In one line

Utilitarianism seeks the greatest good of the greatest number; Sarvodaya seeks the good of all, and Gandhi's objection is that the first will always be willing to sacrifice somebody and the second never is.

In the wording a student can write in an exam: Sarvodaya, meaning the rise or welfare of all, is Gandhi's social ideal, according to which the object of social and political arrangements is the good of every member of society without exception, beginning with the last and weakest, which he called Antyodaya; it is contrasted with utilitarianism, which seeks the greatest happiness of the greatest number and therefore accepts, in principle, the sacrifice of a minority whenever the aggregate is thereby increased.

The word and its source

Sarvodaya is formed from sarva, all, and udaya, rise or uplift: the rise of all.

Gandhi coined it as the title of his 1908 paraphrase in Gujarati of John Ruskin's Unto This Last, a book he read on a train journey in South Africa and which he said changed his life. He drew three lessons from it, and the first two are exactly the point of this chapter.

That the good of the individual is contained in the good of all.

That a lawyer's work has the same value as a barber's, since all have the same right of earning their livelihood from their work.

That the life of labour, that is, of the tiller of the soil and the handicraftsman, is the life worth living.

Notice that the first lesson is a denial of the very structure utilitarianism assumes. Utilitarianism assumes individual goods that can conflict and must be traded off. Gandhi's premise is that they cannot ultimately conflict, because one person's good is not separable from everybody's.

Antyodaya, and why it is the operative principle

Antyodaya means the rise of the last, and it is Gandhi's practical test.

His own formulation of it, often called the talisman, is a rule for decision: when in doubt, recall the face of the poorest and weakest person you have seen, and ask whether the step you contemplate will be of any use to them, whether it will restore to them control over their own life and destiny.

Why this is more than a sentiment. It is a decision rule, and it is the opposite of aggregation. Aggregation asks what the total is; Antyodaya asks what happens to the person at the bottom. A scheme that raises the total while leaving the poorest exactly where they were fails the test and passes the calculus.

The resemblance to Rawls is worth noticing and is a strong point in an answer. Rawls's difference principle permits inequalities only where they work to the greatest benefit of the least advantaged, which is a very similar structure arrived at from an entirely different direction.

Contents This chapter on its own page

munotes.in348

The rest of this chapter comes with the notes. See the prices

Chapter Sixty-Eight

Socialism: Meaning and Basic Principles

Syllabus topic 3.3, "Socialism"; 3.3.1, "Meaning and Definition, Basic Principles, Arguments in Favour and Against."

In one line

Socialism is the belief that human beings are cooperative rather than competitive by nature, that the great inequalities of a market society are produced by its institutions rather than by nature, and that production should be owned or controlled in common.

In the wording a student can write in an exam: socialism is the political ideology which holds that human beings are social by nature and cooperative rather than essentially competitive; that the inequalities of wealth and power in a market society arise from its institutions, and in particular from the private ownership of the means of production, rather than from unequal natural endowments; and that the remedy is the common ownership or social control of productive resources, together with distribution according to need, so as to secure equality, community and the fullest development of every person.

The word and its target

Socialism entered political use in the 1820s and 1830s, in England and France, as the name for a set of criticisms of the society that industrialisation had produced.

What it was formed against. Not feudalism, which liberalism had already attacked, but the new industrial order: large scale production, a propertyless working population, extreme inequality, insecurity of employment, and the doctrine that the market's outcomes were natural and beyond criticism.

This matters for the comparison with liberalism at chapter 570. Liberalism was a doctrine of a rising commercial class against aristocratic privilege. Socialism was a doctrine of a working population against the commercial order that liberalism had helped to create. They are successive answers to different enemies, which is why the second takes so much of the first for granted.

The basic principles

1. Community

Human beings are social creatures, bound together by a common humanity, and are best understood by reference to the groups and communities they belong to rather than as separate individuals. This is the direct denial of liberal individualism at chapter 570 and everything else follows from it.

2. Cooperation

People are naturally disposed to work together, and competition sets them against each other and wastes their capacities. Cooperation, socialists argue, moralises the individual and is also more efficient, since it removes duplication and the costs of conflict.

3. Equality

The central socialist value, and it is not equality of opportunity. Socialists argue that formal equality of opportunity is worthless where starting positions differ, and press instead for equality of outcome, or, in more moderate versions, the reduction of inequality to a level compatible with a common life.

Their argument for it. That inequality is largely produced by unequal circumstances rather than by unequal natural talent; that it is unjust to reward what a person did not earn; that inequality corrodes community; and that political equality cannot survive severe economic inequality.

Contents This chapter on its own page

munotes.in354

The rest of this chapter comes with the notes. See the prices

Chapter Sixty-Nine

The Kinds of Socialism

Syllabus topic 3.3.1, "Basic Principles"

In one line

Socialism is a family of doctrines that agree about what is wrong and disagree about how far to go and how to get there, and naming the branch you are discussing is the first requirement of a good answer.

In the wording a student can write in an exam: socialism divides principally into utopian and scientific socialism, a distinction drawn by Engels; into revolutionary socialism, which holds that the existing order must be overthrown, and evolutionary or democratic socialism, which holds that it can be transformed by constitutional means; and into further varieties distinguished by what is to be owned and by whom, including state socialism, Fabian socialism, guild socialism, syndicalism, market socialism and, in India, Gandhian socialism.

Utopian and scientific socialism

This is Engels's own distinction, drawn in a work whose title states it.

Utopian socialism describes the early socialists, chiefly Saint-Simon, Fourier and Robert Owen, who denounced the injustice of the new industrial order, designed model communities and appealed to the reason and the benevolence of the rich to bring them about.

Engels's criticism is not that they were wrong about the injustice but about the method. They treated socialism as a good idea that had merely to be explained persuasively, they appealed to all classes indifferently, and they did not see that the transformation depended on the development of the productive forces and on the class that industrial production had itself created.

Scientific socialism is Engels's name for the Marxist alternative: socialism derived from an analysis of the actual development of capitalism and of the class relations within it, rather than from an ideal invented in someone's head.

The word scientific should be handled carefully in an answer. It is a claim, not a description: the claim that the analysis is derived from observable historical development rather than from moral preference. Whether it is scientific in any stricter sense is exactly what critics dispute, and Popper's objection, that a theory which can accommodate any outcome is not testable, is directed at it.

Revolutionary and evolutionary socialism

The most important division in practice, and the one that produced the split between socialists and communists in the twentieth century.

Revolutionary socialism holds that the state is an instrument of the owning class, that it will not be surrendered by consent, and that a fundamental change of ownership therefore requires the existing order to be overthrown. Marx and Engels in most of their writing, Lenin definitively.

Evolutionary, democratic or parliamentary socialism holds that where there is universal suffrage the working class is a majority and can achieve its ends by winning elections, so that a revolution is unnecessary and, in a constitutional state, wrong. Eduard Bernstein's revisionism is the classical statement, and every social democratic party in the world is its descendant.

Contents This chapter on its own page

munotes.in359

The rest of this chapter comes with the notes. See the prices

Chapter Seventy

Socialism: The Arguments For and Against

Syllabus topic 3.3.1, "Arguments in Favour and Against."

In one line

Socialism is defended because it identifies inequality as a product of institutions rather than of nature and proposes to change the institutions, and it is attacked because common ownership destroys the information and the incentives a modern economy runs on, and because the power required to bring it about is dangerous to hold.

In the wording a student can write in an exam: socialism is supported on the grounds that its account of the causes of inequality is more accurate than the liberal one, that formal freedom without material means is empty, that cooperation is both more humane and more efficient than competition, and that its record in producing welfare states, labour protection and public services is substantial; and it is criticised on the grounds that central planning cannot solve the problem of economic information, that common ownership destroys incentives, that the concentration of economic and political power in one set of hands threatens liberty, and that its account of human motivation is over-optimistic.

The arguments in favour

1. Its diagnosis is accurate. The claim that inequality is largely produced by institutions rather than by differences of natural talent is supported by the evidence that outcomes correlate far more strongly with the circumstances of birth than with anything a person did. That is a factual claim and it is the strongest thing socialism has.

2. Formal freedom without means is empty. Chapter 600 showed that this criticism of liberalism was strong enough to change liberalism itself.

3. Cooperation is undervalued. A great deal of what is most valuable is produced cooperatively, and the competitive model both misdescribes it and damages it.

4. Markets fail, systematically and predictably. Monopoly, information asymmetry, external harms such as pollution, public goods that nobody has an incentive to provide, and the exploitation of unequal bargaining power are not accidents but structural features, and each is a reason for collective provision or control.

5. Political equality does not survive economic inequality. Equal votes coexist with grossly unequal influence over what is decided, which is chapter 60's structural power and chapter 840's ethical decay.

6. Its record is substantial. The eight hour day, the prohibition of child labour, workplace safety, social insurance, public health services, universal schooling, pensions and paid leave were won by socialist and labour movements against opposition, and are now so completely accepted that their origin is forgotten.

7. It supplies an answer utilitarianism cannot. Because it attends to distribution rather than to totals, it addresses the defect chapter 660 identified as decisive.

The arguments against

The economic calculation problem

The most serious objection, and an answer that gives it properly is a strong answer. It is due to Mises and Hayek and it is not an objection about incentives.

Contents This chapter on its own page

munotes.in364

The rest of this chapter comes with the notes. See the prices

Chapter Seventy-One

Socialism's Influence on the Indian Constitution

Syllabus topic 3.3.1, "Influence on Indian Constitution"

In one line

The Indian Constitution was socialist in inspiration before the word was inserted and became explicitly socialist in 1976, but the word operates as a direction to the State and an aid to interpretation rather than as a rule that overrides rights.

In the wording a student can write in an exam: socialism influenced the Indian Constitution through the Directive Principles of State Policy, which direct the State to minimise inequalities of income, status, facilities and opportunities, to distribute the material resources of the community to subserve the common good, and to prevent the concentration of wealth to the common detriment; through the insertion of the word socialist in the Preamble by the Constitution (Forty-second Amendment) Act 1976; and through the removal of property from the fundamental rights by the Forty-fourth Amendment; but the Supreme Court has held that the word does not authorise the State to disregard the interests of private owners, while also treating it as a legitimate and effective aid to the construction of legislation and executive action.

Where socialism entered

Before the Constitution. The demand was made inside the national movement long before independence. The Karachi resolution of the Indian National Congress in 1931, on fundamental rights and economic policy, set out obligations about a living wage, limited hours, protection against sickness and old age, and state ownership or control of key industries, and it is the ancestor of Part IV.

In the Constituent Assembly. A proposal to describe India as socialist in the Preamble was made and was not accepted at the time, on the view that the economic structure was a matter for the people to decide from time to time and should not be fixed by the Constitution. That refusal is worth knowing, because it shows the 1976 insertion was a change and not a clarification.

What was adopted instead was Part IV, which is socialist in substance without using the word.

The Directive Principles

The provisions that carry the socialist content, and an answer should be able to name them.

Article 38 requires the State to secure a social order in which justice, social, economic and political, shall inform all the institutions of national life, and, by the clause added in 1978, to minimise inequalities in income, and to endeavour to eliminate inequalities in status, facilities and opportunities, not only among individuals but also among groups.

Article 39 directs that the State shall in particular direct its policy towards securing that citizens have an adequate means of livelihood; that the ownership and control of the material resources of the community are so distributed as best to subserve the common good; that the operation of the economic system does not result in the concentration of wealth and means of production to the common detriment; equal pay for equal work for men and women; that the health and strength of workers is not abused and that they are not forced by economic necessity into unsuited occupations; and that children are given opportunities to develop in conditions of freedom and dignity.

Contents This chapter on its own page

munotes.in369

The rest of this chapter comes with the notes. See the prices

Chapter Seventy-Two

Communism: The Basic Principles

Syllabus topic 3.4, "Communism"; 3.4.1, "Basic Principles and Evaluation of Communism"

In one line

Communism says that history is driven by the conflict between classes created by who owns the means of production, that capitalism produces the class which will end it, and that the result is a society without classes, without private ownership of production, and eventually without a state.

In the wording a student can write in an exam: communism is the political and economic ideology, derived from Marx and Engels, which holds that the history of all hitherto existing society is the history of class struggles; that the mode of production of material life conditions the social, political and intellectual life of a society; that capitalism produces its own gravedigger in the proletariat; that the proletariat must capture political power and abolish private ownership of the means of production; and that the outcome is a classless and stateless society distributing according to the principle from each according to his ability, to each according to his needs.

The seven principles

1. Historical materialism

The foundation. The way a society produces its material life, that is, its technology and its relations of ownership, conditions its social, political and intellectual life. Ideas, law, religion and morality form a superstructure on an economic base, and change in the base produces change in the superstructure.

What follows. History is not driven by ideas, by great men or by accident. It is driven by the development of the productive forces and by the conflict this produces with existing relations of ownership.

2. Class struggle

The Manifesto's opening proposition, that the history of all hitherto existing society is the history of class struggles, freeman and slave, patrician and plebeian, lord and serf, in a word oppressor and oppressed, standing in constant opposition to one another. Under capitalism the classes have been simplified into two: bourgeoisie and proletariat.

3. The analysis of capitalism

Labour theory of value. The value of a commodity derives from the socially necessary labour required to produce it.

Surplus value. The worker is paid the value of their labour power, that is, what it costs to reproduce it, and produces more value than that. The difference is surplus value, appropriated by the owner. This is Marx's account of exploitation, and it is a structural claim rather than an accusation about wage rates: it holds even where wages are generous and the employer is decent.

Alienation. Under this system the worker is estranged from the product of their labour, which belongs to another; from the act of working, which is imposed and unfulfilling; from their own human capacities; and from other people, who become competitors.

Concentration and crisis. Capital concentrates in fewer hands, small producers are driven into the proletariat, and the system produces recurrent crises of overproduction.

Contents This chapter on its own page

munotes.in375

The rest of this chapter comes with the notes. See the prices

Chapter Seventy-Three

An Evaluation of Communism

Syllabus topic 3.4.1, "Basic Principles and Evaluation of Communism"

In one line

Communism produced the most powerful analysis of how economic power shapes politics that anybody has written, and the states built on it destroyed the liberty it promised and failed at the economics it claimed to have solved.

In the wording a student can write in an exam: communism is to be evaluated on two levels, as an analysis and as a programme; as an analysis it made permanent contributions in showing that economic structure shapes law, politics and ideas, that formal equality can coexist with substantive domination, and that class is a real determinant of political outcomes; as a programme it failed, because the abolition of markets in the means of production destroyed the information the economy required, because the dictatorship of the proletariat became the dictatorship of a party, and because the state did not wither but grew.

What is right in it

1. The relation between economic structure and politics. That who owns and who works shapes the law, the political arrangements and the prevailing ideas of a society is now so widely accepted that its origin is forgotten. Every study of the influence of money on legislation, of who is prosecuted, of whose interests are consulted, is doing work Marx made available.

2. Formal equality can coexist with substantive domination. Chapter 530's structural argument about punishment, and chapter 600's socialist criticism of liberalism, are both Marxist in ancestry.

3. Class is real. Whatever else determines political behaviour, the position a person occupies in the production of goods affects their interests and their opportunities, and a political science that ignores it explains less.

4. Alienation. The account of work under industrial conditions, that a worker may be estranged from the product, from the act of working and from their own capacities, describes something that other traditions did not describe at all.

5. Ideology. The claim that prevailing ideas serve the interests of those who prevail is now a standard tool of analysis, and Gramsci's hegemony is its most useful form.

6. It compelled the reform of its opponent. Much of the twentieth century's labour legislation, social insurance and public provision was enacted by liberal and conservative governments who preferred reform to the alternative, and this is a real effect that an evaluation should count.

7. And in India, a specific achievement. Land reform in Kerala and West Bengal is the most substantial redistribution of land carried out anywhere in India, done by communist State governments through legislation within a constitutional democracy.

What is wrong in it

As economics

The calculation problem, from chapter 700. The abolition of markets in the means of production destroys the mechanism that generates the information about scarcity, want and cost, and no planner can collect it because it does not exist in collectible form. This is the decisive economic objection and it applies to honest and benevolent planners.

Contents This chapter on its own page

munotes.in381

The rest of this chapter comes with the notes. See the prices

Chapter Seventy-Four

Socialism and Communism Compared

Syllabus topic 3.4.2, "Comparative Study of Socialism and Communism (Specified)"

In one line

Communism and democratic socialism want a great deal of the same thing and disagree completely about how far to go and how to get there, and the disagreement about method is the one that has mattered.

In the wording a student can write in an exam: socialism and communism share the analysis that inequality is produced by the private ownership of the means of production and that production should be commonly owned or controlled, but they differ in the extent of common ownership sought, communism requiring the abolition of private ownership of production altogether while socialism in its democratic forms accepts a mixed economy; in method, communism holding that revolution is necessary because the owning class controls the state while democratic socialism works through elections and legislation; and in their attitude to the state, communism treating it as an instrument of class rule which will eventually wither away while democratic socialism treats it as a machine that can be captured and used.

First, which socialism

In Marxist usage socialism is the lower stage of communism, described at chapter 720: social ownership, classes abolished, distribution according to work contributed, the state withering. On that usage the comparison is between two stages of one process and the differences are of degree.

In ordinary political usage, and in this chapter unless otherwise stated, socialism means the wider family at chapter 690, most of whose branches reject revolution and accept a mixed economy. On that usage the comparison is between two ideologies, and the differences are fundamental.

An answer should open by saying this. It is the difference between a good answer and a confused one, and it takes two sentences.

What they agree about

The diagnosis. That the great inequalities of a market society are produced by its institutions and by private ownership of the means of production rather than by unequal natural talent.

That production should be commonly owned or socially controlled, though they disagree about how much and by whom.

That formal freedom without material means is empty.

That work should be a source of fulfilment rather than a commodity.

That the interests of the working population should be the object of policy, and both are movements that speak for it.

Where they differ

1. How far common ownership goes

Communism requires the abolition of private ownership of the means of production altogether.

Democratic socialism in practice has settled for a mixed economy: some sectors public, the rest private and regulated, with redistribution through taxation.

2. Method

The decisive difference.

Communism holds that the owning class controls the state, the law and the prevailing ideas, so it will not permit its own expropriation, and revolution is therefore necessary.

Contents This chapter on its own page

munotes.in386

The rest of this chapter comes with the notes. See the prices

Chapter Seventy-Five

Gandhism and Communism Compared

Syllabus topic 3.4.3, "Comparative Study of Gandhism and Communism (Specified)"

In one line

Gandhism and communism agree that the present arrangement of wealth is indefensible and disagree about almost everything else: about violence, about the state, about industry, about property, and about whether means and ends can be separated.

In the wording a student can write in an exam: Gandhism and communism share a rejection of the existing distribution of wealth, a concern for the poorest and a hostility to exploitation, but they differ fundamentally in that communism holds class conflict to be the motor of history and revolution the means of change, while Gandhism holds that means and ends are inseparable and that non-violence is therefore obligatory; that communism seeks the abolition of private property in the means of production while Gandhism seeks its retention under trusteeship; that communism is industrial and centralising while Gandhism is agrarian and decentralising; and that communism is materialist while Gandhism is founded on a spiritual conception of the person.

What they agree about

An answer that begins with the agreements is stronger, because the disagreements are only interesting once the common ground is clear.

That the existing distribution of wealth is indefensible. Both regard extreme inequality as a wrong requiring change and not as a natural fact.

That exploitation is real. Gandhi's language is different, but his objection to the mill owner who grows rich on the labour of the poor is an objection to the same relation.

That the poorest are the point. Antyodaya and the proletariat's centrality are different formulations of the same priority.

That the existing order will not reform itself. Both regard the beneficiaries as unlikely to give up what they hold voluntarily, which is why Gandhi organised strikes as well as appealing to conscience.

Hostility to colonialism, and both movements treated imperial rule as an economic relation and not only a political one.

And a shared final image. Both look forward to a society without coercive authority: Gandhi's ideal of enlightened anarchy, in which everyone is their own ruler, and Engels's withering away of the state, are strikingly similar destinations reached by opposite roads.

Where they differ

1. Means and ends

The deepest difference, and every other one follows from it.

Communism is consequentialist about method. The transformation is the end, and the means are chosen for their effectiveness, so revolutionary violence is justified by what it achieves.

Gandhism holds that means and ends are inseparable, with the same connection between them as between the seed and the tree. A society reached through violence will be a violent society, so the doctrine that the end justifies the means is exactly what he rejects.

2. Violence

Communism treats violence as sometimes necessary, and in the classical account as the midwife of the new society.

Contents This chapter on its own page

munotes.in391

The rest of this chapter comes with the notes. See the prices

Module IV

Indian Democracy at Work

munotes.in

Chapter Seventy-Six

What a Political Party Is

Syllabus topic 4.1.1, "Political Parties -Meaning, differences between Political Parties andInterest Groups"

In one line

A political party is an organised group that seeks to capture governmental power through elections in order to carry out a programme, which is what separates it from every other kind of political organisation.

In the wording a student can write in an exam: a political party is an organised body of persons holding broadly similar political views who seek to obtain and exercise governmental power, ordinarily by contesting elections, in order to give effect to a programme; its defining features are organisation, a measure of ideological or programmatic coherence, the pursuit of governmental office rather than merely of influence, the claim to represent a national or general interest, and the acceptance of responsibility for governing.

The five features

1. Organisation. A structure, a membership, office bearers and a means of taking decisions. A crowd, a mood or a tendency is not a party.

2. Some coherence of views or programme. Not unanimity, which no large party has, but enough shared position for the party to mean something to a voter.

3. The pursuit of governmental power. The decisive feature. An interest group seeks to influence whoever governs; a party seeks to be the government.

4. A claim to speak for a general interest. A party asks for the votes of people whose interests differ, so it must present a programme for the whole and not for a section. This is why parties are broad and often internally inconsistent, and it is a consequence of the third feature rather than a defect.

5. The acceptance of responsibility. A party that wins must govern, must answer for what it does, and must face the electorate again. This is what disciplines it, and it is what an interest group never has to accept.

Where Indian law defines a party

The definition matters practically, because in India recognition confers real advantages, and a law student should know where the definitions sit.

Section 29A of the Representation of the People Act 1951 provides for the registration of political parties with the Election Commission. An association or body of individual citizens of India calling itself a political party applies to the Commission, and its memorandum or rules must contain a specific provision that it shall bear true faith and allegiance to the Constitution of India as by law established, and to the principles of socialism, secularism and democracy, and would uphold the sovereignty, unity and integrity of India.

Recognition as a State or a national party is a separate matter, governed by the Election Symbols (Reservation and Allotment) Order made by the Election Commission under article 324, and turns on performance at elections in terms of seats and vote share. Recognition brings a reserved symbol, free time on public broadcasting, and a larger number of proposers and star campaigners.

Contents This chapter on its own page

munotes.in397

The rest of this chapter comes with the notes. See the prices

Chapter Seventy-Seven

Political Parties and Interest Groups Distinguished

Syllabus topic 4.1.1, "differences between Political Parties andInterest Groups"

In one line

A party wants to be the government; an interest group wants to influence whoever the government is, and every other difference follows from that one.

In the wording a student can write in an exam: a political party seeks to capture governmental power by contesting elections and accepts responsibility for the whole range of policy and for governing, whereas an interest group seeks only to influence public policy in favour of the interest it represents, does not contest elections, takes no position on matters outside its concern, and accepts no responsibility for the consequences of what it demands.

The master difference

A party seeks office. A group seeks influence.

Every difference in the table is a consequence of this, and an answer that establishes it first and then derives the rest reads far better than one that lists ten unrelated differences.

Derive the consequences. Because a party seeks office it must contest elections; because it contests elections it must appeal beyond any single interest; because it appeals to everyone it must have a position on everything; because it may win it must accept responsibility; and because it may lose it is disciplined by the electorate. A group does none of these, and is therefore free to be single-minded, uncompromising and permanent in a way no party can be.

The differences

1. Object. Office against influence.

2. Elections. A party contests; a group does not, though it may support candidates, campaign on issues and mobilise voters.

3. Breadth of programme. A party must cover the whole of policy; a group covers its own concern and is silent elsewhere.

4. Membership. A party's membership is open and is meant to be as large as possible; a group's is defined by the interest, and in the case of a professional or sectional body may be closed.

5. Accountability. A party answers to the whole electorate at intervals; a group answers to its members alone, and to nobody else at all.

6. Responsibility. A party that wins must implement and must live with the consequences; a group may demand what it likes and is never asked to pay for it.

7. Continuity of position. A group can hold the same demand for fifty years; a party must adjust to remain electable, which is why groups regard parties as unprincipled and parties regard groups as unrealistic.

8. Legal status in India. A party registers under section 29A of the Representation of the People Act 1951, may be recognised under the Symbols Order, and binds its elected members through the Tenth Schedule. An interest group has no such status and no such power.

9. Compromise. A party is a machine for compromise, since it must hold together people who disagree; a group exists precisely in order not to compromise.

Contents This chapter on its own page

munotes.in402

The rest of this chapter comes with the notes. See the prices

Chapter Seventy-Eight

The Significance of Political Parties in India

Syllabus topic 4.1, "Significance of Political Parties in India"

In one line

Parties matter in India because the Constitution's machinery cannot work without them and because, since 1985, a party's direction binds the member it elected on pain of losing the seat.

In the wording a student can write in an exam: political parties are significant in India because the parliamentary executive depends on a stable legislative majority which only parties can supply; because the electorate's choice of a government is made through party labels rather than through individual candidates; because parties recruit almost the whole political leadership; because they organise the opposition without which accountability is impossible; and because, since the Constitution (Fifty-second Amendment) Act 1985 inserted the Tenth Schedule, a legislator who votes against the direction of the party that returned them may be disqualified, which converts party discipline from a convention into a rule of law.

What parties supply that the Constitution assumes

The Constitution as adopted did not mention parties and cannot work without them, and setting out why is the strongest opening an answer on this topic can have.

A government that commands confidence. The Council of Ministers is collectively responsible to the House and holds office only while it commands a majority. Without parties there is no way to assemble a stable majority from several hundred individuals, and no way for the electorate to know in advance who will govern.

A choice the voter can make. A voter chooses one candidate in one constituency and is in fact choosing a government. That is possible only because the candidate carries a party label that carries a programme and a prospective Prime Minister or Chief Minister.

An opposition. Scrutiny, questions, committee work and the readiness to take office all require an organised alternative, and only a party supplies it.

Leadership. Almost every person who holds ministerial office in India arrived through a party organisation.

Aggregation across an extraordinarily diverse country. A party seeking a majority in India must assemble support across languages, religions, castes and regions, and the necessity of doing so is itself a moderating force.

Continuity. Governments change and parties persist, so a programme can outlast a term.

The Tenth Schedule, which is where parties enter the law

What it does. The Constitution (Fifty-second Amendment) Act 1985 inserted the Tenth Schedule. Paragraph 2 disqualifies a member of either House of Parliament or of a State Legislature who voluntarily gives up membership of the party which set them up as a candidate, or who votes or abstains contrary to any direction issued by that party without prior permission and without being condoned within fifteen days. It also covers an independent who joins a party after the election, and a nominated member who joins one after six months. Paragraph 6 gives the decision on disqualification to the Speaker or Chairman and declares it final, and paragraph 7 purported to exclude the jurisdiction of all courts.

Contents This chapter on its own page

munotes.in407

The rest of this chapter comes with the notes. See the prices

Chapter Seventy-Nine

The Features of Political Parties in India

Syllabus topic 4.1.2, "Features of Political Parties in India"

In one line

Indian parties are numerous, internally undemocratic, organised as much around leaders, regions and communities as around ideology, dependent on money, and legally able to bind the members they elect.

In the wording a student can write in an exam: the features of political parties in India are a multi-party system with a very large number of registered parties; the coexistence of national and State parties; the prominence of regional, caste and community based parties; the personalisation of leadership and the prevalence of political families; weak internal democracy; ideological convergence with programmatic differences narrower than the rhetoric suggests; heavy dependence on money; and, since 1985, a legal power over their elected members through the Tenth Schedule.

The features

1. A multi-party system, with very many parties

India has a multi-party system in the strict sense: several parties are capable of winning seats and of participating in government. Alongside the recognised national and State parties there are a very large number of registered unrecognised parties, most of which never win anything.

The cause is the country's size and diversity together with a first past the post system that nonetheless rewards parties with geographically concentrated support, which regional and community parties have.

2. National and State parties

A structural feature written into the law. Recognition under the Election Symbols Order distinguishes national parties, State parties and registered unrecognised parties, by reference to seats won and vote share. The distinction is not merely descriptive: it determines the reserved symbol, broadcasting time and the number of star campaigners, and therefore affects who can compete.

3. Regional, caste and community parties

Regional parties have governed States for decades and have repeatedly held the balance in coalitions at the Union.

Caste and community based parties organise around a group's political mobilisation, which chapter 850 treats as one of the older challenges to Indian democracy and which is also, on another reading, a form of representation the older parties denied.

State the fact and both readings. A party organised around a community is a party whose appeal is sectional, which chapter 770 says a party cannot afford; and it is also how groups excluded from power for generations obtained it. Both are true.

4. Personalisation and political families

Many Indian parties are identified with a founder or a leader, and in several the leadership has passed within a family. This is a feature of parties across the spectrum and not of any one of them.

Why it matters. A party organised around a person has no mechanism for changing its leadership except the person's departure, which is Michels's oligarchy at chapter 100 in an Indian form.

5. Weak internal democracy

Internal elections are rare, and where they are held they are often uncontested. Candidates for public office are usually selected by a central committee or a leader rather than by the members in the constituency. There is no legal requirement of internal democracy beyond the requirements of registration.

Contents This chapter on its own page

munotes.in412

The rest of this chapter comes with the notes. See the prices

Chapter Eighty

Coalition Politics in India

Syllabus topic 4.1.3, "Coalition Politics and Future of Multi- Party System in India"

In one line

A coalition is a government formed by more than one party because no single party has a majority, and in India it has been the normal condition at the Union for long stretches and is the normal condition in many States.

In the wording a student can write in an exam: coalition politics is the practice by which two or more political parties combine, before or after an election, to form and sustain a government, because no single party commands a majority in the legislature; it becomes necessary in a multi-party system operating under a parliamentary constitution in which the Council of Ministers is collectively responsible to the House and must retain its confidence.

Why coalitions happen in India

The constitutional requirement. Under articles 75(3) and 164(2) the Council of Ministers is collectively responsible to the House of the People and to the Legislative Assembly of a State respectively. A government must therefore command a majority continuously, and where no party has one, several must combine.

The electoral system does not prevent it. First past the post is often said to manufacture majorities, and it does so where competition is between two parties. Where competition is multi-cornered and support is regionally concentrated, it produces neither a majority nor proportionality, which is the Indian pattern.

The social basis. A country divided by language, religion, caste and region produces parties whose support is regional or sectional, and such parties can win seats without ever approaching a majority.

The kinds of coalition

Pre-poll alliances, formed before the election, with seats distributed among the partners and often a common programme and a declared leader. These have a stronger claim to a mandate, because the voter knew what combination they were voting for.

Post-poll coalitions, assembled after the results. The voter did not choose the combination, which is the standing objection to them.

Coalitions with outside support, where a party sustains the government by voting with it without joining the Council of Ministers. This is a distinctively Indian arrangement and it is unstable, because the supporting party has influence without responsibility and can withdraw at any time.

Minority governments, which are not coalitions at all but survive by issue by issue support, and which belong in the same discussion because they arise from the same arithmetic.

The phases of coalition government in India

An answer that gives the phases is much stronger than one that describes coalitions in the abstract.

Dominance at the Union with coalitions in the States. For the first two decades after independence one party held a clear majority at the Union while several States saw non-Congress coalitions, particularly from the late 1960s. Coalition politics in India begins in the States.

Contents This chapter on its own page

munotes.in417

The rest of this chapter comes with the notes. See the prices

Chapter Eighty-One

The Future of the Multi-Party System in India

Syllabus topic 4.1.3, "Coalition Politics and Future of Multi- Party System in India"

In one line

Whether India remains a multi-party system depends on whether regional parties keep their hold on States, on how party finance is regulated, and on how the recognition rules operate, and there are strong arguments both ways.

In the wording a student can write in an exam: the future of the multi-party system in India is contested; the case for its continuance rests on the country's linguistic, regional and social diversity, on the entrenchment of regional parties in State politics, and on the federal structure which gives them a permanent arena; the case for a return to a dominant party system rests on the advantages of scale in finance, organisation and communication, on the consolidation of votes behind national parties, and on the difficulty small parties face in meeting the thresholds for recognition.

What a multi-party system is, and what India has

A multi-party system exists where more than two parties are capable of winning seats and of participating in government, so that a single party's majority is not the normal expectation.

A dominant party system exists where many parties compete but one wins repeatedly, so that competition is real and alternation is rare.

A two-party system exists where two parties alternate and others are marginal. The standard examples are the United States, where the Democrats and the Republicans alternate and no third party has won the presidency in more than a century, and the United Kingdom, where Labour and the Conservatives have formed every government since the nineteen twenties. MU has asked for two such countries by name, so learn a pair.

India has been all three at different times, and describing which is which is the first task of an answer.

The first two decades: a dominant party system at the Union with genuine competition inside the dominant party and multi-party competition in several States.

From the late 1960s to the 1980s: increasing competition, the first alternations, and the growth of State parties.

From the late 1980s to the mid 2010s: a genuine multi-party system in which no party won a majority at the Union.

Since then: single-party majorities at the Union with the multi-party structure intact beneath them, since States continue to be governed by parties that do not compete nationally.

That last observation is the key to the whole question. India's party system is not one system but two: a system at the Union and a system in each State, and they need not be the same shape at the same time.

The case for the multi-party system continuing

1. Diversity has not diminished. The languages, regions, religions and castes that produced regional and community parties are still there, and no party that must appeal across all of them can be everybody's first preference.

Contents This chapter on its own page

munotes.in422

The rest of this chapter comes with the notes. See the prices

Chapter Eighty-Three

The Conditions Essential for the Success of Democracy

Syllabus topic 4.2.2, "Conditions Essential for the Success of Democracy"

In one line

A democracy needs an educated and participating citizenry, a measure of economic security, tolerance and the acceptance of dissent, independent institutions that hold rulers to the rules, and an opposition ready to take office.

In the wording a student can write in an exam: the success of democracy requires social conditions, principally an educated citizenry, a spirit of tolerance and a willingness to accept dissent and the verdict of the electorate; economic conditions, principally a level of security and a limitation of inequality sufficient to make political equality real; and institutional conditions, principally free and fair elections, an independent judiciary and election commission, a free press, the rule of law, an organised opposition, effective local government and a neutral administration.

The social conditions

Education. A voter must be able to obtain and assess information about candidates and policies, which is the practical form of the right to know at chapter 820. It is why article 21A now makes free and compulsory education a fundamental right, and it is what Mill and Ambedkar both insisted on.

Tolerance and the acceptance of dissent. A democracy asks a defeated group to accept a decision it opposes and to continue to work within the system. That is only possible where disagreement is not treated as disloyalty. Where it is, elections become contests to be won at any cost.

Acceptance of the electoral verdict. The single most important habit, and the least noticed. A democracy survives because losers concede.

A sense of common citizenship. Where the divisions of a society are so deep that a group regards a government drawn from another group as illegitimate in principle, the arithmetic of elections cannot hold the society together.

Public spirit and participation. Voting, joining associations, attending meetings, and the willingness to hold office.

The economic conditions

Security of subsistence. A person whose next meal is uncertain cannot deliberate, cannot afford to offend a patron and cannot risk the loss of work that political activity may bring. This is chapter 590's positive liberty applied to democracy.

Limitation of inequality. Political equality does not survive severe economic inequality, because influence follows resources. Ambedkar's warning at chapter 600 is the sharpest Indian statement of this, and it is properly placed here rather than treated as a slogan.

And the honest qualification. India adopted universal adult franchise at once, in a poor and largely illiterate society, and the experiment worked better than almost anybody predicted. Any answer which says that prosperity and literacy are preconditions must confront that fact, and the correct formulation is that they make democracy easier and are not conditions precedent.

The institutional conditions

Free and fair elections, held at fixed intervals, on a universal adult franchise, by secret ballot, conducted by an authority independent of the government.

Contents This chapter on its own page

munotes.in432

The rest of this chapter comes with the notes. See the prices

Chapter Eighty-Four

The Ethical Decay of Democracy

Syllabus topic 4.2.3, "Ethical Decay of Democracy"

In one line

Ethical decay is what happens when the forms of democracy are kept and the substance is hollowed out, so that elections continue while the things that made them meaningful are removed one at a time.

In the wording a student can write in an exam: the ethical decay of democracy refers to the erosion of the moral and institutional conditions on which democratic government depends, while its outward forms are preserved; its principal manifestations are the criminalisation of politics, the dominance of money in elections, defection and the trade in legislators, the capture or weakening of institutions meant to hold rulers to the rules, the decline of deliberation in legislatures, the use of communal and caste appeals, and the manipulation of information.

What is being claimed, and what is not

The claim is not that politicians are dishonest, which is a complaint about individuals and is made in every country and every century.

The claim is not that the machinery has been abolished. Elections are held, legislatures sit and courts function.

The claim is that the conditions at chapter 830 are being eroded while the machinery continues, so that an election ceases to perform the functions that made it a means of consent. That is a structural claim, it can be tested, and stating it in that form is the difference between an answer and a complaint.

The manifestations

1. Criminalisation of politics

Candidates and legislators against whom serious criminal cases are pending, and in some cases who have been convicted.

Why it is decay rather than crime. A person facing serious charges is not disqualified until convicted, and trials take many years, so the position is lawful and the effect is corrosive. It also alters the incentives of everybody else, because a candidate who can deter opponents has an advantage that has nothing to do with the electorate.

What the law has done. The disclosure requirement in Union of India v. Association for Democratic Reforms, (2002) 5 SCC 294, is the principal remedy: the voter has a right to know the antecedents of a candidate, derived from article 19(1)(a), because the casting of a vote is an expression of opinion and a meaningful choice requires information, and the Election Commission was directed under article 324 to require affidavits on pending cases and convictions, on assets and liabilities of the candidate, spouse and dependants, and on educational qualifications. The remedy is disclosure, which leaves the decision to the voter.

2. Money

The cost of contesting has risen far beyond what an ordinary candidate can raise, which restricts who can stand, makes parties dependent on contributors, and creates an expectation of return. Chapter 860 sets out the electoral bonds judgment, which is the constitutional treatment of it.

Contents This chapter on its own page

munotes.in437

The rest of this chapter comes with the notes. See the prices

Chapter Eighty-Five

The Old Challenges to Indian Democracy

Syllabus topic 4.2.4, "Challenges to Indian Democracy - Old and New"

In one line

The challenges India began with were poverty, illiteracy, caste, communalism, regionalism, the centre's power to dismiss State governments, and the possibility that a government could suspend the Constitution from inside, and the last two were answered by cases and the first five have not been answered at all.

In the wording a student can write in an exam: the older challenges to Indian democracy are the social and economic conditions with which it began, namely mass poverty, illiteracy and extreme inequality; the divisions of caste, religion, language and region, which threatened both the working of elections and the unity of the country; the misuse of central power to dismiss State governments under article 356; and the demonstrated possibility that a government could suspend rights and postpone elections while remaining formally lawful, which occurred during the Emergency.

Why "old" is a defensible category

They were present from 1950. Each was identified in the Constituent Assembly and by the leadership of the time as a threat to the arrangement being adopted.

They arose from India's social and constitutional structure, not from any later development.

And most of them persist. The point of the category is not that they are past but that they are original, which is why an answer must not say that the old challenges have been overcome.

The challenges

1. Poverty and economic inequality

The problem. A democracy adopted in a society where most people lacked subsistence, in which the conditions at chapter 830 for real political equality were absent.

Why it threatens democracy. A person dependent for their livelihood on a landlord, an employer or a patron cannot vote freely, cannot afford to protest and cannot risk the loss of work. Ambedkar's warning at chapter 600 is the classical Indian statement.

What was done. The Directive Principles, land reform legislation, and later welfare and employment programmes, which chapter 710 examined.

Where it stands. Poverty has fallen very substantially and inequality has not, and the second is what bears on democracy.

2. Illiteracy

Why it threatens democracy. A voter who cannot read cannot check a claim, cannot read a manifesto or an affidavit, and is dependent on intermediaries.

What was done. Universal schooling as a directive, symbols on ballot papers so that illiteracy did not disenfranchise anybody, and eventually article 21A.

What is worth noticing, because it corrects a widespread assumption: turnout among poorer and less literate voters in India has frequently exceeded turnout among the well educated and prosperous. Illiteracy limited what a voter could check and did not prevent them from voting.

3. Caste

The problem. A hierarchy of birth in a system founded on the equality of persons, and the most fundamental of the old challenges.

Contents This chapter on its own page

munotes.in442

The rest of this chapter comes with the notes. See the prices

Chapter Eighty-Six

The New Challenges to Indian Democracy

Syllabus topic 4.2.4, "Challenges to Indian Democracy - Old and New"

In one line

The newer threats are money on a scale that decides who can compete, information environments in which voters are addressed separately and cannot check what they are told, and pressure on the institutions whose job is to say no.

In the wording a student can write in an exam: the newer challenges to Indian democracy are the scale and opacity of political finance; the transformation of the information environment by social media, targeted messaging and coordinated disinformation; the concentration of media ownership; pressure on the independence of institutions charged with holding governments to the rules; surveillance and the erosion of privacy; the shrinking of legislative deliberation; and the rise of a majoritarian conception of democracy in which winning an election is treated as authorising anything.

The challenges

1. Money, and the electoral bonds judgment

The problem. Elections cost sums no ordinary candidate can raise, so parties depend on those who can supply them, and a contributor who cannot be identified cannot be held to account by anybody.

Facts. Association for Democratic Reforms v. Union of India, decided 15 February 2024. The Finance Act 2017 introduced the Electoral Bond Scheme and made four connected amendments: to section 31 of the Reserve Bank of India Act, to section 29C of the Representation of the People Act 1951, to section 13A of the Income Tax Act, and to section 182 of the Companies Act. Together these permitted contributions to parties through bearer instruments bought from a bank, exempted parties from disclosing contributions received in that form, exempted them from maintaining records of those contributors, and removed the previous cap on the proportion of profits a company could contribute. Petitioners under article 32 sought a declaration that the Scheme and those provisions were unconstitutional.

Held. A Constitution Bench held that information about the funding of a political party is essential for a voter to exercise the freedom to vote in an effective manner, so that the Scheme and the impugned provisions, to the extent that they infringe the voter's right to information by anonymising contributions, violate article 19(1)(a). Applying the proportionality standard, which requires a legitimate goal, a suitable means, the least restrictive and equally effective alternative, and a balance between the restriction and the goal, the Court held the infringement unjustified. It declared unconstitutional the Electoral Bond Scheme, the proviso to section 29C(1) of the Representation of the People Act as amended, section 182(3) of the Companies Act as amended, and section 13A(b) of the Income Tax Act as amended. It further held that the deletion of the proviso to section 182(1) of the Companies Act, which had permitted unlimited corporate contributions, is arbitrary and violative of article 14. And it directed disclosure of the information on contributions already received under the Scheme.

Contents This chapter on its own page

munotes.in448

The rest of this chapter comes with the notes. See the prices

Chapter Eighty-Seven

Gandhian Gram Swaraj

Syllabus topic 4.3, "Democratic Decentralisation and Local Governments"; 4.3.1, "Beginnings - Gandhian Gram Swaraj and Dr Ambedkar's Views Decentralisation"

In one line

Gram Swaraj is Gandhi's proposal that India be organised as a very large number of self-governing villages, each managing its own affairs, related to each other not as a pyramid but as widening circles with the individual at the centre.

In the wording a student can write in an exam: Gram Swaraj, meaning village self-rule, is Gandhi's conception of the ideal political order, in which every village is a self-sufficient republic managing its own agriculture, industry, education, health, sanitation and justice, exercising full powers over its own affairs, and related to larger units not by subordination but by voluntary cooperation, so that political power is exercised at the level nearest to the people and the state above exists to serve rather than to direct.

The two words

Gram is village. Swaraj is self-rule, and Gandhi insisted the word means more than independence from foreign rule.

His own distinction, from Hind Swaraj. Independence is the removal of a foreign government; swaraj is rule over oneself, which begins with the individual's control over their own conduct and extends outward. A country whose foreign rulers have gone and whose people are governed from a distant capital by people they cannot reach has independence and not swaraj.

That distinction is the whole of Gram Swaraj. Swaraj at the level of a country is only real if there is swaraj at the level of a village, and swaraj at the level of a village is only real if there is swaraj in the person.

What Gandhi proposed

A self-sufficient village. Producing its own food and cloth, meeting its own basic needs, so that it is not dependent on a distant economy over which it has no control. Dependence, on his account, is the opposite of self-rule.

Full authority over its own affairs. Its own agriculture, its own village industries, its own school, its own sanitation and health, its own watch and ward, and its own settlement of disputes.

Managed by a panchayat chosen annually by the adults of the village, exercising the functions of legislature, executive and judiciary together for village matters. Gandhi was explicit that this combination, which would be objectionable at a larger scale, is workable in a body small enough for everybody to see what it does.

Non-violent. The village defends itself by non-violent means, and Gandhi accepted that this required a level of discipline most villages did not have.

Bread labour and swadeshi. Everybody performs some physical work, and needs are met locally by preference.

Trusteeship within the village, so that those with more hold it for the community, which is chapter 750's material applied locally.

The oceanic circle

Gandhi's answer to the obvious question, what holds the villages together, and the image should be reproduced in an answer because it is precisely designed against the alternative.

Contents This chapter on its own page

munotes.in454

The rest of this chapter comes with the notes. See the prices

Chapter Eighty-Eight

Dr Ambedkar's Views on Decentralisation

Syllabus topic 4.3.1, "Beginnings - Gandhian Gram Swaraj and Dr Ambedkar's Views Decentralisation"

In one line

Ambedkar opposed making the village the unit of the Constitution, because for the people he represented the village was not a republic but the place where their exclusion was enforced, and he said so in the Constituent Assembly in terms nobody has been able to soften.

In the wording a student can write in an exam: Ambedkar rejected the proposal that the village should be the unit of the Indian Constitution, holding that the village republics had been the ruination of India, that the village was a sink of localism, a den of ignorance, narrow-mindedness and communalism, and that he was glad the Draft Constitution had discarded the village and adopted the individual as its unit; his objection rested on the position of the excluded, for whom local dominance was closer and more inescapable than any distant government, and his alternative was constitutional democracy with enforceable individual rights, State-directed economic measures and social reform aimed at caste.

The passage

In his speech on the Draft Constitution, Ambedkar answered those who criticised the Constitution for ignoring the village. He first quoted the classic description of village communities surviving every dynasty and every conquest, and then turned it against those who admired it.

His own words. Such is the part the village communities have played in the history of their country. Knowing this, what pride can one feel in them? That they have survived through all vicissitudes may be a fact. But mere survival has no value. The question is on what plane they have survived. Surely on a low, on a selfish level. I hold that these village republics have been the ruination of India. I am therefore surprised that those who condemn provincialism and communalism should come forward as champions of the village. What is the village but a sink of localism, a den of ignorance, narrow-mindedness and communalism? I am glad that the Draft Constitution has discarded the village and adopted the individual as its unit.

Read the argument, not only the words. Ambedkar's point is not that villages are unpleasant. It is that survival is not a merit, that what survived was a particular social order, and that admiring the survival is admiring the order.

Why he held it

Because of who lives at the bottom of a village. For those excluded by caste, the village was where the exclusion was administered: which well, which street, which land, which occupation, which temple. A distant government is remote and can be appealed to; a village is neither.

Because closeness is not the same as freedom. Gandhi's argument at chapter 870 is that participation is real at village scale. Ambedkar's reply is that domination is also real at village scale, and that a person dominated by neighbours cannot leave, cannot appeal and cannot be anonymous.

Contents This chapter on its own page

munotes.in459

The rest of this chapter comes with the notes. See the prices

Chapter Eighty-Nine

Article 40, and the Road to the 73rd and 74th Amendments

Syllabus topic 4.3.2, "Key features of Article 40, 73 and 74 Constitutional Amendments"

In one line

Article 40 told the State to organise village panchayats and to give them the powers of units of self-government, and because a Directive Principle cannot be enforced in a court, almost nothing happened until Parliament wrote local government into the Constitution as an enforceable Part in 1992.

In the wording a student can write in an exam: article 40 is a Directive Principle of State Policy under which the State shall take steps to organise village panchayats and endow them with such powers and authority as may be necessary to enable them to function as units of self-government; being a Directive Principle it is by article 37 not enforceable by any court although it is fundamental in the governance of the country, and the consequence was that panchayats existed only where a State chose to create them, were dissolved and left unelected at the State's convenience, and were given whatever powers and money the State wished, so that after four decades and four expert committees Parliament enacted the Seventy-third and Seventy-fourth Amendments, which took the subject out of the State's discretion and placed it in Part IX and Part IXA of the Constitution.

The text of article 40

Article 40, in Part IV, reads: The State shall take steps to organise village panchayats and endow them with such powers and authority as may be necessary to enable them to function as units of self-government.

Three things about that sentence.

"Units of self-government". Not units of administration. Self-government means governing, not carrying out somebody else's programme, which is the difference between a panchayat and a village level office of the State.

"Take steps to organise". The State is directed to create them. In 1950 there were no panchayats to protect, so the Article is a direction to build.

"Such powers and authority as may be necessary." The powers are not listed. That was left to the State, and became the gap through which the Article was emptied.

Why it is a Directive Principle, and what follows

Article 36 and article 37 govern the whole of Part IV. By article 37, the provisions of Part IV shall not be enforceable by any court, but the principles laid down are nevertheless fundamental in the governance of the country and it shall be the duty of the State to apply these principles in making laws.

So a citizen could not sue. A villager whose panchayat had not been constituted, or had been superseded for eleven years, had nothing to file. There was no right, so there was no remedy.

And the compromise at chapter 880 is visible here. The village entered the Constitution, which is what the Gandhians wanted, and it entered a Part that cannot be enforced, which is what the Assembly was prepared to concede. Article 40 records the disagreement rather than settling it.

Contents This chapter on its own page

munotes.in464

The rest of this chapter comes with the notes. See the prices

Chapter Ninety

The 73rd Amendment: Panchayats

Syllabus topic 4.3.2, "Key features of Article 40, 73 and 74 Constitutional Amendments"

In one line

The 73rd Amendment inserted Part IX into the Constitution, which makes panchayats compulsory, elected, reserved, term limited and financed through a defined process, so that local self-government stopped depending on what a State Government felt like doing.

In the wording a student can write in an exam: the Constitution (Seventy-third Amendment) Act, 1992, in force from 24 April 1993, inserted Part IX, "The Panchayats", comprising articles 243 to 243O and the Eleventh Schedule; its key features are a Gram Sabha at the village level, a three tier structure of panchayats at the village, intermediate and district levels, direct election to all seats, reservation for the Scheduled Castes, the Scheduled Tribes and women, a fixed term of five years with elections completed before its expiry or within six months of a dissolution, an independent State Election Commission, a State Finance Commission every five years, and a list of twenty nine subjects in the Eleventh Schedule which a State may devolve to enable panchayats to function as institutions of self-government.

The features, article by article

Article 243: definitions

Gram Sabha means a body consisting of persons registered in the electoral rolls relating to a village comprised within the area of a panchayat at the village level. Panchayat means an institution, by whatever name called, of self-government constituted under article 243B, for the rural areas. Intermediate level and village are what the Governor notifies.

Two things are settled in the definitions themselves: the Gram Sabha is every voter and not a committee, and a panchayat is an institution of self-government, which repeats article 40's phrase in an enforceable Part.

Article 243A: the Gram Sabha

A Gram Sabha may exercise such powers and perform such functions at the village level as the Legislature of a State may, by law, provide. Chapter 920 is on this article, including the weakness of the word "may".

Article 243B: constitution of panchayats

There shall be constituted in every State panchayats at the village, intermediate and district levels. The word is mandatory, and this single sentence ends the position described at chapter 890 under which panchayats existed only where a State chose.

The exception: the intermediate level may be omitted in a State having a population not exceeding twenty lakhs.

Article 243C: composition

All the seats in a panchayat shall be filled by persons chosen by direct election from territorial constituencies, with the population to seats ratio kept as nearly the same as practicable.

The chairperson of a village panchayat is elected as the State Legislature provides, and of an intermediate or district panchayat by and from amongst the elected members.

The State may also provide representation for chairpersons of the tier below, and for members of the Lok Sabha, the Rajya Sabha and the State legislature within the area, at levels other than the village.

Contents This chapter on its own page

munotes.in470

The rest of this chapter comes with the notes. See the prices

Chapter Ninety-One

The 74th Amendment: Municipalities

Syllabus topic 4.3.2, "Key features of Article 40, 73 and 74 Constitutional Amendments"

In one line

The 74th Amendment did for towns what the 73rd did for villages, and added two things villages did not need: a committee inside the town below the level of the council, and a committee above the town that makes the rural and urban plans into one plan for the district.

In the wording a student can write in an exam: the Constitution (Seventy-fourth Amendment) Act, 1992, in force from 1 June 1993, inserted Part IXA, "The Municipalities", comprising articles 243P to 243ZG and the Twelfth Schedule; it requires the constitution of a Nagar Panchayat for a transitional area, a Municipal Council for a smaller urban area and a Municipal Corporation for a larger urban area, direct election of all seats from wards, reservation for the Scheduled Castes, the Scheduled Tribes and women on the same pattern as article 243D, a five year term with timely elections, elections conducted by the same State Election Commission, finance reviewed by the same State Finance Commission, and eighteen subjects listed in the Twelfth Schedule; and it adds Wards Committees in municipalities of three lakhs or more, a District Planning Committee in every district and a Metropolitan Planning Committee in every metropolitan area.

What is the same as Part IX

An answer should dispose of this in a paragraph and then go to the differences.

PanchayatsMunicipalitiesSubstance
243B243QConstitution of the bodies is mandatory
243C243RAll seats by direct election
243D243TReservation for Scheduled Castes and Scheduled Tribes in proportion to population, one-third of those seats for their women, not less than one-third of all seats for women, chairperson offices reserved as State law provides, backward classes enabling only under 243T(6)
243E243UFive years and no longer; election before expiry or within six months of dissolution
243F243VDisqualifications, with the twenty one years proviso
243G243WPowers may be devolved, with the Twelfth Schedule
243H243XTaxes, assignment, grants in aid, Funds
243I243YThe same Finance Commission constituted under 243I reviews municipal finances too
243J243ZAccounts and audit
243K243ZAThe same State Election Commission conducts municipal elections
243M243ZCScheduled Areas and tribal areas excluded
243O243ZGBar on interference by courts in electoral matters

Note the two economies. There is one State Election Commission and one State Finance Commission for both rural and urban bodies, under articles 243ZA and 243Y. This is worth a line in an answer because it is what makes Kishansing Tomar, decided on a municipal corporation, authority for panchayats as well.

The four things that are different

1. Three kinds of municipality, article 243Q

There shall be constituted in every State:

a Nagar Panchayat for a transitional area, that is, an area in transition from rural to urban;

Contents This chapter on its own page

munotes.in477

The rest of this chapter comes with the notes. See the prices

Chapter Ninety-Two

The Gram Sabha and Participatory Democracy

Syllabus topic 4.3.2, "Key features of Article 40, 73 and 74 Constitutional Amendments Gram Sabha and Participatory Democracy"

In one line

The Gram Sabha is the only body in the Indian constitutional scheme that consists of every voter rather than of representatives, which makes it the point at which participatory democracy enters a Constitution that is otherwise representative throughout.

In the wording a student can write in an exam: by article 243(b) the Gram Sabha is a body consisting of persons registered in the electoral rolls relating to a village comprised within the area of a panchayat at the village level, and by article 243A it may exercise such powers and perform such functions at the village level as the Legislature of a State may by law provide; it is thus the assembly of the whole village electorate rather than an elected body, and it is the constitutional expression of participatory democracy, meaning a system in which citizens take part directly in decisions rather than only in choosing those who decide, though its powers depend on State law and are in most States advisory, so that the article guarantees the assembly and not its authority.

The Gram Sabha in the Constitution

Article 243(b): "Gram Sabha" means a body consisting of persons registered in the electoral rolls relating to a village comprised within the area of a panchayat at the village level.

Read the definition carefully, because everything follows from it.

It is a body of persons, not of representatives. Every registered voter of the village is a member by virtue of being on the roll. There is no election to it and no seats in it.

It exists automatically. A State does not constitute a Gram Sabha; it exists wherever there is a village panchayat, because the definition makes it the electorate of that village.

It is only at the village level. There is no equivalent at the intermediate or district level, and none in Part IXA for towns, which chapter 910 identifies as the sharpest gap in the urban reform.

Article 243A: A Gram Sabha may exercise such powers and perform such functions at the village level as the Legislature of a State may, by law, provide.

The word is "may", and the powers are the State's to give. This is the weakness in the design and an answer must name it. The Constitution creates an assembly of every voter and then leaves it to the State to decide whether that assembly decides anything. In most States its statutory functions are to meet a fixed number of times a year, to consider the annual accounts, the audit report and the development programme, and to be consulted, and its resolutions do not bind the panchayat.

Where the Gram Sabha has real power: two central Acts

This is the material that turns a general answer into a good one, because it is where Parliament did what article 243A only permitted.

Contents This chapter on its own page

munotes.in484

The rest of this chapter comes with the notes. See the prices

Chapter Ninety-Three

Gender in Local Government: The Promise and the Limits

Syllabus topic 4.3.3, "Implications for gender and social inclusion- Promises & Limitations"

In one line

The 73rd and 74th Amendments reserved not less than one third of all seats and of chairperson offices for women, which put more women into elected office in India than any other measure ever has, and the limits are that a seat is not the same as authority.

In the wording a student can write in an exam: articles 243D(3) and 243T(3) reserve not less than one third of the seats to be filled by direct election in every panchayat and municipality for women, articles 243D(2) and 243T(2) reserve not less than one third of the seats reserved for the Scheduled Castes and Scheduled Tribes for women of those communities, and articles 243D(4) and 243T(4) reserve not less than one third of the offices of chairperson at each level for women; the reservation has no time limit, since article 243D(5) applies the article 334 sunset only to the Scheduled Caste and Scheduled Tribe reservation, and many States have raised the share to one half by law, which the words "not less than" permit; the promise is descriptive representation and its documented effects on what local bodies spend on and on what voters come to accept, and the limitations are the proxy exercise of office by male relatives, the disruption caused by rotation of reserved seats, the dependence of local bodies on officials and on money they do not control, and disqualifications in State law that fall hardest on the women the reservation was meant to reach.

The promise

What the Constitution actually reserved

Article 243D(3), and identically article 243T(3) for municipalities: not less than one-third, including the seats reserved for women of the Scheduled Castes and the Scheduled Tribes, of the total number of seats to be filled by direct election in every panchayat shall be reserved for women, and such seats may be allotted by rotation to different constituencies.

Article 243D(2), and 243T(2): not less than one-third of the seats reserved for the Scheduled Castes and the Scheduled Tribes shall be reserved for women belonging to those communities. This is the intersection, and it matters: without clause (2) the Scheduled Caste quota could have gone entirely to men and the women's quota entirely to the dominant castes.

Article 243D(4), and 243T(4): not less than one-third of the total number of offices of chairperson in the panchayats at each level shall be reserved for women, allotted by rotation. Office, not merely membership, which is what makes the reservation more than symbolic.

Three features that carry marks

"Not less than" is a floor, not a quota. A State may reserve more, and many have legislated for one half. Nothing in Part IX prevents it.

Contents This chapter on its own page

munotes.in491

The rest of this chapter comes with the notes. See the prices

Chapter Ninety-Four

Social Inclusion in Local Government: The Promise and the Limits

Syllabus topic 4.3.3, "Implications for gender and social inclusion- Promises & Limitations"

In one line

The 73rd and 74th Amendments reserved seats and chairperson offices in every local body for the Scheduled Castes and the Scheduled Tribes in proportion to their population, and merely permitted reservation for backward classes, which the Supreme Court has since confined by a triple test, so that inclusion in local government is guaranteed for two groups, conditional for a third, and in every case delivers a seat rather than authority.

In the wording a student can write in an exam: articles 243D(1) and 243T(1) make reservation for the Scheduled Castes and the Scheduled Tribes mandatory in every panchayat and municipality in proportion to their population in the area, with one third of those seats for their women under clause (2) and chairperson offices reserved under clause (4), the reservation ceasing under clause (5) with the period fixed by article 334; articles 243D(6) and 243T(6) merely enable a State to reserve seats and chairperson offices for backward classes, and in K. Krishna Murthy v. Union of India the Supreme Court upheld those enabling clauses while holding that political backwardness is distinct from social and educational backwardness, that identification must be by a dedicated commission conducting a rigorous empirical inquiry, and that the aggregate of vertical reservation must not exceed fifty per cent except to safeguard Scheduled Tribes in Scheduled Areas, a triple test applied in Vikas Kishanrao Gawali v. State of Maharashtra to read down a uniform statewide quota; and the limitations are proxy exercise of reserved offices, rotation, the untouchability and dominance that the reservation of a seat cannot reach, and the weakness of the office itself.

The promise: what Part IX guarantees

The Scheduled Castes and the Scheduled Tribes

Articles 243D(1) and 243T(1): seats shall be reserved for the Scheduled Castes and the Scheduled Tribes in every panchayat and every municipality, and the number shall bear, as nearly as may be, the same proportion to the total number of seats to be filled by direct election as their population in the area bears to the total population; the seats may be allotted by rotation.

Proportional, not a fixed quota, and everywhere. In a village where a quarter of the population is Scheduled Caste, a quarter of the seats are reserved. This is what makes the guarantee real in the places where it is most needed: it is largest exactly where the excluded population is largest.

Clause (2): not less than one third of those reserved seats for women of those communities, which is chapter 930's intersection.

Clause (4): the offices of chairperson are reserved in the same proportion at each level, allotted by rotation between panchayats. In K. Krishna Murthy the Court upheld this, holding that chairperson posts cannot be equated with solitary posts in the context of public employment, which is the answer to the argument that reserving a single office in a body is reserving a single post.

Contents This chapter on its own page

munotes.in499

The rest of this chapter comes with the notes. See the prices

The rest of this subject

These notes are cut from the University's printed syllabus. Open the syllabus itself, or the past papers, for the same subject.

Report or request
Done!